hindustan petroleum corporation...

SEAL & SIGNATURE OF BIDDER 1

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED ENGINEERING & PROJECTS

HINDUSTAN BHAWAN, 1ST FLOOR, 8, SHOORJI VALLAVDAS MARG,

BALLARD ESTATE, MUMBAI-400 001

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

TENDER DOCUMENT

FOR

INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

AT

DISASTER RECOVERY DATA CENTRE, PLOT NO 40, PHASE II, HITEC CITY

MADHAPUR, HYDERABAD


HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED ENGINEERING & PROJECTS

HINDUSTAN BHAWAN, 1ST FLOOR, 8, SHOORJI VALLAVDAS MARG,

BALLARD ESTATE, MUMBAI-400 001

�

�

�

�

�

TENDER NO: TENDER DOCUMENT ISSUED TO: NAME OF BIDDER: ADDRESS :

Ch. Manager Procurement (P & P)


INDEX

Section Description

A Notice Inviting Tender

B Instructions to Bidders

C Declaration

D Preamble to Schedule of Quantities

E Unpriced Bid

F Time Schedule

G Special Conditions of Contract

H Schedule of Quantities

I Technical Specifications

J Approved Makes

K Environment, Health & Safety Requirements

L EMD Format

M General Terms and Conditions of Contract

N Proposal Forms

O Drawings

P Priced Bid

Section P – Priced Bid Format is enclosed separately


A. NOTICE INVITING TENDER


HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (A Government of India Enterprise)

MARKETING DIVISION Hindustan Bhawan, 8, Shoorji Vallabhdas Marg, Ballard Estate, Mumbai- 400 001, India

Phone: 022 22637451 / 22612149, Fax: 022 22613576

NOTICE INVITING TENDER JOB: INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMNT SYSTEM

AT DRDC , HYDERABAD Sealed tenders are invited under two bid system (Unpriced & Priced) from competent & eligible Indian bidders for carrying out Integrated Building Management System works at our Disaster Recovery Data Centre (DRDC) at Hi-tech City, Hyderabad as per details given below- 1 Bid Document No. : 7000027-HD-10002

2 Bid Document on sale : 26.06.2007 to 20.07.2007

3 Bid Due Date : 24.07.2007 (1500 Hours IST)

4 Unpriced Bid opening : 24.07.2007 (1530 Hours IST)

5 Bid document cost : Rs 5000/- (non refundable)

6 EMD : Rs 3,00,000/- (Rs three lakh only)

For further details including EMD, BID QUALIFICATION CRITERIA, detailed NIT, purchase of tender document etc. please visit our web site www.hindustanpetroleum.com and go to tender section by clicking the link “Tenders”. HPCL reserves the right to extend price/purchase preference as per prevailing guidelines of Government of India. Ch. Manager Procurement (P & P)

1.0 BRIEF SCOPE OF WORK:

The brief scope of work comprises of, but not limited to, the following: a. Design, supply, installation and commissioning of Integrated Building Management

system comprising of the following:

i. Building Automation system for

HVAC (Chillers, Primary valves, AHU’s etc). Electrical System (HT/LT) including DG operation Vertical Transportation system


Water Management System ii. Integrated building management system including the IBMS software to integrate

and monitore the following services from a central location.

Fire Detection & Alarm Public Address Access Control Closed Circuit Surveillance & Digital Video Recording Lighting Control Water Management Fire Fighting iii The following system specific to the requirement of the Data centre.: Gas based Fire Suppression systems. Water leak detection Aspiration Smoke Detection Ultrasonic Pest Repellent system b. Comprehensive annual maintenance of the commissioned IBMS for 5 years after

completion of Defect Liability Period (DLP) 2.0 BID QUALIFICATION CRITERIA: 2.1 Specific Criteria

a. Bidder shall have successfully supplied, installed and commissioned Integrated Building Management System (on a single Central Monitoring Station) for a commercial establishment/ data centre comprising of Building Management and Automation System , Gas based fire suppression system, Fire Alarm System, Access Control System and CCTV.

b. The system mentioned in 2.1 a should be in successful operation for at least six months as

of 31.05.2007.

2.2 Commercial Criteria

Bidders should have been awarded and satisfactorily completed either of the following in the last 7 years ending 31.05.2007

2.2.1 At least one order of value Rs 2.65 Crores comprising of the specific criteria mentioned in 2.1a and 2.1b

Or

2.2.2 At least two orders of Rs 1.65 Crores each comprising of the specific criteria mentioned in


2.1a and 2.1b

Or 2.2.3 At least three orders of Rs 1.30 crores each comprising of the specific criteria mentioned

in 2.1a and 2.1b

2.3 Annual Turnover: shall meet the minimum prescribed pre-qualification requirement as

follows:

As per the audited balance sheet and Profit and Loss account the average annual financial turnover during the last three financial years (2004-2005, 2005-2006, 2006-2007) should be at least Rs. 240 Lakhs.

2.4 Net worth as per the latest (2006-07) audited balance sheet and Profit & Loss account shall

be positive. 2.5 Bidder shall furnish documentary evidence i.e. copies of purchase orders / relevant pages of

contract, completion certificates providing the details of equipments supplied , installed and commissioned, certificate of successful operation of the IBMS system from the client/project consultant, annual reports containing audited balance sheets and profit & loss accounts statement in support of their fulfilling the bid qualification criteria. HPCL reserve the right to complete the evaluation based on the details furnished without seeking any additional information.

2.6 Bids from Consortiums shall not be accepted.

A Joint venture existing as a company can submit the offer provided; they meet the Bid Qualification criteria as indicated, supported with the Purchase Orders executed and Balance Sheet in the name of Joint Venture participating in the tender.

3.0 GENERAL INFORMATION 3.1 Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) shall be accepted in the form of demand draft (in favour of

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited, payable at Mumbai) or original Bank Guarantee issued by a scheduled bank (other than cooperative bank) in the format enclosed with tender document. Amount of EMD is indicated above. In case EMD is submitted in form of Bank Guarantee, it should be made on non-judicial stamp paper of appropriate value (denomination) and should be valid for six months from due date / extended due date of the tender. EMD in any other form shall be treated as offer without EMD and shall not be acceptable. EMD should be kept in separate envelope and should accompany the unpriced bid. If the EMD is not in line with the amount called for or accompanies the price bid, the offer shall be rejected. Public sector undertaking (self declaration required) and Units registered with NSIC (Copy of valid registration up to specified volumes) are exempted from submission of EMD. Offer received without requisite amount of EMD as above shall be rejected.


3.2 The tender document (non- transferable) can be purchased against written request on LETTER HEAD from the office of Chief Manager Procurement (Project & Pipelines) at Mumbai on payment of tender document cost ( Rs. 5000/- non-refundable) by crossed demand draft in favour of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Ltd., payable at Mumbai issued by any Scheduled bank (other than cooperative bank). Units registered with NSIC (Valid certificate copy required) are exempted from payment of tender document cost. Tenders can be purchased on any working day (Monday - Friday) between 10.30 Hrs IST to 12.30 Hrs IST and 14.30 Hrs IST to 16.00 Hrs IST. Parties willing to obtain document by post must send their request (at above address) along with DD towards tender document cost. HPCL shall not be responsible for any postal delays or non-receipt of tender document whatsoever.

3.3 Bidder can also download the Tender Document from HPCL website

http://www.hindustanpetroleum.com. In case bidder opts to quote on the basis of such downloaded tender document from website, the bidder shall enclose the requisite bid document fee (Rs 5000/-) by crossed demand draft as explained above, in the EMD envelope. In case of NSIC registered bidders, valid NSIC certificate shall be submitted along with Un-priced bid. Offers not in conformity with the above shall be rejected.

3.4 Bid document is non-transferable. Bidder must buy the bid document in his own name and

submit the bid directly. Bids received from bidders in whose name bid document has been purchased shall only be considered. Bid submitted by bidder who have not purchased the bidding document either directly or through their authorized agents will be rejected.

3.5 HPCL may issue clarifications/amendments in the form of addendum/corrigendum during

the bidding period . For the addendum/corrigendum issued during the bidding period, bidders shall confirm the inclusion of addendum/corrigendum in their bid. Bidder shall follow the instructions issued along with addendum/corrigendum.

3.6 A firm which is not a PSU or an associate or a joint venture of a PSU, hired to provide

consultancy services for preparation or implementation of project, and any of its affiliates, will be disqualified from subsequently providing goods or works or services related to the initial assignment for the project.

3.7 Completed Tenders should be deposited in the tender box provided in the office of Chief

Manager Procurement (Projects & Pipelines) at Hindustan Bhawan-Ground Floor, 8, Shoorji Vallabhdas Marg, Ballard Estate, Mumbai 400 001 super scribing Tender No. on top cover on or before bid due date and time as mentioned in NIT. Unpriced (Technical) bids shall be opened on the date and time as mentioned in the NIT at above address in presence of attending bidders / their authorized representatives (authorization letter required). Tenders received after stipulated due date and time, for any reason whatsoever, including postal delays, will not be considered.

3.8 Completion period: For Supply, Installation & Commissioning: 5 months from date of LOI 3.9 Bids not received by the due date and time shall be rejected and representative of such

bidders shall not be allowed to attend the bid opening

3.10 HPCL shall not be responsible for any expenses incurred by bidders in connection with the preparation & delivery of their bids, site visit and other expenses incurred during bidding


process regardless of the conduct of outcome of the biding process.

3.11 Fax/e-mail bids shall not be accepted.

3.12 HPCL reserves the right to accept or reject any one or all the tenders without assigning any reason whatsoever irrespective of the outcome of the bidding process.

3.13 Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Ltd (HPCL) has developed the “Grievance Redressal

Mechanism" to deal with references / grievances if any that is received from parties who participated/ intends to participate in the Corporation Tenders. The details of the same are available on our website.

3.14 HPCL reserves the right to extend price/purchase preference as per prevailing guidelines of

Government of India.

Chief Manager Procurement (P&P)


B. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS


INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION/SITE INFORMATION

M/s Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited is in the process of constructing a state of art data centre at Hitech City Phase II in Hyderabad at the following address:

40, Hitech City, Phase-II Madhapur, Hyderabad,

Ranga Reddy District-500033. The building is about 65000 sq ft approximately in three floors. The plot plan is enclosed along with Floor wise details of Access Control System & Gas Supression system for the building. The civil works for the building are nearing completion. The facilities proposed in the three floors are also indicated in the floor layout which is enclosed. The site is situated about 15Km from the International/Domestic Airport (Begumpet), 16Km from Nampally Railway station and 19KM from Secunderabad Railway Station.

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

The brief scope of work comprises of, but not limited to, the following a. Design, supply, installation and commissioning of Integrated Building Management

system comprising of the following:

i. Building Automation system for

HVAC (Chillers, Primary valves, AHU’s etc). Electrical System (HT/LT) including DG operation Vertical Transportation system Water Management System iii. Integrated building management system including the IBMS software to integrate

and monitore the following services from a central location.

Fire Detection & Alarm Public Address Access Control Closed Circuit Surveillance & digital video recording Lighting Control Water Management Fire Fighting iii The following system specific to the requirement of the Data centre.: Water leak detection


Aspiration Smoke Detection Gas based Fire Suppression systems. Ultrasonic Pest Repellent system

b. Comprehensive annual maintenance of the commissioned IBMS for 5 years after completion of Defect Liability Period (DLP)

In case of any clarifications regarding the scope of work, the same shall be obtained from Shri. Jaideep Roy, Sr. Manager – E&P, Hindustan Bhawan, Ist Floor, 8, Shoorji Vallabhdas Marg, Ballard Estate, MUMBAI – 400 001 Tel. No. 22637106 and Fax Nos 22617032 or 22613482. The prospective bidders are requested to thoroughly read and comprehend the various sections of this tender document and visit the site before quoting for the tender. All sections of this tender document are to be read in conjunction with each other and accordingly quote in the priced bid. The descriptions of the items in the priced bid have been abridged and the bidder has to quote in the Priced Bid after thoroughly comprehending the Schedule of Quantities in conjunction with all other sections of this tender document.

2.0 SITE VISIT & BIDDING DOCUMENT 2.1. The bidder is advised to visit and examine the site of works and its surrounding and obtain

for himself on his own responsibility all information that may be necessary for preparing of the bid and entering into the contract. The cost of visiting the site shall be at bidder’s own expenses. No extra claim on account of non-familiarity of site conditions shall be entertained during execution of works.

2.2 The bidder and any of his personnel or agents will be granted permission by the Owner to

enter upon his premises and lands for the purpose of such inspection, but only upon the explicit condition that the bidder, his personnel or agents will release and indemnify the Owner and his personnel and agents from and against all liabilities in respect thereof and will be responsible for personnel injury (whether fatal or otherwise), loss of or damage and expenses incurred as a result hereof.

2.3 All expenses towards site visit shall be to the bidders account. 3. 0 BIDDING DOCUMENT

One set of bidding document can be purchased from the Office of Chief Manager – Procurement (P&P) at Hindustan Bhavan - Ground Floor, 8, Shoorji Vallabhdas Marg, Ballard Estate, Mumbai -400 001 on payment of requisite tender fee. Alternatively, bidders can down load the bidding document from HPCL’s website and shall submit the tender fee on or before the time of submission of bid. Bids submitted without tender fee shall be rejected.

4.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH UNPRICED BID The following details are required to be submitted in one original along with offer with the

pages numbered sequentially:


a) Information about Bidders as per Form PF-1. b) Following documents required as per form PF-2:

i. Sales Tax Clearance Certificate & PAN Number. ii. Power of Attorney in the name of person who has signed the bid.

iii. Solvency Certificate from Scheduled bank (Other than Co-Operative Banks). The date of solvency certificate shall not be prior to one year from the date of opening of unpriced bid.

iv. Copy of Audited Balance Sheet and Profit and Loss Account for the last three years i.e. for the years 2004-05, 2005-06 and 2006-07.

c) Details of works (as per clause 2.0 of NIT) done during past seven years with name

& postal address of clients along with copies of letters of Intent/work orders including schedule of items and completion certificate/ any other document which indicates Completion of the subject contract and other documents as per Form PF-6.

d) Site organization proposed to be deployed at the site separately for execution of the work with bio-data of site-in-charge & key personnel as per form PR-3/3A.

f) List of Equipment, Tools and Tackles proposed to be deployed as per Form PF-7. g) List of Exception & Deviation, if any, as per Form PF-4. In case of no deviation the

bidder shall furnish Form PF-4 duly signed & stamped. h) Compliance to Bid Requirement as per PF-5 duly signed and stamped. i) Quality Assurance / Quality Control Plan. j) Work completion Schedule in the form of Bar chart separately. k) All pages of the tender document including Unpriced Bid/Schedule of Quantities,

duly signed & stamped. l) Checklist & Commercial Questionnaire duly filled in. m) Details of concurrent works being executed by the bidder which shall include Name

of client, PO No & date, Value of the PO, Completion period, Date of commencement, Scheduled completion period, percentage of PO value completed and expected date of completion..

n) Technical details / documents as specified elsewhere in bidding document – particulars & catalogues of various bought out items mentioned in this Tender document or proposed to be used by the prospective bidders. Any other document sought any where in the tender document but not expressly listed herein.

o) Other documents, if any, bidder desires to submit to facilitate evaluation of their bid.

p) Copies of EPF Registration and ESIC Registration. q) Declaration r) Covering letter of Bid. s) The Certificate from the client for successful operation of the system (qualified for

bid criteria) for at least 6 months.

Bidder to note that the pages are to be numbered sequentially in continuation to the unpriced tender document i.e. the last page of the unpriced tender document (excluding drawings) is 269 and then the numbering of the pages in the bidder’s offer shall start from 270. 5.0 SPLIT-UP OF WORK

Total work shall be awarded to single agency and the scope of work shall not be split


6.0 SUBMISSION AND OPENING OF BID 6.1 This is only a Price Enquiry (Invitation to Offer) and not an Order. 6.2 The bidder shall take utmost care of the following: 6.3 The Bid shall be submitted in two parts namely, UNPRICED and PRICED Part,

respectively. 6.4 Bid shall be submitted in a sealed cover (Sealed envelope-1) super scribed tender No and

“BID – DO NOT OPEN”. The Bid shall contain separately sealed envelopes super scribed as below. Name of work, Tender Document No., due date and name of bidder shall also be clearly written out side the sealed envelopes.

PART – I: “TECHNO-COMMERCIAL PART” or

UNPRICED BID Unpriced bid shall be kept in an envelope (No 2), duly

sealed and legibly printed on the top of envelop” Part I - UNPRICED BID for Tender No.________”

PART – II: PRICE PART – DO NOT OPEN WITH PART-I Priced bid shall be kept in an envelope (No 4), duly

sealed and legibly printed on the top of envelop “Part II - PRICE BID for Tender No._______.”

6.5 PART-I (Sealed envelop-2) of offer shall contain –

6.5.1 Earnest Money Deposit in a separately sealed envelope (sealed envelope-3) for the amount as specified in NIT. In case of PSU the self declaration and in case of SSI units registered with NSIC, the copy of the valid registration certificate shall be enclosed in this envelope for being eligible for EMD exemption.

6.5.2 Bidding Document marked “ORIGINAL” duly signed and stamped on each page.

No cutting or overwriting should be done. Proforma of Schedule of Rates forming part of this shall not be filled in.

6.5.3 Covering letter, technical submission & other details in accordance with Clause 3.0

above forming part of the offer in original.

6.6 PART-II of offer, i.e. “Priced Bid” shall be submitted in separately sealed envelope (Sealed envelope-4) clearly super scribing on top of the envelope as “PRICE-PART”. This shall contain only the Priced Bid, with all rates (in figures & in words) and amounts duly printed/typed in the respective column with no Xerox or any other copy. Conditions, additions, deletions or modifications in PRICE-PART are not permitted. All corrections must be stamped and signed. Bidders are requested to quote their best prices considering


the fact that price negotiation, if required may be held with the Lowest Bidder only. Any claim of whatsoever nature shall not be considered at a later date. Any condition mentioned in PART-II shall not be taken into account either for evaluation or for award of work and shall render the offer liable for rejection.

6.8 The sealed Cover (Sealed envelope-1) and all the respective sealed envelopes (envelopes-2,

3 and 4) shall all bear the address given below

Ch. Manager- P&P, Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited,

8, Hindustan Bhavan, Ground Floor, Shoorji Vallabhdas Marg, Ballard Estate,

Mumbai 400 001.

If the priced bid is found in open condition or Part I and Part II are wrongly marked such offer will be rejected.

6.9 Technical and Unpriced Part of the Offer will be opened by HPCL as per the due date and

time mentioned in the NIT (Notice Inviting Tender) in the presence of Bidders/ Bidder’s duly authorized representative. The Priced part of the Offer will be subsequently opened in the presence of techno- commercially qualified bidders after appropriate intimation.

6.10 The bidding document shall be read in conjunction with any amendment issued

subsequently. 6.11 Bidding documents once issued are non transferable in other name and shall at all times

remain the property the exclusive property of the owner with a license to the bidder to use the bidding documents for limited purpose of submitting the bids.

7.0 VALIDITY OF EMD 7.1 Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) shall be accepted in the form of demand draft (in favour of

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited, payable at Mumbai) or in the form of Original Bank Guarantee for the amount given in the NIT and issued by any Scheduled bank (Other than Co-Operative Bank). Proforma of BG for EMD is given in this tender document. EMD in any other form will be treated as Offer without EMD. No adjustment shall be made with EMD submitted earlier with other tenders of HPCL or any outstanding amount with HPCL. Earnest Money Deposit furnished by the Bidder shall be valid for a period of 06 (SIX) MONTHS from the date of submission of the bid.

7.2 EMD of the unsuccessful bidders shall be returned as promptly as possible upon award of

PO/contract. 7.3 EMD of successful bidder will be returned upon the bidder’s accepting the contract, and

furnishing the requisite Security Deposit. 7.4 EMD may be forfeited for:

i. If a bidder withdraws its bid during the validity period of the bid.


ii. If a bidder does not accept the relevant clause no 15.0 of Instruction to bidders iii. If the successful bidder fails within the specified period to furnish the requisite

Security Deposit. 7.5 Any bid not in accordance with above clauses will be rejected as non-responsive. 8.0 VALIDITY OF OFFER 8.1 Bid submitted by Bidder shall remain valid for a minimum period of 06 (SIX) MONTHS

from the due date/extended due date for submission of Bids. Bidders shall not be entitled during the said period of six months, without the consent in writing of the Owner, to revoke or cancel their Bid or to vary the Bid given or any term thereof. In case of Bidders revoking or cancelling their Bid or varying any of the terms in regard thereof without the consent of Owner in writing, Owner shall reject such Offers and forfeit Earnest Money paid by them along with their offers.

8.2 Bidders are advised to refrain from contacting by any means HPCL and/or their employees

/ representatives on their own, on matters related to Bids under consideration. HPCL, if necessary, will obtain clarification on the Bid by requesting for such information/clarifications from any or all Bidders, either in writing or through personnel contact. Bidders will not be permitted to change the substance of Bids after opening of Bids.

8.3 Notwithstanding sub-clauses 8.1 and 8.2 above, HPCL may solicit the bidder’s consent to

an extension of the period of validity of offer. The request and the response shall be made in writing. If the bidders agree to the extension request, the validity of Bank Guarantee towards Earnest money shall also be suitably extended. Bidders may refuse the request without forfeiting his EMD. However, bidders agreeing to the request for extension of validity of offer will neither be permitted to revise the price nor to modify the offer.

9.0 BID CLARIFICATIONS/AMENDMENTS BY HPCL 9.1 HPCL may issue clarifications/amendments in the form of addendum/corrigendum during

the bidding period and may also issue amendments subsequent to receiving the bids. For the addendum/corrigendum issued during the bidding period, bidders shall confirm the inclusion of addendum/corrigendum in their bid. Bidder shall follow the instructions issued along with addendum/corrigendum.

9.2 Bidders shall examine the Bidding Document thoroughly and submit to HPCL any apparent

conflict, discrepancy or error. HPCL shall issue appropriate clarifications or amendments, if required. Any failure by Bidder to comply with the aforesaid shall not excuse the Bidder from performing the Services in accordance with the contract if subsequently awarded.

10.0 CONFIDENTIALITY OF DOCUMENTS Bidder shall treat the Bidding Document and contents therein as private and confidential

and shall not use the Bidding Document for any other purposes. 11.0 APPLICABLE LANGUAGE


The bid prepared by the bidder, all correspondences and documents related to this bid shall

be written in English language only. For document submitted in any other language, an English translation shall also be submitted, in which case, for the purpose of interpretation of the bid, the English translation shall govern.

12.0 CAUTION AND DISCLAIMER Transfer of Bid document by the bidder is not permitted.

Bidder shall make his own interpretation of any and all information provided in the Bidding Document. HPCL shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of such information and/or interpretation. Although certain information’s are provided in the Bidding Document, however, bidder shall be responsible for obtaining and verifying all necessary data and information as required by him. HPCL reserves the right to accept or reject any/all tender in whole or in part without assigning any reason whatsoever. HPCL shall not be bound to accept the lowest tender and reserves the right to accept any or more tenders in part. Decision of HPCL in this regard shall be final.

13.0 JOINT VENTURE/CONSORTIUM BIDS

Consortium Bid (s) submitted by the bidder (s) shall not be considered and will be rejected by HPCL. A Joint venture existing as a company can submit the offer provided; they meet the Bid Qualification criteria as indicated in Bid Qualification Criteria of the NIT.

14.0 EVALUATION OF TECHNO COMMERCIAL BIDS Prior to detailed evaluation of bids the owner shall determine whether each bid is (i) Accompanied by EMD as specified in the Notice Inviting Tender

(a)Bids without EMD as specified in the Notice Inviting Tender or with EMD not as per prescribed proforma as per Bidding Document shall be rejected. (b)EMD if placed inside the price bid envelope then the offer will be treated as bid without EMD and will be rejected. However Public Sector Enterprise/Undertaking (Self Declaration required along with Unpriced Bid) and SSIs registered with NSIC (Copy of valid registration Certificate should be submitted along with the Unpriced Bid) are exempted from submitting EMD. (c)Prospective bidders who are SSI registered with NSIC shall provide a declaration in writing along with their unpriced bid whether they have succeeded in securing orders for same items, in competition (i.e. without price preference) with large scale units during the preceding 12 months.

(ii) Totally complying with the requirement of the tender document. (iii) Meeting the Bid Qualification Criteria as stipulated in the Notice Inviting Tender.

14.2 RECEIPT OF BID


Bids received late i.e. after due date and time, due to any reason (s) whatsoever shall be rejected. Late and rejected bid and representative of such bidders shall not be allowed to attend the bid opening. Unopened bids shall be returned to the Bidder.

14.3 DEVIATIONS TO TENDER REQUIREMENTS

14.3.1 The bidders are required to submit offers strictly as per the terms and

conditions/specifications given in the Bidding Document and not to stipulate any deviations. The offer of bidders stipulating deviations to any of the following terms/conditions of the Bidding Document shall not be considered for price bid opening.

i. Security Deposit [Clause No. 4 (b) of GCC]

ii. Defect Liability period (Clause No. 5.n of GCC) iii. Suspension & Termination (Clause No.5e & 12 of GCC) iv. Increase in Time Schedule of Completion v. Liquidated Damages (Clause No. 10 of GCC)

vi. Force Majeure (Clause No. 13 of GCC) vii. Validity of offer

viii. Firm Price (Clause 3.3 & 3.4 of SCC) 14.3.2 In case Bidders wish to stipulate any deviation to Bidding Document requirements

other than those stated above, they shall indicate the same as per the proforma enclosed in the Bidding Document. Bidder shall note that clarification/queries/deviations mentioned elsewhere in the offer shall not be given any cognizance. However HPCL reserves their right to reject bids containing deviations to any of the Bidding Document stipulations.

14.4 UNSOLICITED POST BID MODIFICATION

Bidders are advised to quote strictly as per terms and conditions of the Bidding

Document and after submission of offer not to stipulate any deviation / exceptions. Once, quoted the bidders shall not make any subsequent price changes, whether resulting or arising out of any technical / commercial clarifications sought/allowed on any deviations or exceptions mentioned in the bid unless discussed and agreed by HPCL in writing.

14.5 DETERMINATION OF RESPONSIVENESS

i) Prior to the financial evaluation of bids, the HPCL will determine whether each bid

is substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding Document.

ii) For the purpose of this Clause, a substantially responsive bid is one which conforms to all the terms and conditions and specifications of the Bidding Document including Bid Qualification Criteria (BQC) without material deviation or reservation. A material deviation or reservation is one which affects in any substantial way the scope, quality, or performance of the works or which limits in any substantial way, inconsistent with the Bidding Document, HPCL’s right or Bidder’s obligation under the Contract and retention of which deviation or


reservation would affect unfairly the competitive position of other bidders presenting substantially responsive bids.

iii) If a bid is not substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding Document,

it may be rejected by the HPCL. Such rejection may be intimated to the Bidder.

14.6 COMPLETE SCOPE OF WORK

The complete scope of work has been defined in the bidding document. Only those bidders who take complete responsibility for the complete scope of work as contained in the bidding document shall be considered for qualifying. HPCL reserves the right to take into accounts the concurrent commitments and past performance of Bidders during evaluation of bids.

15.0 EVALUATION OF PRICE BIDS

15.1 The “PRICE BIDS” of only substantially responsive bidders shall be considered for opening.

15.2 Bidders shall quote the prices in Indian Rupees only.

15.3 The quoted prices shall be checked by the bidder to determine the arithmetical

correctness of the same before submitting his price bid.

15.4 HPCL reserves their right to extend price /purchase preference to NSIC/Public Sector Enterprises as admissible under the prevailing policies of Government of India.

15.5 HPCL reserves their right to negotiate the quoted prices with L1 bidder before

award of work.

15.6 HPCL reserves the right to delete any of the items in the Schedule of Quantities (SOQ) at the time of placement of Fax of Intent/Purchase Order. The decision of HPCL shall be final and binding.

15.7 The bidder shall quote for all the items of the Price Bid. In case any bidder fails to

quote for more than 10 items then the bid shall be treated as non responsive and shall be rejected. For bids to be responsive, it may be noted that any item(s) left unquoted, then such offer will be loaded with the highest quoted rate for those item(s) for evaluation purpose. If such bidder happens to be the successful Bidder, price of unquoted items shall be negotiated before award of work.

15.8 In the event of error in quoting the rate in figures and in words for any item(s) then

the lower shall prevail. The bidder shall have to accept the same and shall be binding on the bidder.


15.9 While evaluating item(s) amount, in case of multiplication error by bidder, the following shall prevail:

Lower of following shall prevail and be binding on the bidder. “Amount mentioned against item(s) by bidder” AND “The amount calculated by multiplying the item(s) quantity with the lower of the

rate in figures and in words for that item(s)” 15.10 In case of error in adding up the amount column then the following shall prevail: Lower of following shall prevail and be binding on the bidder Amount written by the bidder as total (Contract Value) AND The total calculated as per 15.8 and 15.9 above. In the event of the bidder’s total being lower than the total arrived at as per 15.8 &

15.9, then the rates quoted by bidder shall be proportionately (equally apportioned to all items) reduced to arrive at total (Contract value). The bidder shall have to accept the same and shall be binding on the bidder.

15.11 For the purpose of evaluation the rates quoted for Comprehensive AMC in the price

bid shall be considered for arriving at the lowest offer. All bidders should ensure that they quote for the same. The rates quoted for Comprehensive AMC shall remain valid up to the completion of the 5 years after DLP.

16.0 REBATE

No suo-moto reduction in prices quoted by bidder shall be permitted after opening of the bid. If any bidder unilaterally reduces the prices quoted by him in his bid after opening of bids, the bid (s) of such bidder(s) will be liable to be rejected. Such reduction shall not be considered for comparison of prices but shall be binding on the bidder in case he happens to be a successful bidder for award of work.

17.0 CONTRACT AGREEMENT

17.1 Purchase Order (PO) shall be prepared after award of works. Successful bidder shall be

intimated regarding award of works through Fax/Letter of Intent. Until the final PO documents are prepared and executed, this Bidding Document together with the annexed documents, modification, deletions agreed upon by the HPCL and Bidder’s acceptance thereof shall constitute a binding contract between the successful bidder and the HPCL based on terms contained in the aforesaid documents and the finally submitted and accepted prices. In case the successful bidder wishes to sign a contract document then he or she may clearly specify in the cover letter of his unpriced bid that he or she intends to enter in to


contract with HPCL. No clause/ terms in contract document shall be in contradiction to PO/tender terms or accepted deviations. Such contract will be executed after issuance of PO and all cost towards execution of the contract shall be to the bidders account. All documents of the PO shall also become a part of the contract and the date of LOI/PO (whichever is earlier) shall be considered as the date of commencement of job. The purchase order up to commissioning of the air conditioning system ie without comprehensive AMC shall be placed on the successful bidder. A separate Purchase Order shall be placed on the same bidder before completion of the Defect Liability Period for the Comprehensive AMC on the basis of the quoted AMC rates in the Price Bid and the bidder shall carry out the job in line with schedule of quantities and relevant technical specifications. This shall be binding on the bidder and his bid shall be treated as non- responsive in case of failure to accept the same.

17.2 The Contract document/PO shall consist of the following: a) Original Bidding Document along with its enclosures issued. b) Addendum/Corrigendum to Bidding Document issued, if any. c) Fax/Letter of Intent.

d) The detailed Letter of Award/Acceptance along with Statement of Agreed Variations (if any) and enclosures attached therewith.

18.0 A firm which is not a PSU or an associate or a joint venture of a PSU, hired to provide

consultancy services for preparation or implementation of project, and any of its affiliates, will be disqualified from subsequently providing goods or works or services related to the initial assignment for the project.

SPECIAL NOTE TO THE BIDDERS:

THE SUCESSFUL BIDDER SHOULD SUBMIT ALL NECESSARY DRAWING, TECHNICAL DETAILS TO MAIN FIRE FIGHTING VENDOR DURING THE INSPECTION BY THE STATUTORY AUTHORITIES.

THE ELECTRICAL VENDOR SHOULD HAVE VALIED AND PROPER LICENCE ISSUED BY ELECTRICAL INSPECTRATE, GOVT OF ANDRA PRADESH/GOVT OF INDIA.


C. DECLARATION


DECLARATION

(to be submitted along with unpriced bid) M/s________________________________________hereby declare/clarify that we have not been banned or delisted by any Government or quasi Government agencies or Public Sector Undertakings.

Stamp & Signature of the Bidder NOTE: If a bidder has been banned by any Government or Quasi Government agencies or PSU’s, this fact must be clearly stated with details. If this declaration is not given along with the unpriced bid, the tender will be rejected as non-responsive.

CONTACT PARTICULARS NAME OF PERSON TEL NO. OFFICE TEL NO. RES. MOBILE NO. E-MAIL ID


D. PREAMBLE TO SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES


PREAMBLE TO SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES

IMPORTANT NOTE: IF ANY DEVIATION IS FOUND WHILE ON EXECUTION BETWEEN THE SPECIFICATION AND THE DRAWINGS IT IS TO BE EXPRESSELY NOTED THAT THE SPECIFICATION WILL HOLD GOOD AND SUPERSEED THE DRAWINGS. THE BIDDER IS REQUIRED TO PERUSE CAREFULLY ALL PARTS OF TENDER DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS AND IF ANY DIFFERENCE / INCONSISTANCY IS NOTICED, HE SHALL BRING IT TO ATTENTION OF HPCL BEFORE SUBMISSION OF TENDER AND SHALL GET THE CLARIFICATION(S) REQUIRED. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL NOT ENTITLE THE SUCCESSFUL BIDDER FOR ANY EXTRA CLAIMS ON ACCOUNT OF SUCH DISCREPENCIES/INCONSISTENCIES. I. GENERAL

This Preamble is to be read in conjunction with the description of various items given in the Schedule of Quantities (SOQ). These items are deemed to be a part of the SOQ and shall be read along with the same. The rates quoted for various items in SOQ are deemed to include the various provisions made herein. Whether specifically mentioned or not in the SOQ, the requirements given below shall be deemed to be included:

1. Abbreviations

M.S. - Mild Steel

Rmt. - Running Meter

Sqm. - Square Meter

Cum. - Cubic Meter

Q.R.O. - Quote Rate only

C / C - Centre to Centre

C.M. - Cement Mortar

M.T. - Metric Ton

C.P. - Chrome Plated

No. - Number/Each

MM - Millimeter


G.I. - Galvanized Iron

C.I. - Cast Iron

All dimensions are in mm unless otherwise stated.

2. The quoted rate shall be all inclusive and cover the cost of material including wastage,

freight, all types of taxes, duties, royalties, erection, construction, testing of materials, samples brought for approval, tools and tackles, plant and equipments, supervision, overheads, profit and any other expenditure incurred for completion of work as per drawings, specifications and to the full satisfaction of HPCL/Consultants.

3. The rates quoted shall be valid for working at all heights, depths and on all floor levels. No extra payment shall be made for scaffolding, staging, ladders, etc., for transportation of men and material at higher or lower levels.

4. The contractor will have to carryout the work in accordance with the drawings, technical specifications and / or other conditions laid down in tender document and to the full satisfaction of HPCL / Consultants.

5. HPCL / Consultants reserve right of operating any item for any work on any floor. 6. Rates of all items shall remain constant irrespective of floor level and no extra shall be paid

for handling and stacking of material, removing debris etc. from the site. 7. Unless otherwise mentioned explicitly in this tender document, the method of measurement

will be as per I.S. 1200

8. Wherever contractor proposed to use "equivalent" makes (i.e. other than specified) he shall obtain corporation's prior approval. Corporation may consult Consultants before giving approval to the same. Any additional cost and time lost due to this will be on Contractor's account and no claims will be entertained.

9. The contractor should take approval for make & manufacturer from the consultants / HPCL before using any material which does not appear in the list of approved manufacturers.

10. Rate for all items include materials, labour, testing of materials at laboratory or site unless

other wise mentioned in specification, tools & tackle, lift & lead charges, transportation charges, loading - unloading charges, insurance cover as per tender, all taxes & duties including works Contract Tax, VAT, service tax etc.

11. All materials which shall be brought on site shall be of approved make & manufacturers failing which payment shall be deducted suitably from every running bills/final bill. Percentage of the same shall be assessed by EIC / Consultants and they at their discretion either to ask contractor to remove / rectify the same or to decide the new proper rate of that particular item.

12. The electrical installation shall be carried out through a Licensed Contractor who possesses

valid Licence to work in Hyderabad issued by the Electrical Licensing Authority.


13. The Bidder is required to inspect the site of the work and ascertain for himself site conditions, facilities available and other aspects before quoting for the work. The bidder is also required, before quoting, to carefully peruse the tender documents, the tender drawings and connected details so as to understand clearly the scope and intent of the tender. Any claims by the successful bidder at a later date on account of his failure to comply with the above instructions will not be entertained.

14. The bidder should note that the IBMS and connected works are to be carried out and installed

in the existing building. The bidder should note that he should execute his part of the work without causing any damage to any component of the building or services. Any damage so caused shall be made good at the cost and risk of the successful bidder. The successful bidder shall protect all other items of work of other agencies, such as interior furniture , electrical fixtures, flooring, piping, electrical wiring, pumps, AC ducting, AHU, Precision ACs etc. from any damage and shall be responsible for final clearing of the floor, walls etc. from their debris and materials before handing over. No extra is payable towards this the successful bidder shall include in their bid the rate all minor civil works such as chasing wall, drilling hooks etc. and making good and no extra is payable towards this. Neat house keeping at all shapes of work is the responsibility of the successful bidder, who shall also ensure that removal of debris, waste materials etc. from the site at his own cost is organised at regular basis. The successful bidder shall also be responsible for safety and security of all his materials and also for ensuring fire prevention steps are taken at all times.

15. The bidder should note that the tender drawings and other documents describing each item

of the schedule are only indicative in nature and cannot be taken as complete in detail. Being tender for IBMS which calls for high end technology finish including use of good quality materials of high standard, it is expected that the bidder should understand the intent of the tender drawings and specifications and provide for materials, workmanship, finishes and accessories appropriately so as to deliver the product of high standards in keeping with the function for which the system is being specified. No claim from the contractor at a later date will be entertained for his failure to understand this condition. The decision of HPCL /Consultants in respect of the quality of materials, type of construction, fabrication / assembling, workmanship, finish, etc., shall be final and binding and the contractor's claim for not providing in his tender for such materials, construction, workmanship and finish cannot be entertained.

16. HPCL /Consultants reserve the right to insist on selection of material, workmanship,

detailing and finishes which they consider are appropriate, and suitable for the intended use. The contractor is not eligible for extra claims on this account.

17. HPCL /Consultant will require the contractor to produce samples of all materials,

accessories/prior to procurement / manufacture if required by client. Failure to comply with these instructions may result in rejection of the work.

18. All the works done under this contract shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from

virtual date of completion of works certified by HPCL/Consultants covering, materials, workmanship and finish. Any defects or design failure or other forms of deterioration shall be made good by the contractor at his own cost within the guarantee period, immediately on being informed of such defects. Failure to comply will entail HPCL to unilaterally decide on getting the repair done through other agency at the cost and risk of the contractor.


19. The contractor should use only the best material. If required by HPCL/Consultant, the contractor will be required to arrange for testing products and produce test certificate from recognised test houses to establish the quality of materials at his own cost. Any defective material not meeting with the standard shall be replaced at the contractor’s own cost.

20. The bidder shall indicate the makes of all the finishing materials with catalogues in his

tender, based on which rates have been quoted. The bidder shall be prepared to produce samples when called for before consideration of the tender further at his own cost and responsibility and without any liability on HPCL.

21. Testing of various materials should be carried out as per the relevant IS standards

mentioned in the technical specifications attached to the tender. The following will have to be compulsorily tested by drawing random samples from materials brought to site by the party.

a. Electrical / Control cables : 1 sample of each size of cable used.

Party should submit manufacturer's certificates for the various materials and the above tests will be carried out in addition to the certificates submitted. Cost of testing should be borne by the party. In case of delay in testing materials, HPCL reserves the right to have the same tested at party's cost.

22. One No. of each item of the Bill of Quantities shall be made first for those items advised by HPCL and got approved before proceeding with the remaining quantum of items and work.

23. The time of completion of the entire work shall be Five months from the date of LOI/PO 24. The normal working hours for carrying out the AC job shall be from 8.00 A.M up to 7.30

PM on working days (from Monday to Friday) and shall be 8.00 AM to 6.30 PM on Saturdays and Sundays and all holidays. However the work can be continued during the night hours subjected to the permission given by the EIC and no complaints received from neighbours and police etc in line with the prevailing statutory regulation in Hyderabad/Hitec City.

II. SPECIFIC CONDITIONS 1. The various works described in the Schedule of Quantities and in the drawings shall be

executed in strict accordance with the specifications and drawings to the entire satisfaction of the Consultants and the HPCL. The quality of materials and workmanship shall be of high quality and shall conform to the relevant I.S. Specifications wherever applicable.

2. The bidders shall ensure that the place of work is kept neat and tidy during the progress of

work and also clean at the end of each day's work. The contractor shall also ensure that the site is cleared of all rubbish, and other unwanted materials and handed over in a neat and satisfactory conditions as may be directed by HPCL /Consultants.

3. The bidders shall take maximum precaution in protecting persons, things and properties belonging to the HPCL, Public and also their own during the progress of work. The bidders will be solely responsible for any damage caused during the progress of work and the


successful bidder shall indemnify the HPCL by suitable guarantee / insurance cover from any claims on any account due to damages caused during their work.

4. The contractor should maintain measurement books in which he should record measurements

of work done from time to time and checked by the EIC/Consultant Site Engineer. There should be no corrections or over writing in the measurements.

5. A register should be maintained at the site which should contain the instructions issued at site

by the Consultants or Employer and the instructions are properly made and recorded. 6. The Contractor on starting the work shall herewith furnish to the Client/Consultants a

programme for carrying out the work stage by stage with in the stipulated time. A graph or chart on individual work shall be maintained showing the progress week by week. The Contractors shall submit to the EIC a weekly progress report stating the number of skilled and unskilled labourers employed on the works, working hours done, place, type and quantity of work done during the period.

The supervision at site shall be carried out by HPCL’s representative as well as the

representative of the Consultants. The work progress to be reviewed in periodic site meetings at site to be decided by the HPCL and the Consultants. The BAR chart and PERT chart shall be prepared by the contractor in consultation with the Consultants and HPCL and approval shall be obtained, for the same. After approval the contractor shall faithfully adhere to the schedule and where deviations take place, the contractor shall take remedial action to compensate for the delays in completion of the project.

7. a) The Contractor shall provide at his own cost for all necessary storage on the site in a

specified area for all materials, which is likely to deteriorate by the action of sun, rain or other causes due to exposure, in such a manner that all such materials, tools, etc., shall be duly protected from damage by weather or any other cause. All such stores shall be cleared away and the ground left in good and proper order on completion of this contract

b) The contractor shall provide at his own cost temporary works as per drawings/specifications approved by the Consultants. The contractors should obtain approval of local authorities. The Contractor shall be responsible for removal and disposal of the temporary works before handing over the completed works to the HPCL.

c) The contractor shall enclose the work place by providing temporary partitions and segregate the HPCL Zone separately such that no hindrance or inconvenience is caused to the Employees / Records. Also, this would enable dust free environment within the premises.

d) All formalities including permission required to be obtained from competent authorities for making the provisions in (a), (b) and (c) above would be done by the contractors at his cost.

e) Contractor should soon after the commencement of work make prototype/Mock-up samples of items as required by the Consultants for the approval. HPCL / Consultants have the liberty to modify the design in such case the contractor should follow the approved samples very strictly as no extension in contract time will be granted by the HPCL / Consultants in respect of the modification of the design.


8. All the toilets in the floor will be kept under lock and key, out of which one toilet shall be

earmarked for use by workers. After completion of work, the toilet will be thoroughly cleaned including replacement of broken fittings etc. by the Contractors and handed over to HPCL. Any cost incurred in such cleaning, modifications etc. will be proportionately recovered from various Contractors engaged in the work.

9. The Contractor shall engage an independent Housekeeping – debris removal agency on a day-to-day basis. Hence Contractor would be responsible for cleaning up the debris and waste materials accrued from his work and dispose the accumulated debris on a daily basis. If the Contractor fails to comply with this requirement, the Employer will be at liberty to direct the cleaning agency to do the regular cleaning responsibility.

10. HPCL/Consultants reserve the right to delete all /any of these associated works from the

scope or include them prior to placement of work order. If awarded, the main agency shall get the associated works carried out only through approved sub-specialist in each trade if specified in the SOQ. Such works shall be done to satisfy standards of HPCL / Consultants and also to meet their requirements and specifications of HPCL. Any suggestions / modifications suggested by HPCL /Consultants for integrating these associated works with the main system of HPCL shall also be got done by the main agency to the satisfaction of HPCL /Consultants. No extra cost is payable on account of executing works through the approved agency for integrating the same with HPCL’s overall scheme or implementing the suggestions given by HPCL/ Consultants. The contractor may note that they have to do day to day coordination with other agencies already mobilised in site for executing other related jobs. The contractor to also note that they will have do the work in full coordination with the interior/ AC/ fire fighting/ electrical works contractors, who are already mobilised in site.


E.UNPRICED BID


UN PRICED BID

INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT JOB AT DRDC, HYDERABAD

S.No. DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY

1 D/S/I/C of PC for IBMS & BAS EACH 2

2 S/I/C of IBMS Software SET 1

3 S/I/C of Interface (I/O - Section I & II) SET 1

4 S/I/T/C of Monitoring Station EACH 4

5 S/I/T/C of 600 DPI Col. Inkjet Printer EACH 1

6 S/I/T/C of 600 A4 Laser Printer EACH 1

7 S/I/T/C of DDC ( I/O - Section II) EACH 1

8 S/I/T/C of DDC ( I/O - Section III) EACH 1

9 S/I/T/C of DDC ( I/O - Section IV) EACH 1

10 S/I/T/C of DDC ( I/O - Section V) EACH 1

11 S/I/T/C of DDC ( I/O - Section VI) EACH 1

12 S/I/T/C of (Chiller) DDC Cntrlr. EACH 1

13 S/I/T/C of (AHU/VFD) DDC EACH 1

14 S/I/T/C of DDC -AHU/CAHU EACH 2

15 S/I/T/C of DDC -CAHU 4Nos EACH 1

16 S/I/T/C of DDC for 22 No PAC EACH 1

17 S/I/T/C of DDC for 7 Nos PAC EACH 1

18 S/I/T/C of Sensors: BAS EACH 1

19 S/I/T/C of Immersion Temp.Sensor EACH 6

20 S/I/T/C of Duct Temp.Sensor EACH 11

21 S/I/T/C of Pr.Switch for Fan EACH 11

22 S/I/T/C of Pr.Switch for Filter EACH 11



23 S/I/T/C of Pr.Switch a/c Pumps EACH 7

24 S/I/T/C of Pr.Sensor EACH 2

25 S/I/T/C of Inline Flow meter EACH 1

26 S/I/T/C of Static Pr.Sensor SET 11

27 S/I/T/C of Air Damper Actuator EACH 10

28 S/I/T/C of Fire Damper Actuator EACH 4

29 S/I/T/C of Duct Smoke Detector EACH 14

30 S/I/T/C of Fire Alarm Control Panel EACH 1

31 S/I/T/C of Fire Alarm Repeater Panel EACH 1

32 S/I/T/C of Rate of Rise Heat Detector EACH 7

33 S/I/T/C of Photoelec. Smoke Detector EACH 270

34 S/I/T/C of Elec. Hooter: Fire Alarm Sys EACH 32

35 S/I/T/C of Manual Call Pt: Fire Alarm Sys EACH 21

36 S/I/T/C of Fault Isolation Module EACH 15

37 S/I/T/C of Control Module EACH 43

38 S/I/T/C of Monitor Module EACH 12

39 S/I/T/C of Response Indicator EACH 141

40 S/I/T/C of Gas Detection Detectors EACH 1

41 S/I/T/C Mimic Panel EACH 3

42 S/I/T/C of Displacement Lvl Trans. (UG) EACH 2

43 S/I/T/C of Displacement Lvl Trans. (OH) EACH 2

44 S/I/T/C of Central Ancmt. Consl. SET 1

45 S/I/T/C of Prog. Mixer Amplifier SET 1

46 S/I/T/C OF Equipment Rack SET 1

47 S/I/T/C of Ceiling Rung Spkr EACH 146

48 S/I/T/C of Wall Mounted Spkr EACH 35

49 S/I/T/C of Volume Control Units EACH 12



50 S/I/T/C of EVC Instrument EACH 12

51 S/I/T/C EVC Central Console System SET 1

52 S/I/T/C of Music System SET 1

53 S/I/T/C of World Space Receiver EACH 1

54 S/I/T/C Indoor Camera 1/3" Smoked EACH 60

55 S/I/T/C of IndoorCamera 1/4"Colour EACH 1

56 S/I/T/C of Outdoor Camera 1/4" Colour EACH 8

57 S/I/T/C of Power Supply Unit EACH 66

58 S/I/T/C of Digital Video Record. EACH 5

59 S/I/T/C of Software: CCTV: Win. Based Lot 1

60 S/I/T/C of Keyboard with joystick EACH 1

61 S/I/T/C of 42" Plasma screen EACH 5

62 S/I/T/C of 21" LCD Monitor(colour) EACH 5

63 S/I/T/C of Outdoor Enclosure EACH 8

64 S/I/T/C of GI Post EACH 8

65 S/I/T/C of Access Contrlr.: 2 Card Rdr EACH 9



68 S/I/T/C of Proximity Card Reader EACH 97

69 S/I/T/C of Biometric finger Reader EACH 13

70 S/I/T/C of Pin Pads EACH 7

71 S/I/T/C of Electromagnetic Lock EACH 54

72 S/I/T/C of Magnetic Contacts EACH 54

73 S/I/T/C of Emergency release switch EACH 54

74 S/I/T/C of Door Contacts EACH 9

75 S/I/T/C of Access Control: PC station EACH 1

76 S/I/T/C of Prox.Cd/ Cd holder/ Lanyard EACH 300



77 Printing on Lable EACH 300

78 S/I of Adhesive Lables EACH 300

79 S/I/T/C of VESDA Laser Compact EACH 4

79.1 S/I/T/C of VESDA Laser plus EACH 2

80 S/I/T/C of Power supply for VESDA EACH 6

81 S/I/T/C of Aspiration Tubes METERS 600

82 S/I/T/C of Capillary Tubes EACH 45

83 S/I/T/C of Air Termination Nozzles EACH 45

84 S/I/T/C of Configurator Software EACH 1

85 S/I/T/C of High Level Interface EACH 1

86 S/I/T/C of Elec.Hooter: VESDA EACH 6

87 S/I/T/C of Panel Water Leak Detectn. SET 1

88 S/I/T/C of Module Water Leak Detectn. EACH 10

89 S/I/T/C of cable. Sensor Water Leak Detectn. EACH 15

90 S/I/T/C of Water Leak Elec.Hooter EACH 1

91 S/I/T/C of Glassbreak Dtctr.Water Lk EACH 15

92 S/I/T/C of 80 Litres Cylinders EACH 36

93 S/I/T/C of FM200 Gas KILOGRAM 2163

94 S/I/T/C of Primy. Completr Kit EACH 20

95 S/I/T/C of Slave Completer Kit EACH 27

96 S/I/T/C of FM200 Check Valve EACH 30

97 S/I/T/Cof FM200 Nozzles EACH 33

98 S/I/T/C of FM200 Manifold EACH 5

99 S/I/T/C of FM200 Rk-Wl.Mnt.Kit EACH 59

100 S/I/T/C of FM200 MS Smls Pipe LOT 1

101 S/I/T/C of two zone Gas Rls.Panel EACH 5

102 S/I/T/C of Smoke Dtctr: FM 200 EACH 84



103 S/I/T/C of Resp.Indctr: FM 200 EACH 56

104 S/I/T/C of Man.Rel.Switch: FM 200 EACH 10

105 S/I/T/C of Abort Switch: FM 200 EACH 5

106 S/I/T/C of Elec.Hooter: FM 200 EACH 5

107 S/I/T/C of 80 Litres Cylinders (Spare) EACH 11

108 S/I/T/C of VHFO Controller EACH 15

109 S/I/T/C of Satellites for Pest Rplr. EACH 145

110 S/I/T/C of of 2C 1 SQMM Us Cable(BAS) METERS 5000

111 S/I/T/C of 2C 1 SQMM Sc Cable(BAS) METERS 1800

112 S/I/T/C of 4C 1 .5 SQMM Sc Cable(BAS) METERS 550

113 S/I/T/C of 4C 1.5 SQMM Us Cable(BAS) METERS 500

114 S/I/T/C of 2C 1.5 twisted FRLS Cable(BAS) METERS 1000

115 S/I/T/C of 12C 1.5 Us FRLS Cable(BAS) METERS 475

116 S/I/T/C of 16C 1.5 Us FRLS Cable(BAS) METERS 2500

117 S/I/T/C of 2C 1.5 SQMM FRLS(FAS) METERS 1500

118 S/I/T/C of 2C 48/0.2 ATC PVC Cb METERS 4750

119 S/I/T/C of 4C 1.5 PVC Cb(PA Sys) METERS 1000

120 S/I/T/C of Cu Power cable(EVC) METERS 750

121 S/I/T/C of Cu comm cable(EVC) METERS 750

122 S/I/T/C of 2C 1 Multistand (ACS) METERS 350

123 S/I/T/C of 12C Shielded Cu Cable METERS 2000

124 S/I/T/C of Data/ Network Cable (2Cx1.5) METERS 2500

125 S/I/T/C of RG 59 Cable METERS 2500

126 S/I/T/C of 4C x 1.5 twistedpair shielded cb METERS 2000

127 S/I/T/C of 2C x 1.5 Asp Smoke det sys METERS 300

128 S/I/T/C of 2C 1.5SQMM Cb: FM 200 METERS 1000

129 S/I/T/C of 12C shielded copper (12Cx1) METERS 1500



130 S/I/T/C of 2C 1.0SQMM Cb (Water det sys) METERS 400

131 S/I/T/C of 6C 1.0SQMM Cb (Water det sys) METERS 400

132 S/I/T/C of Cb. for Pest Repeller METERS 1000

133 S/I/T/C of 2C 1.5 SQMM U/s Cable METERS 400

134 S/I/T/C of 3C 1 SQMM Sc Cable METERS 300

135 S/I/T/C of 2C 1 SQMM U/s Cable METERS 3500

136 S/I/T/C of 2x2C 1.5 SQMM Tw Sc METERS 2500



139 Excavation METERS 175

140 Providing Inspection Chamber EACH 15

141 S/P of 150mm GI ladder tray METERS 250

142 S/P of 300mm GI ladder tray METERS 300

143 S/I/T/C of 6KG PVC Pipe METERS 200

144 S/I/T/C of 25mm MS conduit METERS 5000

145 S/I/T/C of wiring to IBMS Equipment METERS 2000

146 S/I/T/C of 2Nos 5A 3 Pin Socket SET 50

147 Providing AMC for Year 1 Monthly 12




150.1 Providing AMC for Year 5 Monthly 12

151 Providing Site Acceptance Test (SAT) SET 1

S/I/T/C- supply, installation, commissioning & testing


F. TIME SCHEDULE


TIME SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION OF WORK: INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM WORKS AT DISASTER RECOVERY DATA CENTRE, HYDERABAD LOCATION COMPLETION PERIOD FROM DATE OF ISSUE OF FOI/LOI/PO DRDC, HITEC CITY-PHASE 2,HYDERABAD 5 (FIVE) MONTHS (Excluding stabilization period) NOTE:

1) Time for completion shall be reckoned from the date of issue of Fax/ Letter of Intent/Purchase Order by HPCL which ever is earlier.

2) Time for completion shall include the time required for mobilization,

demobilization, carrying out the works as per requirements of Contract Document and instructions of HPCL Engineer-in-Charge.


G. SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF

CONTRACT (SCC)


1.0 GENERAL 1.1a Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) shall be read in conjunction with the

General Conditions of Contract (GCC) also referred to as General Terms & Conditions of Works Contract, Schedule of Quantities, specifications of work, drawings and any other document forming part of this Contract wherever the context so requires.

1.1b Notwithstanding the sub-division of the document into these separate sections

and volumes, every part of each shall be deemed to be supplementary of every other part and shall be read with and into the Contract so far as it may be practicable to do so.

1.1c Where any portion of the GCC is repugnant to or at variance with any

provisions of the Special Conditions of Contract, then unless a different intention appears, the provision(s) of the Special Conditions of Contract shall be deemed to override the provision(s) of GCC only to the extent that such repugnancy or variations in the Special Conditions of Contract are not possible of being reconciled with the provisions of GCC.

1.1d Wherever it is stated in this Bidding Document that such and such a supply

is to be affected or such and such a work is to be carried out, it shall be understood that the same shall be affected and /or carried out by the Contractor at his own cost, unless a different intention is specifically and expressly stated herein or otherwise explicit from the context. Contract Price shall be deemed to have included such cost.

1.1e The materials, design & workmanship shall satisfy the applicable relevant

Indian Standards, the job specifications contained herein & codes referred to. Where the job specifications stipulate requirements in addition to those contained in the standard codes and specifications, these additional requirements shall also be satisfied. In the absence of any Standard / Specifications / Codes of practice for detailed specifications covering any part of the work covered in this bidding document, the instructions / directions of Engineer-in-Charge will be binding upon the Contractor.

1.1f In case of contradiction between relevant Indian Standards (IS Codes), GCC,

Special Conditions of Contract, Specifications, Drawings and Schedule of Rates, the following shall prevail in order of precedence.

i) Detailed Purchase Order along with Statement of Agreed Variations, if any,

and its enclosures . ii) Fax of Intent (FOI)/Letter of Intent(LOI) iii) Schedule of Quantities iv) Preamble to the Schedule of Quantities v) Special Conditions of Contract vi) Instructions to Bidders vii) General Conditions of Contract viii) Technical Specifications ix) Relevant Indian Standards & Specifications.


x) Drawings/ Data Sheets

1.7 SAFETY, FIRE FIGHTING AND SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF HPCL 1.7.1 Contractor shall provide adequate number of standard lengths of IS Stamped Fire

hoses, IS Stamped DCP Fire extinguishers, fire buckets with sand and nozzles. These items can be taken back by the Contractor after completion of work. Sand shall also be maintained dry by the Contractor with fresh supply, whenever required.

1.7.2 Safety Helmets shall be provided to all the employees of Contractor including that

of his labour contractors. 1.7.3 Safety Belts and Harnesses shall be provided by the Contractor in adequate number

for the workers working at heights. 1.7.4 All Diesel driven equipment shall be provided with proper Flame Arrestors,

Mufflers, etc as applicable. 1.7.5 Proper earthing shall be provided for all equipments and generators. 2.0 THE WORK 2.1 Scope of Work & Scope of Supply

2.1.1 The scope of work and Scope of Supply covered in this Contract

will be as described in Scope of work provided in the Instructions to bidders, Preamble to the Schedule of Quantities, Schedule of Quantities, Technical Specifications, Drawings, etc.

2.2 Time Schedule The Completion period for this job shall be 5 (FIVE) Months. 2.2.1 Time is the essence of this Contract. The period of completion given includes

the time required for mobilization as well as testing, rectifications, if any, retesting, demobilization and completion in all respects to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.2.2 A joint programme of execution of work will be prepared by the Engineer-

in-Charge and Contractor. This programme will take into account the time of completion period of the Contract.

2.2.3 Monthly execution programme will be drawn up by the Engineer-in-Charge

jointly with the Contractor based on availability of materials, work fronts and the joint programme of execution as referred to above. The Contractor shall scrupulously adhere to the Targets / Programme by deploying adequate personnel, Construction Equipment, Tools and Tackles and also by Timely Supply of required materials coming within his scope of supply as per Contract. In all matters concerning the extent of target set out in the monthly


programme and the degree of achievement, the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge will be final and binding upon the Contractor.

2.2.4 Contractor shall give every day category-wise labour and equipment

deployment report along with the progress of work done on previous day in the proforma prescribed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.3 Measurement of Works 2.3.1 Mode of measurement will be as specified in Specifications or SOR. 2.4 Payment Terms 2.4.1 Payment will be released within 15 days of submission of duly certified Running

Account Bills at Disbursement section at Mumbai after deduction of WCST(Works Contract Sales Tax) or VAT whichever is applicable, IT(Income Tax) and any other statutory deduction as applicable from time to time, Any MRR(Materials Received Report- An internal document forwarded by HPCL Site –in-Charge/ Engineer to Disbursement Section along with Contractor’s Bill and duly certified measurement sheets for release of payment) Deductions, LD, etc. In case of Final Bill, Payment will be released within 45 days of submission of duly certified Final Bill along with all requisite documents, drawings, etc. Payment break up for various items covered in SOR/PRICED BID is as indicated as Appendix 1 to SCC. No further alteration is permitted in approved payment break up.

2.5 Temporary Works 2.5.1 All temporary works, enabling works, including dewatering of surface and

subsoil water, preparation and maintenance of temporary drains at the work site, preparation and maintenance of approaches to working areas, adequate lighting, wherever required, for execution of the work, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and all costs towards the same shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted prices.

2.6 Quality Assurance 2.6.1 Detailed quality assurance programme to be followed for the execution of

Contract under various divisions of works will be mutually discussed and agreed to.

2.6.2 The Contractor shall establish, document and maintain an effective quality

assurance system as outlined in the specifications and various codes and standards.

2.6.3 Quality Assurance System plans / procedures of the Contractor shall be

furnished in the form of a QA manual. This document should cover details of the personnel responsible for the quality assurance, plans or procedures to be followed for quality.


2.6.4 The Owner/Consultant or their representative shall reserve the right to inspect/witness, review any or all stages of work at shop/site as deemed necessary for quality assurance and / or timely completion of the work.

2.6.5 The Contractor has to ensure the deployment of quality Assurance and

Quality Control Engineer(s) depending upon the quantum of work and as per Minimum guaranteed deployment indicated in Form No. PF-3A of ‘Proposal Forms’ Section of this Tender document. This QA / QC group shall be fully responsible to carryout the work as per standards and all codes requirements. In case Engineer-in-Charge feels that Contractor’s QA/QC Engineer(s) are incompetent or insufficient, Contractor has to deploy other experienced Engineer(s) as per site requirement and to the full satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.

2.6.6 In case Contractor fails to follow the instructions of Engineer-in-Charge with

respect to above clauses, next payment due to him shall not be released unless and until he complies with the instructions to the full satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.

2.6.7 The contractor shall adhere to quality assurance system enclosed as Appendix II to

SCC. 2.7 Leads 2.7.1 For the various works, in case of contradiction, leads mentioned in the

Schedule of Quantities shall prevail over those indicated in the Technical specifications.

3.0 ROYALTY, INCOME TAX, SERVICE TAX AND PRICES 3.1 Royalty 3.1.1 Deleted 3.1.2 Contractor’s quoted rates should include the royalty on different applicable

items as per the prevailing State Government rates. In case, Owner is able to obtain the exemption of royalty from the State Government the Contractor shall pass on the same to Owner for all the items involving royalty. Any increase in prevailing rate of royalty shall be borne by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner.

3.2 Income Tax 3.2.1 Income Tax at the prevailing rate as applicable from time to time shall be deducted

from Contractor’s Bills as per Income Tax Act and quoted rates shall be inclusive of this. Owner will issue the TDS (Tax Deduction at Source) Certificate.


3.3 Firm Prices 3.3.1 The contract price shall remain firm and fixed till the completion of work in

all respects and no escalation in prices on any account shall be admissible to the Contractor.However variation in service tax rates for comprehensive annual maintananace contarct rates for 5 years after DLP will be allowed on submission of documentary evidence.

3.4 Taxes, Duties, Octroi, Levies etc.

3.4.1 The quoted prices shall be deemed to be inclusive of all taxes including Works Contract Sales Tax or VAT, Sales Tax, Service Tax, duties, Octroi, levies, etc. and Contractor shall not be eligible for any compensation on these accounts till the completion of contract except for AMC. Any statutory variation / liability on account of taxes, duties, Octroi etc. shall also be to Contractor’s account.

4 PROVIDENT FUND,LABOUR, LABOUR LAWS AND SITE

REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Provident Fund 4.1.1 The Contractor shall strictly comply with the provisions of Employees

Provident Fund Act and register himself with Regional Provident Fund Commissioner (RPFC) before commencing work. The Contractor shall deposit Employees and Employers contributions to the RPFC every month. The Contractor shall furnish along with each Running bill, the challan / receipt for the payment made to the RPFC for the preceding month. The Contractor shall furnish the code number allotted by the RPFC Authority to the Engineer-in-Charge before commencing the work.

4.1.2 In case the RPFC challan / receipt, as above, is not furnished, Owner shall

deduct 16% (sixteen percent) of the payable amount from Contractor’s running bill and retain the same as a deposit. Such retained amounts shall be refunded to Contractor on production of RPFC Challan / receipt for the period covered by the related running bill.

4.2 Labour License 4.2.1 Before starting of work, Contractor shall obtain a license from concerned

authorities under the Contract Labour (Abolition and Regulation) Act 1970, and furnish copy of the same to Owner.

4.3 Labour Relations 4.3.1 In case of labour unrest/labour dispute arising out of non-implementation of

any law, the responsibility shall solely lie with the Contractor and they shall remove/resolve the same satisfactorily at his cost and risk.


4.3.2 The Contractor shall at all times take all reasonable precautions to prevent any unlawful, riotous or disorderly conduct by or amongst his staff and labour and to preserve peace and protection of persons and property in the neighbourhoods of the Works against such conduct.

4.4 Employment of Local Labour 4.4.1 The Contractor shall ensure that local labour skilled and / or unskilled, to the

extent available shall be employed in this work. In case of non – availability of suitable labour in any category out of the above persons, labour from outside may be employed.

4.4.2 The Contractor shall not recruit personnel of any category from among those

who are already employed by other agencies working at site but shall make maximum use of local labour available.

4.5 Site Cleaning 4.5.1 The Contractor shall clean and keep clean the work site from time to time to

the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge for easy access to work site and to ensure safe passage, movement and working.

4.5.2 The Contractor shall dispose off the unserviceable materials, debris etc., to

the earmarked area within the premises or any other location outside the premises as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge. No extra payment shall be paid on this account.

4.5.3 Review/Approval of Drawings, Design and other documents submitted by

Contractor 4.5.3.1 HPCL/consultant will normally require and utilize a maximum time frame of seven

(07) working days from the date of Receipt for Review/Approval of Drawings, Design and other documents submitted by Contractor. Upon Review of the submitted documents, HPCL may give their comments and ask for redesign/ resubmission after necessary rectifications/ modifications and the time frame of 7 working days will be applicable for same.

4.6 Protection of Existing Facilities 4.6.1 Contractor shall obtain all clearance (work permit) from the Owner, as may be

required from time to time, prior to start of work. Work without permit shall not be carried out within the existing premises.

4.6.2 Contractor shall obtain plans and full details of all existing and planned

facilities/services/utilities from the Owner and shall follow these plans closely at all times during the performance of work. Contractor shall be responsible for location and protection of all facilities/utilities and structures at his own cost.


4.6.3 Despite all precautions, should any damage to any structure / utility etc. occur, the Contractor shall contact the Owner / authority concerned and Contractor shall forthwith carry out repair at his expenses under the direction and to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge and the Owner/concerned authority.

4.6.3 Contractor shall take all precautions to ensure that no damage is caused to

the existing facilities etc., during construction. Existing structures/facilities/utilities damaged / disturbed during construction shall be repaired and restored to their original condition by Contractor after completion of construction to the complete satisfaction of Owner.

4.7 Work Front 4.7.1 The work involved under this Contract may include such works as have to

be taken up and completed after other agencies have completed their jobs. The Contractor will be required and bound to take up as and when the fronts are available for the same and no claim of any sort whatsoever shall be admissible to the Contractor on this account. Only extension of time limit shall be admissible, if the availabilities of work fronts to the Contractor are delayed due to any reason not attributable to the Contractor and the same is clearly recorded.

4.8 Site Facilities 4.8.1 The Contractor shall arrange for the following facilities at site, for workmen

deployed/engaged by him / his sub-contractor, at his own cost:

i) Arrangement for First Aid. ii) Arrangement for clean & potable drinking water. iii) A crèche where 10 or more women workers are having children below the

age of 6 years. iv) Any other facility/utility as may be required under the Contract as per the

existing legislation/regulations. 4.9 Contractor’s Site Office and Stores 4.9.1 Owner shall provide land only for contractor’s site office and stores and

fabrication yard, if any at site. However, same shall be dismantled prior to submission of Final Bill.

4.9.2 The Contractor shall remove all temporary buildings / facilities etc., before

leaving the site after completion of works in all respect. 4.10 Construction Power and Water 4.10.1 Owner shall not provide power and the Contractor shall be exclusively

responsible to make his own arrangements for supply of power, without any extra cost to the Owner.


4.10.2 Water required for the works shall be arranged by the Contractor. The contractor has to make all necessary arrangement for drawing water including making temporary storage, pumping etc.

4.10.3 Cement & Steel

Cement and steel required for executing the work as per tender document shall be supplied by the contractor and rates quoted shall be inclusive of the same. Cement shall be OPC Grade 43/53 conforming to relevant IS standards of reputed manufacturer and shall be got approved by EIC before procurement. All Running Account Bills and final bill shall be accompanied by Cement Consumption Statement giving the detailed working of cement used vis a vis theoretical consumption. Permissible wastage shall be 3% of theoretical consumption. However this wastage shall be considered in excess of the theoretical quantity required for the various items of work. No extra payment will be made towards this wastage and the same will be on contractors account. The contractor shall be penalised for any under consumption of cement @ Rs 7000/- per MT.

4.11 Construction 4.11.1 Rules and Regulations 4.11.2 Contractor shall observe in addition to Codes specified in respective

specification, all national and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations and requirements pertaining to the work and shall be responsible for extra costs arising from violations of the same.

5.0 Procedures 5.1 Various procedures and method statements to be adopted by Contractor during

the construction as required as per the respective specifications shall be submitted to Engineer-in-Charge in due time for approval.

5.2 Security 5.2.1 As the premises at Hyderabad is a protected area, entry into the area shall be

restricted and may be governed by issue of photo gate passes. The Contractor shall arrange to obtain through the Engineer-in-Charge, well in advance, all necessary entry permits/gate passes for his staffs and labourers and entry and exit of his men and materials shall be subject to vigorous checking by the security staff. The Contractor shall not be eligible for any claim or extension of time whatsoever on this account.

5.2.2 It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to safeguard all his materials/owned

from theft, damage etc. For this purpose the contractor shall be allowed to keep his own security inside HPCL premises

5.3 Drawings and Documents


5.3.1 Drawings accompanying the Bidding Document are indicative of scope of work

and issued for bidding purpose only. Purpose of these drawings is to enable the bidder to make an offer in line with the requirements of the owner.

5.3.2 The contractor as per ‘scope of work’ shall carry out preparation of detailed

and working drawings. Detailed construction layout drawings as needed shall be prepared by contractor and got reviewed/approved by Engineer-in-Charge/Consultant before taking up the work.

5.4 Rounding off 5.4.1 All payments to and recoveries from the Contractor shall be rounded off to

the nearest rupee. Wherever the amount to be paid / recovered consists of a fraction of a rupee (paise), the amount shall be rounded off to the next higher rupee if the fraction consists of 50 (fifty) paise or more and if the faction of a rupee is less than 50 (fifty) paise, the same shall be ignored.

5.5 Contractor’s Billing System 5.5.1 HPCL will provide an approved format for Measurement sheets, Bill Summary and

Bill Abstract. Contractor has to ensure that these data are updated for each subsequent RA and Final Bill.

5.5.1 HPCL will utilize these data for processing and verification of the

Contractor’s bill. 5.6 Site Organization 5.6.1 The Contractor shall without prejudice to his overall responsibility to execute

and complete the works as per specifications and time schedule progressively deploy adequate qualified and experienced personnel together with skilled / unskilled manpower and augment the same as decided by Engineer-in-Charge depending on the exigencies of work to suit the construction schedule without any additional cost to Owner.

5.6.2 The Contractor shall provide all necessary superintendence during the

execution of the Works and as long thereafter as the Engineer-in-Charge may consider necessary for the proper fulfilling of the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Such superintendence shall be given by sufficient persons having adequate knowledge of the operations to be carried out (including the methods and techniques required, the hazards likely to be encountered and methods of preventing accidents) for the satisfactory and safe execution of the Work. The workmen deployed by the Contractor should also possess the necessary license etc., if required under the existing laws, rules and regulations.

5.7 Additional / Extra Works


Owner reserves the right to execute any additional works / extra works, during the execution of work, either by themselves or by appointing any other agency, even though such works are incidental to and necessary for the completion of works awarded to the Contractor.

5.8 Responsibility of Contractor 5.8.1 It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to obtain the approval for any

revision and/or modifications decided by the contractor from the Owner / Engineer-in-Charge before implementation. Also such revisions and / or modifications if accepted / approved by the Owner / Engineer-in-Charge shall be carried out at no extra cost to the owner. Any change required during functional requirements or for efficient running of system, keeping the basic parameters unchanged and which has not been indicated by the contractor in the data / drawings furnished along with the offer shall be carried out by the contractor at no extra cost to the owner.

5.8.2 All expenses towards mobilization at site and demobilization including

bringing in equipment, work force, materials, dismantling the equipment, clearing the site etc. shall be deemed to be included in the prices quoted and no separate payments on account of such expenses shall be entertained.

5.8.3 It shall be entirely the contractor’s responsibility to provide, operate and

maintain all necessary construction equipment, steel scaffoldings and safety gadgets, cranes and other lifting tackles, tools and appliances to perform the work in a workman like and efficient manner and complete all the jobs as per time schedule.

5.8.4 Preparing approaches and working area for the movement of his men and machinery. 5.8.5 The procurement and supply in sequences and at the appropriate time of all

materials, and consumables shall be entirely the contractor’s responsibility and his rates for execution of work will be inclusive of supply of all these items.

5.9 Coordination with other agencies 5.9.1 Contractor shall be responsible for proper coordination with other agencies

operating at the site of work so that work may be carried out concurrently, without any hindrance to others. The Engineer – in – Charge shall resolve disputes, if any, in this regard, and his decision shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

5.10 Underground and overhead structures 5.10.1 The Contractor will familiarize himself with and obtain information and

details from the Owner in respect of all existing structures, and utilities


existing at the job site before commencing work. The Contractor shall execute the work in such a manner that the said structures, utilities, etc. are not disturbed or damaged, and shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Owner from and against any destruction thereof or damages thereto.

5.11 Documents required with final bill 5.11.1 Statement of final bills – issue of No Claim/ No Due Certificate 5.11.2 The Contractor shall furnish a No-Claim/No-Due declaration indicating that there

are no balance dues to his sub-vendor/sub-contractors/labour contractors along with the Final Bill.

5.12 Working hours 5.12.1 Depending upon the requirement, time schedule / drawing/ programme and

the target set to complete the job in time, the works may also have to continue beyond normal working hours/night hours / holidays or during such periods with out causing any inconvenience to the neighbours/others with due permission from EIC, for which no extra claim shall be entertained. However for all such working contractor’s responsible representative shall be available at site to receive the work permit to be issued by HPCL. With out responsible representative of the contractor, no work shall be allowed inside the premises.

6.0 TESTS, INSPECTION AND COMPLETION 6.1 Tests and Inspection 6.1.1 The Contractor shall carry out the various tests as enumerated in the

technical specifications of this Bidding Document and technical documents that will be furnished to him during the performance of the work at no extra cost to the Owner.

6.1.2 All the tests either on the field or at outside laboratories concerning the

execution of the work and supply of materials by the Contractor shall be carried out by Contractor at his cost.

6.1.3 The work is subject to inspection at all times by the Engineer-in-Charge.

The Contractor shall carry out all instructions given during inspection and shall ensure that the work is being carried out according to the technical specifications of this bidding document, the technical documents that will be furnished to him during performance of work and the relevant codes of practice.

6.1.4 Compressed air for carrying out works ,if required shall be arranged by the

Contractor at his own cost. 6.1.5 For material supplied by Owner, Contractor shall carry out the tests, if

required by the Engineer-in-Charge, and the cost of such tests shall be


reimbursed by the Owner at actual to the Contractor on production of documentary evidence.

6.1.6 All results of inspection and tests will be recorded in the inspection reports,

proforma of which will be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. These reports shall form part of the completion documents. Any work not conforming to execution drawings, specifications or codes shall be rejected and the Contractor shall carry out the rectifications at his own cost.

6.2 Final Inspection

After completion of all tests as per specification the whole work will be subject to a final inspection to ensure that job has been completed as per requirement. If any defect is noticed, the Contractor will be notified by the Engineer-in-Charge and he shall make good the defects with utmost speed. If however, the Contractor fails to attend to these defects within a reasonable time (time period shall be fixed by the Engineer-in-Charge) then Engineer-in-Charge may have defects rectified at Contractor’s cost.

6.3 Inspection of Supply Items 6.3.1 All inspection and tests on bought out items shall be made as required by

specifications forming part of this contract. Various stages of inspection and testing shall be identified after receipt of Quality Assurance Programme from the contractor / manufacturer.

6.3.2 Inspection calls shall be given for association of Owner , as per mutually

agreed programme in prescribed proforma , giving details of equipment and attaching relevant test certificates and internal inspection report of the contractor. All drawings, general arrangement and other contract drawings, specifications, catalogues etc. pertaining to equipment offered for inspection shall be got approved by Owner and copies shall be made available to Owner before hand for undertaking inspection.

6.3.3 The contractor shall ensure full and free access to the inspection engineer of

Owner at the contractor’s or their sub-contractor’s premises at any time during contract period to facilitate him to carry out inspection and testing assignments.

6.3.4 The contractor / sub – contractor shall provide all instruments, tools, necessary

testing and other inspection facilities to inspection engineer of Owner free of cost for carrying out inspection.

6.3.5 Where facilities for testing do not exist in the contractor’s / sub-contractor’s

laboratories, samples and test pieces shall be drawn by the contractor / sub-contractor in presence of Inspection Engineer of Owner and duly sealed by the later and sent for tests in Government approved test house or any other testing laboratories approved by the Inspection Engineer at the contractor’s cost.


6.3.6 The contractor shall comply with the instructions of the Inspection Engineer fully and with promptitude.

6.3.7 The contractor shall ensure that the equipment / assemblies / component of the

plant and equipment required to be inspected are not assembled or dispatched before inspection.

6.3.8 The contractor shall not offer equipment for inspection in painted conditions

unless otherwise agreed in writing with the Owner . 6.3.9 The contractor shall ensure that the parts once rejected by the inspection

engineer are not used in the manufacture of the plant and equipment. Where parts rejected by the inspection engineer have been rectified or altered, such parts shall be segregated for separate inspection and approval, before being used in the work.

6.3.10 On satisfactory completion of final inspection and testing, all accepted part of

the work and equipment shall be stamped suitably and inspection certificate shall be stamped suitably and inspection certificate shall be issued in requisite copies for all accepted items. For stage inspection and for rejected items, only inspection memo shall be issued indicating therein the details of observations and remarks.

6.3.11 All inspections and tests shall be made as required by the specifications

forming part of this contract. Contractor shall advise HPCL in writing at least fifteen days in advance of the date of final inspection / tests. Manufacturers inspection or testing certificate for equipment and materials supplied may be considered for acceptance, at the discretion of Engineer-in-Charge. All costs towards testing etc. shall be borne by the contractor within their quoted rates.

6.4 Documentation 6.4.1 Completion Documents

The following documents shall also be submitted by the Contractor in triplicate as part of completion documents :

a) Test certificate for materials supplied by the Contractor. b) Certified records of field tests on materials / equipment, as applicable. c) Material appropriation statement as required. d) Six sets of drawings showing therein the as built conditions of the

work duly approved by the Engineer-in-Charge along with one set of reproducible on polyester film (drawings prepared by Contractor) along with soft form of the same.

e) Other documents as mentioned in Technical Specification.

6.4.2 “AS BUILT” Drawings


Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall complete all drawings to “As built” status (including all vendor / Sub – vendor’s drawings for bought out items) and provide the Owner, the following :

a. One complete set of all original tracings / reproducible along with the soft form of the same in a CD.

b. Six complete sets of prints. 7.0 OTHERS 7.1 Dispute Settlement between Govt. Dept. / PSU & PSE 7.1.1 In the event of any disputes or differences between the Contractor and the

Owner, if the Contractor is a Government department, a Government company or an undertaking in the public sector, then such disputes or differences shall be resolved amicably by mutual consultation or through the good offices or empowered agencies of the Government. If such resolution is not possible, then the unresolved disputes or differences shall be referred to arbitration of an arbitrator to be nominated by the Secretary. Department of legal affairs (Law Secretary) in terms of the Office Memorandum No. 55 / 1 / 75 – CF dated 19th December 1975 issued by the Cabinet Secretariat (Dept. of Cabinet Affairs) as modified from time to time. The Arbitration Conciliation Act 1996 shall not be applicable to the arbitrator under this clause. The award of the arbitrator shall be binding upon parties to the dispute, provided, however any party aggrieved by such award may make a further reference for setting aside or revision of the award to Law Secretary whose decision shall bind the parties finally and conclusively.

7.2 Project Scheduling and Monitoring 7.2.1 The following schedules / documents / reports shall be prepared and submitted

by the CONTRACTOR for review / approval at various stages of the contract. 7.2.2 Along With Bid

The Bidder is required to submit as Project Time Schedule in Bar Chart Form, along with the Bid. The Schedule shall cover all activities including mobilization etc. as per the completion time stipulated in the Bidding Document.

7.2.3 After placement of Purchase Order

Upon placement of Purchase Order, Contractor has to furnish a detailed bar chart within 15 days of issue of FOI/LOI.

7.2.4 Project Review Meetings 7.2.4.1 The CONTRACTOR shall present the programme and status at various

review meetings as required.


Monthly Review Meeting

Level of Participation: Senior Officers of Owner & Contractor. Agenda a) Progress Status / statistics. . b) Completion Outlook c) Major hold ups / slippages. d) Assistance required. e) Critical issues. f) Client query / approval. Venue : Site 7.2.5 Progress Reports

I) Monthly Progress Report

This report shall be submitted in three copies on a monthly basis within Ten calendar days from cut-off date as agreed upon, covering overall scenario of the work. The report shall include but not be limited to the following :

a) Brief introduction of the work. b) Activities executed / achievements during the month. c) Scheduled vs actual percentage progress and progress curves for sub-

ordering, manufacturing / delivery, sub-contracting, construction activities and overall quantum wise status of purchase orders against scheduled.

d) Areas of concern / problems / hold ups, impact and action plans. e) Resource deployment status. f) Annexure giving status summary for Material Requisitions and

deliveries, sub-contracting and construction

Distribution: OWNER Two copies & One at Site.

II) Daily Report:

Daily report in duplicate as out lined in 2.2.4 of SCC and any other additional information/data/guideline/job procedure sought by Engineer-in-Charge shall be submitted without fail to HPCL at site by contractor.

7.3 General Environment Requirement

The contractor has to ensure efficient use of natural resources like water, fuel oil and lubricants. The contractor should ensure proper awareness to workers to maintain a green and clean environment inside / outside the building premises. The contractor must collect and dispose of all the waste and scrap materials at the designated place only as directed by Engineer – in – Charge.


7.4 DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD/Warranty Period

As per clause No. 5n of GTC.

7.5 Form C/D etc will not be issued by M/s HPCL 8.0 CONDITIONS SPECIFIC TO IBMS WORKS

The materials, design and workmanship shall satisfy the specifications contained herein and Codes referred to. Where the technical specifications stipulate the requirement in addition to those contained in the Standard Codes and specifications those additional requirements shall also be satisfied. In the absence of any Standard/Specifications covering any part of the work covered in this tender document, the instruction/directions of HPCL/Consultant will be binding on the contractor. The contractor shall quote as per specification and shall not be accepted to deviate from the same. No alternative offer shall be accepted for the works.

All IBMS works shall be of high quality, complete and fully operational including all necessary items and accessories whether or not specified herein. All IBMS works shall be completed in accordance with the regulations and standards to the satisfaction of the HPCL/Consultants. The general provisions, special provisions and general requirements apply to the entire installation.

During the progress of work completed portion of the building may be occupied and be put to use by the owner but the contractor shall remain fully responsible for the maintenance of IBMS works till the entire work covered by this contract is satisfactorily completed by him and handed over to the owner.

Contractor shall calculate the requirement of Gas for Suppression system for Data Center areas and conform to the conditions specified in the basis of design.

8.1 WORK AND WORKMANSHIP

To determine the acceptable standard of workmanship, the Owner/Consultant may order the Contractor to execute certain portions of works and services under the close supervision of the Owner/Consultant. On approval, they shall be labelled as guiding samples so that further works are executed to conform to these samples.

8.2 ASSOCIATED CIVIL WORKS

Major Civil works associated with IBMS are excluded in the scope work, but Main building cable entry including the inspection chambers to be carried out by IBMS Contractor only, under separate item. Mounting arrangements for the units shall be carried out by IBMS contractor only, at no extra cost.

8.3 ASSOCIATED ELECTRICAL WORKS

Major electrical works are excluded from the scope of IBMS contractor and the incoming cables for all panels shall be provided by Electrical contractor the same shall be coordinated


with electrical contractor. Electrical cabling for the items covered in the tender are in the scope of IBMS vendor and shall be paid under the relevant item.

Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of control cables as per I/O Summary and Scope Matrix shall be carried out by the IBMS contractor.

8.4 PROTECTION OF OTHER CONTRACTOR’S WORKS AND SAFETY OF

PERSONNEL AT SITE

In view of other contractors and agencies being engaged on site and shall be working simultaneously, the Contractor shall ensure at all times that during the execution of his work or during the operations and movements of equipment and supply vehicles and machinery no damage or injury is caused to the work or property or personnel of other contractors and agencies.

In case of any such loss or damage the Contractor shall take full responsibility for the same and shall bear all cost and expenses thereof. The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for all delays caused due to such damage and or injury and for the consequences which the other Contractors and Agencies may have to face or to which they may be subjected to or be accountable for as a result of such delays.

8.5 DESIGN BASIS

The design of the Integrated System shall have integration of the smallest sensor to the operator workstations (Computers) with all function of the entire building services available at the control stations. Integration shall mean all the parts of system are connected together through software and shall share all the information. The integration of all systems shall be achieved through software programs, electronic components, hardware packaging and communication network through Local Area Network.

8.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING

The contractor shall provide all necessary instruments and labour for testing, shall make adequate records of test procedures and readings, shall repeat any tests requested by the Owner/Consultants and shall provide test certificates signed by a properly authorized person. Such test shall be conducted on all materials and equipment’s and on completed work as called for by the Owner/ Consultants.

If it is proved that the installation or part there of is not satisfactorily carried out then the contractor shall be liable for the rectification and re-testing of the same as called for by the Owner/Consultants at the cost of the contractor. The Owner/Consultants decision as to what constitutes a satisfactory test shall be final.

The above general requirements as to testing shall be read in conjunction with any particular requirements specified elsewhere. A test house/agency approved by the Owner/Consultants shall carry out all tests.


8.7 SAMPLES AND CATALOGUES

Before ordering the necessary material for these installations, the contractor shall submit Technical data sheets for all the IBMS components & all other instruments & controls to the Owner/Consultants for approval. A sample of every kind of material such as electrical/ control cable, display panel etc shall be got approved. Vendor shall get approval for QAP for each item as mentioned above before siting the item.

Also the contractor shall ensure that the dimensional details of the equipment fit into the allotted space provided in the building.

8.8 VENDOR AND SHOP DRAWINGS

The contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner/Consultants for his approval six (6) sets of detailed layout of all IBMS equipments and wiring layouts/ducting layouts.

He shall prepare shop drawings incorporating the details given by manufacturers for the items included in his contract and also owner supplied items and any other items which need to be coordinated with other contractors for interfacing.

Before starting the work, the contractor shall submit to the Owner/Consultants for his approval in the prescribed manner, the shop/execution drawings for the entire installation.

The Owner/Consultants, reserves the right to alter or modify these, if they are found to be insufficient or not complying with the established technical standards or if they do not offer the most satisfactory performance or accessibility for maintenance. Contractor shall supply in six (6) sets of all approved shop drawings for execution.

8.9 AS BUILT”

At the completion of work and before issuance of certificate of virtual completion the contractor shall submit six (6) sets to the Owner/Consultants, layout drawing drawn at appropriate scale indicating the complete system “as installed” along with the softcopy of the same in CD.

8.10 INSTRUCTION / MAINTENANCE MANUAL

The Contractor shall prepare and produce instruction, operation and maintenance manuals in English for the use, operation and the maintenance of the supplied equipment and installations and submit to the Owner/Consultants in (6) copies at the time of handing over. The manual shall generally consist of the following:

Description of the project. Operating instructions. Maintenance instructions including procedures for preventive maintenance. Manufacturer’s catalogue for various equipments installed. Trouble shooting charts. Schematic & control wiring diagrams. Type and routine test certificates of major items. One (1) set of reproducible ‘As Built’ tracings on cloth and CD.


8.11 COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

On completion of the IBMS system installation and commissioning a certificate shall be furnished by the contractor countersigned by the site-in charge and/or consultant, under whose direct supervision the system installation and commissioning was carried out. The defect liability period shall commence thereafter which shall continue for a period of one (1) year. The comprehensive annual maintenance contract shall come into effect after completion of Defect Liability Period.

8.12 GUARANTEE:

At the close of the work and before issuance of final certificate of virtual completion by the Owner/Consultants, the contractor shall furnish written guarantee indemnifying the owner against defective materials and workmanship for a period of twelve Months after virtual completion of the work. The contractor shall be fully responsible for reinstallation or replacement free of cost to owner, for the following: a. Any defective work or material supplied by the Contractor. b. Any material or equipment supplied by the owner, which is damaged or destroyed as a result of defective workmanship by the contractor. c. Any material or equipment damaged or destroyed as a result of defective workmanship by the contractor.

8.13 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT AND TRAINING OF PERSONNEL

The contractor shall train the Owners personnel or his authorised representative to operate the IBMS system including all its components and carry out routine checks for a period of 3 months after issuance of virtual completion certificate. The necessary formats for carrying out such routine inspections shall be developed by the contractor and handed over to the owner for recording on the same. The contractor shall during this period have adequate number of skilled personnel stationed in the building who would interact with the owner’s representative for training of owner’s personnel. If found necessary during the period of installation and testing, the contractor shall train such owner’s personnel at his works at no extra cost to the Owner.

8.14 WORK PROGRESS REPORT

The Contractor shall provide the following while carrying out the execution/planning of works: Detailed schedule of events with completion date Fortnightly report showing progress of work Program of works for upcoming weeks every fortnightly Updated PERT charts with monthly progress

.


APPENDIX -1 TO SCC TERMS OF PAYMENTS 1.1 The basis and terms of payment without prejudice to any other mode of

recovery available to Owner, shall be as given below: 1.2 The Contractor shall be paid monthly running account bills at stages of

completion of individual item / work, based on the joint measurement, in the following manner after deductions of necessary dues payable by Contractor to the Owner such as Retention money, Taxes, Duties etc. in accordance with various provisions made elsewhere in this document.

1.3 SPECIAL PAYMENT TERMS

Following payment shall be made to the contractor against the running bills subject to the rate awarded to him and the clause regarding retention money as per general terms and conditions.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��!��

��"��

��

��#�$��

��%��

��&��

�'� ��

��

��()��

��

��$��%� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��!��

��"��

��

��#�$��

��%��

��&��

�'�

Item No- 147 to 150.1 - AMC.


Monthly payments shall be released after satisfactory completion of Maintenance for the previous month. All items which are not covered under the above payment terms will as under. 95 % on completion of the item 5% after completion of site acceptance test.


APPENDIX-2 TO SCC

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME CONTENTS CLAUSE DESCRIPTION 1.0 INTRODUCTION 2.0 DEFINITIONS 3.0 SCOPE OF WORK BY CONTRACTOR 4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS


1.0 INTRODUCTION

This specification establishes the Quality Assurance requirements to be met by Contractors (including turnkey contractors) and vendors. In case of any conflict between this specification and other provisions of the contract / purchase order, the same shall be brought to the notice of HPCL, at the stage of bidding and shall be resolved with HPCL, prior to the placement of order.

2.0 DEFINITION

2.1 Bidder For the purpose of this specification, the work “Bidder” means the person(s),

firm, company or organization who is under the process of being contracted by HPCL/Owner for delivery of some products (including service). The word is considered synonymous to supplier, contractor or vendor.

2.2 Correction

Action taken to eliminate the detected non-conformity refers to repair, rework of adjustment and relates to the disposition of an existing non-conformity.

2.3 Preventive Action

Action taken to eliminate the causes of a potential nonconformity, defect or other undesirable situation in order to prevent occurrence.

2.4 Process

Set of inter-related resources and activities which transform inputs into outputs.

2.5 Special Process

Process requiring pre-qualification of their process capability.

3.0 SCOPE OF WORK BY CONTRACTOR 3.1 Prior to award of contract 3.1.1 The bidder shall understand scope of work, drawings, specifications and

standards etc., attached to the tender /bid document, before he makes an offer.

3.1.2 The bidder shall submit milestones chart showing the time required for each

milestone activity and linkages between different milestone activities along with overall time period required to complete the entire scope of work.

3.1.3 The bidder shall develop and submit manpower and resource deployment chart.


3.1.4 The bidder shall submit, along with the bid, a manual or equivalent document describing / indicating / addressing various control / check points for t he purpose of quality assurance and the responsibilities of various functions responsible for quality assurance.

3.2 After the award of contract

The bidder shall submit the schedule for submission of following documents in the kick-off meeting or within ten days of the placement of order, whichever is earlier. - Quality plan for all activities, required to be done by the bidder, to

accomplish offered scope of work. - Inspection and test plans, covering various control aspects. - Job procedures as required by HPCL/Owner.

Various documents submitted by the bidder shall be finalized in consultation with HPCL. Here it shall be presumed that once a bidder has made an offer, he has understood the requirements given in this specification and agrees to comply with them in totality unless otherwise categorically so indicated during pre-award stage through agreed deviation / exception request. All quality assurance documents shall be reviewed by concerned HPCL functional groups and the bidder shall be required to incorporate all comments within the framework of this specification at this stage of the contract. It is also obligatory on the bidder that he obtains approval on every quality assurance document, before he starts using a particular document for delivery of contracted scope of work. Participation of HPCL/Owner in review / approval of quality plan / QA documents does not absolve the contractor of the contractual obligations towards specified and intended use of the product (or service) provided by him under the contract.

3.3 During job execution

3.3.1 During job execution, the bidder shall fully comply with all quality documents submitted and finalized / agreed against the requirements of this specification. Approval of HPCL on all these documents shall be sought before start of work.

3.3.2 Bidder shall produce sufficient quality records on controlled / agreed forms

such that requirements given in this specification are objectively demonstrated.

3.3.3 Bidder shall facilitate HPCL/Owner during quality / technical audits at his works /

sites. 3.3.4 Bidder shall discharge all responsibilities towards enforcement of this

specification on all his sub-contractors for any part of the scope which is sub-contracted.

4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS


4.1.1 The bidder shall nominate an overall in-charge of the contract titled as

“Project Manager” for the scope of work of agreed contract. The name of this person shall be duly intimated to HPCL, including all subsequent changes, if any. HPCL shall correspond only with the project manager of the bidder and shall be responsible for co-ordination and management of activities with bidder’s organization and all sub-vendors appointed by the bidder.

4.1.2 After award of work the bidder may review augmentation of manpower and resources deployment chart (submitted earlier), detail it out, if so consented by HPCL/Owner and resubmit the same as “Issued for implementation”.

4.1.3 The bidder shall plan the contract scope of work on quality plan format such that no major variation is expected during delivery of contract scope of work. These quality plan shall be made on enclosed format complete in all respect. The quality plan shall be assumed to be detailing bidder’s understanding and planning for the contract / offered scope of work. The bidder shall plan the type of resources including various work methodology which he agrees to utilize for delivery of contract scope of work.

4.3 The bidder is required to review the contract at all appropriate stages to evaluate his capabilities with respect to timely and quality completion of all activities pertaining to contracted scope of work and shall report to HPCL/Owner of constraints, if any.

4.4 The design activities, if any, performed during delivery of contract scope of work shall be so controlled that the output is reliable enough. It is expected that during development of design, the bidder shall take recourse to detailed checking, inter departmental/concerned officials reviews and documented verification methods.

4.5 For all documents which the bidder is likely to utilize for delivery of contract scope of work, a system must exist which assures that latest / required version(s) of the document(s) is available at all location / point of use.

4.6 In case the bidder decides to sub – contract any part / full of the contract scope of work (without prejudice to main contract condition), the bidder shall :

- Evaluate the technical and financial capabilities and past performance of the sub-contractor(s) and their products and/or services before awarding them with the sub-contracted scope of work. Selection of a sub-contractor should meet HPCL approval in documented form.

- Requirement of this specification shall be enforced on sub-contracted agency also. The bidder shall choose sub-contractor based on their capability to meet requirements of this specification also.

NOTE : It may so happen that, in a given situation, a sub-contractor may not have a system meeting the requirements of this specification. In all such eventualities, bidder may lend his system to sub-contractor for the contract such that sub – contractor effectively meets the requirements of this specification. In all such cases HPCL shall be duly informed.


4.7 Bidder shall establish methodology such that the materials supplied by the owner / HPCL shall be suitably identified in such a manner that either through identification or some other means, sufficient traceability is maintained which permits effective resolution of any problem reported in the outputs.

4.8 Critical activities shall be identified and the bidder is required to have documented methodologies which he is going to utilize for carrying out such activities under the contract scope of work. Wherever it is difficult to fully inspect or verify the output (special process) bidder shall pre-qualify, the performers and methodologies.

4.9 All inspections carried out by the bidder’s surveillance inspection staff shall be in conformity to quality plans and / or inspection and test plans. All inspection results shall be duly documented on controlled / agreed forms such that results can be co-related to specific product, that was inspected / tested.

4.10 All inspection, measuring & test equipments (IMTEs) shall be duly calibrated as per National / International standards / codes and only, calibrated and certified IMTEs shall be utilized for delivery of contract scope of work.

4.11 All outputs / products delivered against contract scope of work shall be duly marked such that their inspection status is clearly evident during all stages / period of the contract.

4.12 All non-conformities (NCs) found by the contractor’s inspection / HPCL surveillance staff shall be duly recorded, including their disposal action. The deficiencies observed during stage of the product, shall be recorded and resolved suitably. Effective corrective and preventive action shall be implemented by the bidder for all repetitive NCs, including deficiencies.

4.13 All deficiencies noticed by HPCL’s representative(s) shall be recorded on a controlled form such deficiencies shall be analyzed by the bidder and effective and appropriate correction, corrective and preventive actions shall be implemented. Bidder shall intimate HPCL/Owner of all such corrective and preventive action implemented by him.

4.14 Bidder shall establish appropriate methodologies for safe and effective handling, storage, preservation of various materials / inputs encountered during delivery of contract scope of work.

4.15 Bidder shall prepare sufficient records for various processes carried out by him for delivery of contract scope of work such that requirements of this specification are objectively demonstrated. In case HPCL/owner finds that enough objective evidence / recording is not available for any particular process, bidder shall be obliged to make additional records so as to provide sufficient objective evidence. The decision of HPCL/owner shall be final and binding on such issues.

4.16 The bidder shall arrange internal quality audits at quarterly intervals, to independently assess the conformance by various performers to the requirements of this specification. The findings of such assessment shall be duly recorded and a copy shall be sent to HPCL/owner for review. For all special processes, bidder shall deploy only qualified performers. Wherever HPCL observes any deficiency, the bidder


shall arrange the adequate training to the performer(s) before any further delivery of work.


H. SCHEDULE OF

QUANTITIES


S.No. Description of Item

I. INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM(IBMS):

Design supply, installing, testing and commissioning of Microprocesser based Intergrated Building Management System as per the detailed specifications for complete and satisfactory operation and control and to local authorities approval. Both BAS and IBMS system to be integrated in a single Central Monitoring station. Main stations and subsystems with LAN, complete with hardware and software to provide graphical users interface consisting of

1 System PC comprising Pentium IV precessor with EISA bus and with 1.0GHz minimum clock speed, minimum of 2 GB RAM (Random Access Memory), 1 mb cache, USB port, DVD combo drive & 160 GB HDD expandable, with Window NT/XP operating system. (Main server - HOT Stand by mode)

2 Windows based graphical software, (with necessary software addresses required as per I/O list) on MS windows latest edition /XP or NT platform, including Alarm Management for IBMS as per detailed specification.

3 Software and Hardware for Interfacing through a gate way for monitoring HT/LT, DG through serial Modbus interface for the data points as per the I/O List in Section-I and for Air Cooled Chillers (3 nos)[50 data points for each chiller], PAHU(24 sets)[10 data points for each], VFDs & VAVs as per the detailed AC-BAS scope matrix. The software shall also include the cost of the required drivers.

MONITORING STATION AND PRINTERS: 4 Design supply, installing, testing and commissioning of monitoring Station to function as

Server for remote monitoring, central archiving and web enabling win latest edition /NT server and required software to archive, database management of both IBMS and BAS system. The system shall comprise Pentium IV single or dual processor with EISA bus and with 1.0GHz minimum clock speed, minimum of 2GB RAM (Random Access Memory), 1 MBcache, CD/DVD writer & reader, USBdrives , DVD WRITER & minimum 160GB Hard disk storage. The various system shall have the following PC system seperatly. 1. BMS PC 2. ACCESS PC 3. FIRE PC 4. CCTV PC

5 Supply and commissioning of 600 DPI Colour Inkjet Printer



6 Supply and commissioning of Single A4 size Laser Printer

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLER: Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Autonomous networkable DDC

Controller with 32 bit microprocessor based standalone and networkable type with real time clock and historical database of min 1 Mb with panels, peer to peer communicable DDC modules, input or output relays, terminal block, real time clock, networking and inbuilt data buffer for Following requirement as per Enclosed IO summary .

7 DDC Panel for LT Electrical Requirement. ( Refer: IO summary Section - II ).

8 DDC Panel for Water Management System ( Refer: IO summary Section - III ).

9 DDC Panel for Lighting Managemnet System. ( Refer: IO summary Section - IV ).

10 DDC Panel for Fire Fighting System ( Refer: IO summary Section - V).

11 DDC Panel for Lifts and Elevators ( Refer: IO summary Section - VI.

12 DDC Panel for Chiller ( Refer: IO summary BAS - Type-A).

13 DDC Panel for AHU with VFD ( Refer: IO summary BAS - Type-B).

14 DDC Panel for 3 Nos AHU's/CAHU with Starter ( Refer: IO summary BAS - TYPE - C).

15 DDC Panel for 4 Nos CAHU with Starter ( Refer: IO summary BAS - TYPE - D).

16 DDC Panel for 22 Nos PAC ( Refer: IO summary BAS - TYPE - E).

17 DDC Panel for 7 Nos PAC ( Refer: IO summary BAS - TYPE -F).

FIELD EQUIPMENT: 18 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Sensors (Field Devices) as per attached

technical specification for measuring outside air Temperature & RH to measure the outside ambience for BAS system

19 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Immersion type temperature sensors with all accessories as per attached technical specification for measuring temperature of CHW temperatures for chillers for BAS system.

20 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Duct Type Temperature and Rh Sensors as per attached technical specification with all duct mounting accessories as per the system AHU mentioned in I/o summary for BAS system

21 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Differential pressure switch as per attached technical specification to monitor the fan status as per AHU I/O listed for BAS system



22 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Differential pressure switch as per attached technical specification to monitor the filter status as per the AHU I/O listed for BAS system

23 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Differential-pressure switch as per attached technical specification across the pumps with a Differential-pressure of 0.2 to 1 Bar as per the system requirements for BAS system

24 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Differential-pressure Sensors as per attached technical specification across the supply and return header operating range of 0 to 1 Bar as per the system requirements for BAS system

25 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of In line flow meter of 200mm dia as per attached technical specification with suitable pulse counter for BAS system

26 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Static pressure sensor 0-1000Pa for BAS system as per attached technical specification

27 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Spring return Damper Actuator as per attached technical specification with ON / OFF control and position feedback. Damper having a holding torque of 7Nm and With auxiliary contacts to indicate the position for BAS system. Rate shall be Inclusive of control panel with necessary wiring for Damper Actuator.)

28 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Spring Return Fire Damper Actuator as per attached technical specification with ON / OFF control and position feedback. Damper having a holding torque of 10Nm and With auxiliary contacts to indicate the position for BAS system

29 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Duct Smoke Detector as per attached technical specification with necessary IRMs (Interposing relay Modules) which is being linked by LOR of FAS system.

II FIRE ALARM SYSTEM:

FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL:



30 Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Intelligent Addressable Analogue type Micro Processor - controlled Main Fire Alarm Control Panel with 4 loops, expandable to 10 loops. Each loop capacity of minimum 126 detectors and 126 modules i.e. total loop capacity of 504 detectors & 504 modules, 640 character LCD display, networkable having 10 control modules complete with zone indicating LEDs as per the detailed specification and with Battery backup with charger for each panel.

31 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Fire Alarm Repeater Panel with 160 character LCD display for status of Main Panel.

32 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Rate of Rise Heat Detectors (Thermal Detectors): Addressable analogue type Heat Detectors with solid state design with sensing element combination of fixed type and rate of rise of temperature indicating LED, mounting base etc. as per detailed specifications.

33 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Addressable analogue Photoelectric type smoke detectors with dual chamber, solid state design, indicating LED, mounting base etc. as per detailed specification.

34 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Electronic Hooters:/Speakers solid state circulatory two tone system as per attached technical specification suitable for operation through addressable relay control module

35 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Manual Call Points/push button stations of approved make with NO/NC contacts slim type and projecting out from the surface of enclosurewith glass suitable for addressable function as per attached technical specification

36 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Fault Isolation Module as per attached technical specification to electrically isolate different sections of detector loops.

37 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Addressable Control Module as per attached technical specification for AHU tripping, access card integration etc

38 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Monitor Module for monitoring various systems.

39 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Response Indicator as per attached technical specification for mounting on false ceiling at the entries of the cabin for indicating the operation for detectors in the above areas.



40 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of LPG Gas Detection Detectors as per attached technical specification

41 Supply, fixing, testing and commissioning of Mimic Panel with all zones as per the attached technical specification

III WATER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: 42 Supply and installation of Displacement Level Transmitter suitable for giving a linear output

(0-10V) with installtion hardware & accessories for UG Water tanks (2500 MM length for water + 600MM free board = 3100 mm total)

43 Water Management System: Supply and installation of Displacement Level Transmitter suitable for giving a linear output (0-10V) with installtion hardware & accessories. For Terrace Water tanks (1600 mm length for water level + 600mm free board = 2200mm total)

IV

PUBLIC ADDRESS AND EMEGENCY VOICE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM:

44 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Microprocessor based Central Announcement Console for selective paging up to 8 zones with necessary electronics and accessories to complete the system as per specification of Approved make.

45 Supply & installation 6 channel Programmable Mixer Amplifier with assignable priority on each channel to accept Telephone, Microphone, CD, Audio Tone from Fire Detecting System for Emergency Annoucement System etc., with in-built Compressor and Limiter as per specs.

46 Supply and installation of Pre-wired twin Equipment Rack as per the detailed specifications

47 Supply & installation of 6W Power Handling Flush Mounting Ceiling Rung Speakers with LMT of selectable wattage laps of 1.5W, 3W and 6W for all office and lift lobbies

48 Supply & installation of 6W Power wall Mounting Metal Speakers with LMT of selectable wattage laps of 1.5W, 3W and 6W for staircase areas and office floors.

49 Supply & installation of Volume Control switch at GM's Cabin, conference Hall and Meeting Room.



50 Supply and installing Emergency Voice Communication instrument with Stainless steel plate with microphone and speaker provision

51 Supply, intallation, testing and commissioning of the Central Console system for Emergecy Voice Communication.

52 Music System: 1 No. each of AM/FM Tuner, Dual Auto Reverse Cassettee Player, 3 CD Changer, Music Source Selector, 1/3rd Octage Graphic Equalizer with in-built compressor and limiter, 2 nos. 200W, RMS Booster Amplifier having 70V and 100V output.

53 Supply and installation of "World Space" brand Receiver with necessary subcription fee for 2 years and initial Operating License for 1 year from Statutory Authority (to be renewed by HPCL therafter)

V CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM; 54 CCTV System: Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Varifocul Colour 1/3"

cameras with smoked dome indoor enclosure , 480 lines resolution and sensitivity of 1.5 lux (F1.2) including all mounting supports / brackets and fixing accessories. (Cameras shall be supported from the soffit such that its weight does not bear on to the false ceiling).

55 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Color high speed 1/4" Pan/Tilt/Zoom indoor camera, 480 lines resolution and sensittivity of 1 lux at F1.2 with 16X motorized zoom lens, receiver, driver, Pan/Tilt and necessay mounting support / brackets and fixing accessories. (Cameras shall be supported from the soffit such that its weight does not bear on to the false ceiling).

56 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Color high speed 1/4" Pan/Tilt/Zoom outdoor camera, 480 lines resolution and sensittivity of 1 lux at F1.2 with 16X motorized zoom lens, receiver, driver, Pan/Tilt and necessay mounting support / bracket, accessories as required for outdoor installation (IP 68).

57 Providing Power Supply Unit for each camera.(each camera shall be provided with dedicated power supply)

58 Supply and installation of Digital Video Recorder 16 Channel Duplex for multiplexing and digital recording , suitable for live viewing and playback while recording , motion detection and alarm event detection as specified. The storage capacity of DVR shall be minimum 500 GB.



59 Windows based Software for remote monitoring on a PDM complete with necessary hardware modules to connect the CCTV system to the LAN Ethernet network complete with router/switch/ hub and other accessories. Software shall provide facility to serve the video images on the LAN.

60 Supply of Keyboard with joystick (connected to the digital video recorders)

61 Supply of 42" Plasma Wall-mounted type Colour Screen

62 Supply of 21" LCD Colour Monitor

63 Providing Outdoor enclosure with suitable accessories for mounting the cameras.

64 Providing 6 Mtr height GI post with necessary mounting bracket and Civil works for external cameras.

VI ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM; 65 Supply, fixing, testing and commissioning of Access Controllers for Access Control

System, each with capacity of 1000 cards to connect up to 2 card readers complete with necessary hardware, Software etc., as specified for centralized securtiy monitoring.

66 Supply, fixing, testing and commissioning of Access Controllers for Access Control System, each with capacity of 1000 cards to connect up to 4 card readers complete with necessary hardware, Software etc., as specified for centralized securtiy monitoring.

67 Supply, fixing, testing and commissioning of Access Controllers for Access Control System, each with capacity of 1000 cards to connect up to 8 card readers complete with necessary hardware, Software etc., as specified for centralized securtiy monitoring.

68 Supply and commissioning of Proximity Card readers for Doors and optical turnstiles for Access Control System for centralized securtiy monitoring.

69 Supply and commissioning of Biometric Finger Readers for Access Control System as specified for centralized securtiy monitoring.

70 Supply and commissioning of Pin Pads for Access Control System as specified for centralized securtiy monitoring.



71 Supply and commissioning of Electromagnetic Locks for Access Control System with necessary hardware as specified for centralized securtiy monitoring.

72 Supply and commissioning of Magnetic Contact for Access Control System with necessary hardware as specified for centralized securtiy monitoring.

73 Supply and commissioning of Emergency release Switch with break glass for Access Control System with necessary hardware as specified for centralized securtiy monitoring.

74 Supply and commissioning of Door Contacts for all Fire Doors for monitoring door status with necessary hardware as specified for centralized securtiy monitoring.

75 Supply and commissioning of PC station with Access Control software for issue of visitor card comprising Pentium IV processor with EISA bus and with 1.0GHz minimum clock speed, minimum of 1GB RAM (Random Access Memory), 512Kbcache, 1 x 1.44 MB 3½" diskette drive, 160GB expandable Hard Disk with suitable interfaces for Access Control System for centralized security monitoring including provision for intergration of existing cards with the proposed system. Sample card shall be provided by HPCL at the time of integration.

76 Supply of Proximity Cards (ISO proxi type), Card Holder and Lanyard for Access Control System

77 Printing Owner's logo and address on lable with Photo ID and the owner's logo/initial on the lanyard etc.

78 Supply of suitably coated Adhesive Lables for printing user details and pasting on the cards.

VII ASPIRATION SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM: 79 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of VESDA Laser Compact as per the

detailed specification for Aspiration Smoke Detection System

79.1 Supply , installation and commissioning of Versda Laser plus system as per detailed specification for aspirating fire fighting system.

80 Supply and Installation of Power Supply Unit for the VESDA Detectors

81 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Aspiration Tubes as per the detailed specification for Aspiration Smoke Detection System



82 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Capillary Tubes as per the detailed specification for Aspiration Smoke Detection System

83 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Air Termination (Nozzles) as per the detailed specification for Aspiration Smoke Detection System

84 Supply, installation and commissioning of Vesda Configurator software as per the detailed specification for Aspiration Smoke Detection System

85 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of High Level Interface as per the detailed specification for Aspiration Smoke Detection System

86 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Electronic Hooter for Aspiration Smoke Detection System

VIII WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM: 87 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning Water Leak detection panel with battery as

per specification.

88 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning Water Leak detection module as per specification.

89 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning Water leak detection cable sensor (10 Mtrs) as per specification.

90 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning Electronic Hooter as per specification.

91 Supply, installation , testing and comissioning of Glass break detector as per specification.

��

VIII GAS SUPRESSION SYSTEM: 92 80 Ltrs. Cylinder with Valve for Gas Supression System (FM 200)/HFC 227 including

design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the system as per detailed specifications and attached drawings for different zones on the First Floor Data Center area.

93 FM 200/HFC 227 gas for Gas Supression System (FM 200/HFC227) including design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the system as per detailed specifications and attached drawings for different zones on the First Floor Data Center area.



94 Primary Completer Kit complete with Solenoid & Gauge assembly, Discharge Tube, Manual Pneumatic Actuator, Flex Hoses, Warning Sign, Nameplate and Connectors for Gas Supression System (FM 200/HFC 227) as per detailed specifications and attached drawings for different zones on the First Floor Data Center area.

95 Slave completer Kit complete with Discharge Tube, Flex Hoses, Pressure Gauge, Elbows and Connectors for Gas Supression System (FM 200/HFC 227) as per detailed specifications and attached drawings for different zones on the First Floor Data Center area.

96 Check Valve for Gas Supression System (FM 200/HFC 227) as per detailed specifications and attached drawings for different zones on the First Floor Data Center area.

97 Nozzles for Gas Supression System (FM 200/HFC 227) as per detailed specifications and attached drawings for different zones on the First Floor Data Center area.

98 Manifold (Multi-way) for Gas Supression System (FM 200/HFC 227) as per detailed specifications and attached drawings for different zones on the First Floor Data Center area.

99 Rack - Wall Mount Kit for Gas Supression System (FM 200/HFC 227) as per detailed specifications and attached drawings for different zones on the First Floor Data Center area.

100 M.S. Seamless pipes as per ASTM A 106 Gr. B, schedule 40 with necessary fittings for Gas Supression System (FM 200/HFC 227) as per detailed specifications and attached drawings for different zones on the First Floor Data Center area including the charges for the Third Party Inspection as per the Data Sheets and QAP.

101 2 Zone Gas Release Panel with Battery Backup as Detection & Control equipment as per detailed technical specifications for Gas Supression system

102 Conventional Smoke Detector as Detection & Control equipment as per detailed technical specifications for Gas Supression system

103 Response Indicator as Detection & Control equipment as per detailed technical specifications for Gas Supression system

104 Manual Release Switch as Detection & Control equipment as per detailed technical specifications for Gas Supression system



105 Abort Switch as Detection & Control equipment as per detailed technical specifications for Gas Supression system

106 Electronic Hooter as Detection & Control equipment as per detailed technical specifications for Gas Supression system

107 Spare 80 Ltrs. Cylinder with Valve for Gas Supression System (FM 200/HFC 227)

IX ULTRASONIC PEST REPLLER SYSTEM 108 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of VHFO controller for the Ultrasonic Pest

Repeller system as per the detailed technical specifications.

109 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Satellites for the Ultrasonic Pest Repeller system as per the detailed technical specifications.Satellites

X CABLES Cables for BAS system:

110 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of 2 Core 1.0 SQ. MM, GI armoured ATC conductor multistranded, Unscreened FRLS cable. [For ON / OFF Command & various status / Power Supply for Field Devices]

111 Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of 2 Core 1.0 SQ. MM, GI armoured ATC conductor multistranded, screened FRLS cable. [For Sensors]

112 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of 4 Core 1.5 SQ. MM, GI armoured ATC conductor multistranded, screened FRLS cable. [ForModulating Actuator & T & Rh sensors ]

113

Supply, laying, terminating, testing and commissioning of 4 Core 1.5 SQ. MM, GI armoured ATC conductor multistranded, Unscreened FRLS cable. [For ON/ OFF Actuator ]

114

Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of 2 Core 1.5 Sq.mm GI armoured twisted pair shielded FRLS cable for bus connection.[For communication]

115 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of 12 Core 1.5 SQ. MM, GI armoured ATC conductor multistranded, Unscreened FRLS cable. [For ON / OFF Command & various status / Power Supply for sec I to XI 's Field Devices.]

116 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of 16 Core 1.5 SQ. MM, GI armoured ATC conductor multistranded, Unscreened FRLS cable. [For ON / OFF Command & various status / Power Supply for sec I to XI 's Field Devices]



CABLES FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM: 117 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of 2C 1.5 armoured FRLS cable of

approved make (suitable for addressable analogue Fire Alarm Systems) in ceiling with suitable clamps and screws

CABLES FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS AND EMERGENCY VOICE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM:

118 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of 2 Core 48/0.2 ATC with Armoured PVC insulated Twin Twisted Loudspeaker cable for connection between amplifier and speakers.

119 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of 4 Core 1.5 sq.mm PVC insulated steel Armoured UG cable for PA system

120 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of suitable core copper Power Cable for EVC equipments.

121 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of suitable core copper Communication Cable for EVC equipments.

CABLES FOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

122

Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of Cable from electromagnetic lock/Sensor to Controller -2 C 1Sqmm multistand armoured cable

123 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of Cable from Reader to Controller - 12 C 1sqmm multistand shielded armoured cable

124

Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of Data/network cable -2 Core 1.5 Sq.mm armouredtwisted pair shielded cable for bus connection[For communication]

CABLES FOR CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM 125 Supply,laying, terminating, testing and Commissioning of RG 59 Coaxial armoured Cable

in ceiling/existing cable tray. The rate shall inclusive of all fixing accessories for cables

126 Supply,laying, terminating, testing and Commissioning of 4 Core 1.5 Sqm Twisted pair Shielded armoured cable in ceiling/existing cable tray. The rate shall inclusive of all fixing accessories for cables. (For PTZ camera and power supply.)

CABLES FOR ASPIRATION SMOKE DETECTOR SYSTEM: 127 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of 2C x 1.5 Sq.mm Cu. Armoured

Cable for Aspiration Smoke Detection System

CABLES FOR GAS SUPRESSION SYSTEM:



128 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of 2C x 1.5 Sq.mm. Cu. Armoured Cable for Gas Supression system

CABLES FOR WATER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: 129 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of 12C sheilded copper armournd

cable for OH tank controller and UG tank

CABLES FOR WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM: 130 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of 2C x 1.0 Sq.mm copper

conductor PVC insulated cable for Water Leak detection

131 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of 6C x 1.0 Sq.mm copper conductor PVC insulated cable for Water Leak detection

CABLES FOR ULTRASONIC PEST CONTROL SYSTEM: 132 Supply, laying, terminating,testing and commissioning of suitable cable for the Ultrasonic

Pest Repeller system

Cables for other micelleanous work: 133 Supply, laying, termination, testing and commissioning of 2C 1.5 Sqmm unscreened ,

Armoured cable.

134 Supply, laying, termination, testing and commissioning of 3C 1 Sqmm screened cable

135 Supply, laying, termination, testing and commissioning of 2C 1 Sqmm unscreened Armoured cable.

136 Supply, laying, termination, testing and commissioning of 2 x 2C 1.5 Sqmm twisted pair screened cable

137 Supply, laying, termination, testing and commissioning of 3C 2.5 Sqmm unscreened Armoured cable.

138 Supply, laying, termination, testing and commissioning of 3C 1.5 Sqmm unscreened Armoured cable.

XI Miscellaneous: 139 Excavation of existing ground at the depth of 900mm' level from existing ground level for a

width of 300mm and backfilling etc. for laying the PVC piping. Extra earth after back-filling to be levelled in low lying area as directed by the Site incharge.



140 Supply, providing, construction of 600 x 600mm Inspection chamber for PVC pipes with Heavy duty Manhole cover at every 30m distance for taking the cable from building to building.

141 Supply, providing, fixing of 150 mm GI cable tray for taking the cables including fixing accessoreis, supporting angles etc.

142 Supply, providing, fixing of 300 mm GI cable tray for taking the cables including fixing accessoreis, supporting angles etc.

143 Supply and laying of 110 mm dia PVC pipe (6 Kg) in execavated ground. Spacer shall be provided for every 3 mtr distance. The rate shall including necessary coupler, bend etc.

144 Supply and laying 25mm dia MS conduit of approved make for laying of IBMS cables including necessary accessories like bend, junction box fixing of clamps etc., complete. The conduit shall be recessed in wall including chipping, roup plastering etc.

145 Providing wiring to the IBMS equipment using 2 Runs of 2.5 Sqmm insulated copper cable with 1R-2.5mm for earthing inside the suitable size MS conduits with clamp and fixing accessories - The supply should be taken from existing UPS DB

146 Providing supply and fixing of 2 Nos of 5A 3Pin socket with 3R 1.5Sqmm insulated copper cable in suitable MS conduits with all necessary fixing accessories. (Supply to be taken from nearest DB.)

XII Annual Maintanance Contracts: 147 Providing AMC for the entire Integrated Building Management System for the Year 1

following succesful completion of Defect Liability Period as detailed in the specifications.

148 Providing AMC for the entire Integrated Building Management System for the Year 2 following succesful completion of Defect Liability Period as detailed in the specifications.

149 Providing AMC for the entire Integrated Building Management System for the Year3 following succesful completion of Defect Liability Period as detailed in the specifications.



150 Providing AMC for the entire Integrated Building Management System for the Year 4 following succesful completion of Defect Liability Period as detailed in the specifications.

150.1 Providing AMC for the entire Integrated Building Management System for the Year 5 following succesful completion of Defect Liability Period as detailed in the specifications.

XIV Site Acceptance Test:(SAT) 151 Providing Site Acceptance Test of IBMS System ( inclusive of other vendor's supplied

equipment also) for ensure the smooth and proper functioning of IBMS as per enclosed specification including submission of comprehensive documentation for operation and maintenance of the system.


I. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS


INDEX FOR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

S.no Description of works Page no.

1

SUB-SECTION-A – INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

2 SUB-SECTION B – BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM for HVAC Control

3 SUB-SECTION C – List of Components to be Intergrated through IBMS & BAS

4 SUB-SECTION D – Analog Addressable FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM

5 SUB-SECTION E – High Sensitivity Very Early SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM

6 SUB-SECTION F – PA SYSTEM and EVC SYSTEM

7 SUB-SECTION G – ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

8

SUB-SECTION H – WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM

9 SUB-SECTION I – CCTV

10 SUB-SECTION J- GAS BASED FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEM

11 SUB-SECTION K - ULTRASONIC PEST REPELLENT SYSTEM

10 SUB-SECTION L - I/O SUMMARY FOR BAS

11 SUB-SECTION M- I/O SUMMARY

12 SUB-SECTION N - SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST

13 SUB-SECTION-O COMPREHENSIVE ANNUAL MAINTENANACE CONTRACT

14 SUB-SECTION P – CONTROL/ SIGNALCABLES


Sub Section A (IBMS and BAS)

1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Introduction:

The proposed system shall be a fully Integrated Building Management System (IBMS) incorporating the following functional sub-systems:

Vertical transportation system Lighting management system Electrical System – Various parameters monitoring UPS Monitoring system HVAC Water level Monitoring System with Auto Pump control Fire Alarm System Aspiration smoke detection system FM 200 Gas based fire Suppression system Access Control System Public Address System Closed Circuit Television System Electrical Metering Glass breaks detection system. Fire door and Fire pump monitoring system Water leakage detection system

The Integrated Building Management System (IBMS) shall be designed on the basis of distributed intelligence.

The system shall provide satisfactory operation without damage at 110% and 85% of rated voltage and at + 3 Hz variation of line frequency.

It shall provide static, transient and short circuit protection on all inputs and outputs. Communication lines shall be protected against incorrect wiring, static transients and induced magnetic interference. Bus connected devices shall be a/c. coupled or equivalent so that any single device failure will not disrupt or halt bus communication.

The Building Management System shall be fully and truly integrated to provide the end-users with full control, monitoring and management functions for both the functional subsystems. The integration shall be based on common computer operating system and operating software procedures. The integrated Building Management System envisaged for OWNER shall have state of architecture and shall accompany all the integration features that are available and work seamlessly. The integration covers with various subsystems provided by other Bidders.


1.2 Compliance With Specification

Compliance with the specification shall be clearly spelt out on a clause-by-clause listing. Technical information of products and software offered shall be submitted using the "Technical Data Sheets" for evaluation purposes.

2. SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE 2.1 General a) The IBMS system architecture shall be based around a modular PC network, utilizing

industry standard operating systems, networks and protocols. b) The system shall allow the true distribution of system functions such as monitoring and

control and graphical user interface etc. across the network to allow maximum flexibility and performance.

c) To ensure highest reliability the system shall be based on a two /Three tier architecture

of truly distributed and standalone intelligence. The lower level tier would comprise of the controller subsystems: viz.: the Direct

Digital Controller (DDC) Units for HVAC/Building Automation functions , Intelligent Fire Alarm Panels for Fire detection/Alarm Functions, Access Control System & CCTV system etc

The second or higher level tier would comprise of the Central Graphic Operator

Stations that would serve as the supervisory operator interface/human machine interface (HMI) for both the lower level controller subsystems.

d) All the controllers on the first tier would be truly standalone devices which shall carry

out all their specified designated functions on a standalone basis without the need for any /master/network communications device.

These controllers shall reside on their respective bus networks. Since all controllers on each bus are to be of truly standalone and intelligent type, the bus network shall be connected to the central operator stations using only simple protocol converters. (The protocol converters shall be single board off the shelf devices that shall not have any memory modules/ independent power supply modules, memory, RTC, or any moving mechanisms such as hard drives, etc.) In systems that require any higher order intelligent mediation devices (such as system integration units, network communication units/mediator units, etc.) between the two tiers, it shall be ensured by the vendors that not more than 120 points are handled under one such unit. Vendors shall indicate this clearly in the system architecture drawing to be submitted along-with bid

e) The Central Station architecture shall include support of various Wide Area Networks

using standard hardware and software to link various functional nodes into a single integrated system. The network protocol used shall be industry standard TCP/IP


(Ethernet). The system shall also support remote configuration and operation using standard dial-up modems/high speed modems.

f) The IBMS system shall allow communications with a wide variety of control devices

and software systems utilizing off the shelf driver packages. 2.2 General Central Software Specifications a) The IBMS Central Station software shall be based around the Microsoft NT 32 bit

multi-tasking environment. The system shall be a true 32 bit application to take advantage of Microsoft NT’s enabling technologies.

b) The IBMS system shall be integrated with the startup services of Microsoft T. Log on to

Microsoft NT shall not be required for IBMS system startup and running. The Microsoft NT event viewer shall be available to view startup and shutdown of the IBMS system.

c) It shall be possible to connect multiple such Operator Stations on the TCP/IP network.

It shall be possible for the stations to reside and merge into the users TCP / IP intranet system without use of any proprietary hardware devices.

d) These IBMS remote Operator Stations shall be capable of running on the following

Microsoft platforms: Windows NT or latest versions of Windows 2000 platform. e) The IBMS system shall provide Monitoring and Control of the connected facilities

using standard software drivers and shall not require any custom programming to implement. All configurations shall be permissible while the system is on-line without interruption to monitoring and control on other channels. Systems that require to go off line for programming/ configuration / graphic creation shall not be acceptable.

f) Specifically, IBMS Central Stations must not require "re-starting" to implement

database program changes. In addition, database changes made on-line shall instantly apply system wide and shall not require a Network Operating System (eg. Netware, LAN Manager, Banyan Vines) based file server to achieve this.

2.3 Communications a) The IBMS Central system shall provide communications to the controller buses over a

variety of physical media topology’s as follows: • RS-232 • RS-422 • Ethernet • Proprietary Networks b) The complete system shall be capable of supporting greater than ninety separate

communications links to bus networks of controller devices. Each connection shall operate independently of the others and facilities shall be provided by system displays to individually place the channels in service or out of service.


c) It shall be possible for all serial connections to the IBMS Server Station to be routed via a terminal server and the LAN as an alternate to connecting directly to the host computer.

d) All communications between the different tiers, i.e.: between the controller bus and central station shall take place through standard protocol converters and shall not necessitate any system integrator devices that require to be programmed, etc. To ensure integrity of each tier, systems shall not use any intermediate intelligent devices that do control functions / communications processing in between the two tiers.

e) For achieving better system availability, it shall be possible for all controller bus connections to the core computer to be routed via a terminal server on the LAN rather than directly to the host computer. The system shall be capable of supporting up to 40 simultaneous network connected Operator Stations

f) It shall be possible to efficiently monitor dynamic, real time data from any of the real

time controllers (1st tier) connected to the network. It shall also be possible to configure hardware and software points from the core computer for each of these controller panels using a consistent configuration data format across all panel/controller types. Systems which require an independent station/server for configuring a controller subsystem shall not be accepted.

g) It shall also be possible for the IBMS software to interface to different types of

controllers/devices using industry standard interface protocols such as Gould MODBUS. This shall allow for simple interfacing to other 3rd party control devices (such as PLCs). The interface to such systems shall again be through standard protocol converters and shall not require any higher order intermediate devices such as System Interface Units , etc. Given the sufficient level of system privilege through passwords, it shall be possible to view, manipulate and analyses all data in all the controller sub-systems from any Operator Station in the system, including those operating remotely via dial-up modem links. It should be possible to view data from all or a combination of controller subsystems in any or all of the graphic pages on the stations. Systems that do not allow dial in to the system via modem link shall not be accepted. System should use industry standard, WIN NT.

h) Once a controller is configured and placed in service, the system shall automatically

begin background diagnostic scanning of the device to ensure that communications are monitored independently of any monitoring scanning.

i) The system shall perform checks on data integrity of all data acquired from the device.

If an invalid or time out response be received, the data shall be ignored and the system record the transaction as an error. Statistics shall be kept and displayed by the system on errors encountered in communication by means of a communications barometer. The barometer shall increment for every failed call and decrement for each successful call. In addition, the system shall alarm separate marginal and ailure conditions based on user defined limits to advise the operator of the device and channel that has failed. Communications statistics shall be displayed on a standard system display and shall be available as part of the reporting system or custom displays.


j) In order to minimise communications traffic, the system shall automatically block data requests using contiguous addresses and the scan interval to generate scan packets, optimising throughput for a given scanning load. The system shall also provide utilities to examine scan packet allocation for each scan interval, and compile aggregate statistics on communication channel usage.

k) Where supported by the controlling device, Report by Exception (RBE) protocols shall

be used to reduce the scanning load of the system while improving system response. If necessary, periodic scanning may be used in conjunction with RBE to ensure data integrity.

l) For Systems in which there is continuous data polling in between the two tiers, the

vendors shall need to provide sufficient data to prove communications stability and acceptable response times.

m) Control transactions issued by the operator shall be communicated to control devices

using a write followed by read to ensure the integrity of the transaction. If the read following the write to the device indicates that the control action has failed, the operator shall be informed by means of a control failure alarm. The priority of the control failure alarm shall be configurable by the user.

3.0 Deleted

4.0 IBMS CENTRAL OPERATOR STATION

4.1 GENERAL

The Integrated Building Management System (IBMS) shall be PC based concept allowing for the full integration of Direct Digital Control of Heating & Ventilation Services, Air Conditioning, Energy Management, Utility Services, Fire Alarm,fire suppression system and Access Control System, CCTV System to be controlled & monitored by one common system.

The IBMS Central Operator Station hardware shall be located as specified herein and consist of a PC and printer with the following minimum specifications:

System PC comprising Pentium IV precessor with EISA bus and with 1.0GHz minimum clock speed, minimum of 2 GB RAM (Random Access Memory), 1 mb bcache, UsB port, DVD combo drive & 160 GB HDD expandable, with Window NT/XP operating system. (Main server - HOT Stand by mode) The PC shall be supported with a Key board and a 15" inch colour monitor. The Keyboard shall include full upper/lower case ASCII keyset, a numeric keypad, dedicated cursor keypad. The colour monitor shall support 1024 X 768 @ 65K colours and shall have a low reflective screen, a 43 line by 80 character display, front access contrast control, Ethernet 10/100 NIC, CD ROM Drive, Mouse AND PRINTER of 600 DPI Colour Inkjet Printer and Laser printer shall be provided for recording alarms, operator transactions & system reports. . Each of the printers furnished shall be identical and interchangeable. The printers furnished shall be assigned to provide one of the following disciplines specified below to meet the requirements of the specification:-


Dedicated to the recording of alarm traffic only OR Dedicated to System Reports OR For both alarm recording and output of system reports

The Central Operator Station Software (OS) shall be a flexible, user friendly, user programmable package that will allow the operator to construct customized graphic display screens and programs for achieving optimum monitoring, controls and information management and analysis.

The OS shall include as a minimum the Operating System, Communications Control, Graphic Operator Interface (OI), Trend and History Files, Report Generator, Support Utilities, Scheduler and Time and Event Support Programs.

The IBMS system shall be based around the Microsoft NT 32 bit multi-tasking environment. The IBMS system shall be a true 32 bit application to take advantage of Microsoft NT’s enabling technologies. Any 16 bit system running on the Microsoft NT platform (such as those originally based on MS-DOS and Microsoft Windows 3.x) shall not be acceptable.

The OS shall be a real time operating system and provide true multitasking providing concurrent execution of multiple real time programs and custom program development.

The Software shall be totally user-programmable to allow an operator without any software programming skills to construct programs for control , monitoring and information analysis.

All program configuration will be done in clear English language.

The Software shall allow the user to modify and tailor the Operator Interface software to the specific and unique requirements of the equipment installed, the programs implemented, and to staffing and operational practices.

Online modification of system configuration, program parameters, and data base shall be provided via menu selection and keyboard entry of data into preformatted self-prompting templates.

4.2 Monitoring a) The IBMS system shall support acquisition & monitoring of controller data using one

of the following techniques: • Periodic Scanning • Report by Exception b) The system shall support a minimum of 9 scan intervals, ranging from less than 1

second to 900 seconds


c) In order to minimise communications traffic, the system shall automatically block data requests using contiguous addresses and the scan interval to generate scan packets, optimizing throughput for a given scanning load. The system shall also provide utilities to examine scan packet allocation for each scan interval, and compile aggregate statistics on communication channel usage.

d) Where supported by the controlling device, Report by Exception (RBE) protocols shall

be used to reduce the scanning load of the system while improving system response. If necessary, periodic scanning may be used in conjunction with RBE to ensure data integrity.

4.3 System Database General

The IBMS software shall provide & maintain a truly real-time database incorporating real time controller data from analogue, logical or pulse inputs. The database shall be comprise of data from all the connected subsystems viz. The DDC subsystems, the Fire Signaling Panel subsystem as well as 3rd party PLC devices connected to the IBMS through standard interfaces

The database shall be configurable by the end user without the need for any programming and shall be able to be modified on-line without interrupting operation of the system. In addition to point based information, the database shall also provide historization capabilities for analogue, digital, pulse and event based information.

This database information shall be accessible by all facilities of the system such as custom displays, reports, trends, user written applications, etc.

4.4 Configuration a) All configuration of the database shall be possible while the system is on-line by users

with sufficient security access. Configuration shall not require the need for any programming, compiling or linking and shall not require shutting down or restarting of the system. In addition, historical data collection shall not be interrupted for points not affected by configuration changes.

Systems that require the station to go off line during configuration shall not be accepted.

b) A configuration utility shall be provided with the IBMS system that shall allow

configuration of all point records, printers, controller panels, and operator station connections. This utility shall be in the form of a relational database and operate in a true 32 bit environment such as Windows NT or Windows 95. The utility shall also have the ability to export information to and import information from generic Microsoft applications such as Microsoft Excel.

c) The utility shall have the ability to configure database changes and download them

either on the IBMS station directly or remotely via the network. The remote download is to provide password protection.


d) All documentation for the configuration utility shall be provided on-line. The help

facility shall operate using standard Microsoft features such as context sensitive help using the F1 function key.

e) The utility shall provide features which reduce configuration time of the IBMS system.

These features shall include adding multiple points, controllers etc. at once. The utility shall automatically increment names or numbers of any information that is required to be unique by the IBMS system (such as point names). The user shall be able to select multiple items (such as points) and then edit fields that are common to all selected items to assist in global changes. Standard copy and paste facilities are to be provided by the utility.

f) The utility shall also support free format text fields, which the user can use for

additional information such as cabinet or wire numbers. These additional fields shall be simple extensions to existing items in the database such as controller points.

g) A filtering mechanism shall be provided with the utility so that only relevant

information shall be viewed by the user. The filter shall provide standard choices for the user to select, and also provide user defined filtering.

h) Database management reports shall be provided by the utility as standard. The utility

shall also provide support for ad-hoc reporting facilities for engineering use. 4.5 Database Structure a) The real-time database shall support collection of data and storage using the following

structures: • Analog Point Structures • Status Point Structures • Accumulator Point Structures • Historical Data Structures • Event Data Structures • User Defined Structures b) Each of the Point database structures shall be comprised as a composite point with a

number of associated parameters which may be referenced relative to a single tag name. Specifically, each of these parameters shall be accessible by various sub-systems such as the Graphical Operator Interface, Report Generation system and Application Program Interface in a simple POINT.PARAMETER format without the need to know any internal storage mechanism.

c) The system shall maintain portions of the database requiring frequent high-speed access

as memory resident information and other less frequently accessed data as disk resident data. Memory resident data shall be checkpoint to disk every minute to minimise loss of data in the event of loss of power or other system failure.


d) Database backup shall be possible with the system on-line including backup of historical based data. The backup shall be possible via standard Microsoft Windows NT operating system utilities.

4.6 Analog Point database

Analog data shall be stored in a composite point database structure that provides the following parameters:

Point Name Point Description Process Variable (PV) Setpoint (SP) Output (OP) Mode (MD) Up to 4 user definable inputs Scan Status Scan Period Scan Address Alarm Permit FlagAlarm Status Alarm Status Associated Display 0% & 100% Range Operator Control Level PV Clamp Flag Engineering Units Alarm Deadband Drift Deadband Control Deadband Control Time out Normal Mode Up to 4 Alarm types SP High Limit SP Low Limit OP High Limit OP Low Limit

4.7 Status Point database

Status (digital) information shall be stored in a Status Point type in the database. The status point shall be capable of processing from a single to a three-bit digital input, allowing up to eight possible states. The Status Point shall be a composite point including the following parameters:

Point Name Point Description Process Variable Output Mode Scan Status Scan Period Scan Address Alarm Permit FlagAlarm Priority Re-Alarm Status Associated Display Input Width Operator Control Level Output Width Output Pulse Width Control Failure Alarm Priority Control Time out Normal Mode

4.8 Accumulator Point database

Data associated with pulsed inputs shall be stored in the system in an accumulator point type that shall provide automatic tracking of instrument rollover. The accumulator point data shall be stored in a composite point database structure that provides the following parameters:


Point Name Point Description Process Variable Rollover Value Raw Counts Scale Value Meter Factor Scan Status Scan Period Scan Address Alarm Permit FlagAlarm Status 0% & 100% Range Associated Display Operator Control Level Engineering Units Up to 4 Alarm types

4.9 Historical database a) Historization of point data shall be configurable as part of the point definition.

Historization shall be provided for both snapshots and averages with intervals ranging from 5 seconds to 24 hours.

b) Once assigned to history, point data shall be available by POINT.PARAMETER access

used in conjunction with a history offset to locate the particular value of interest. The graphical operator interface, trend, report generation and application interfaces shall be able to access historical data.

c) Modifications to the history collection of a point shall be possible on-line without the

loss of previously collected data for the point being changed or any other points in the system currently being historized.

4.10 Event database a) The system shall maintain a journal containing the following event information: • Alarms • Alarm Acknowledgments • Return to Normal • Operator Control Actions • Operator Login & Security Level Changes • On-line database Modifications • Communications Alarms • System Restart Messages b) Standard Displays shall be provided to show the current journal file with the most

recent event at the top of the display. Subsequent page forward actions shall allow display of progressively older events. Sorting and filtering of the journal shall be possible via a standard report, which shall be configurable by filling-in-the-blanks. Coding or scripting of any kind shall not be required.

c) The Event database entries shall contain the following minimum information: • Time & Date Stamp • Point Name


• Event Type • Alarm Priority • Point Description • New PV • Engineering Units d) The Event database must also be accessible from other sub-systems such as the

Operator Interface, Report Generation and Application Programmers Interface. e) It shall be possible to have an on-line event file as large as the disk capacity can

accommodate. For example, given the appropriate disk space it shall be capable of storing up to 1,000,000 (one million) events on-line.

f) The event file shall store events in a current online buffer. When the buffer is full an

alarm shall be raised advising the operator to save the file to an external media. The current online buffer contents shall then be transferred to an archive buffer to await archiving to an external media. The current online buffer shall, without interruption, continue to store current events.

g) Another file area shall be available to hold archived event files ready for playback.

These are event files previously archived to external media. Operators shall be able to restore previously archived files via the operator interface and a dedicated display.

h) The events file system shall be fully integrated with the standard reporting system. The

system shall automatically reference the restored playback file if a Report is requested containing a time search window covered by the current playback file.

i) The operator shall be able to restore previously archived files and review or print them

from the Operator Stations. 4.11 User Definable database a) In order to support other types of data such as user entered data or calculated data from

other application programs, the system shall also provide a User Definable database area that can be fully integrated into the system. Data contained in this database must be accessible by:

• Custom Graphics • Custom Reports • Application Programs • Network Applications using a Network Application Program Interface(API) b) The above database shall be seamlessly integrated to the IBMS system to provide for

true integration and interfacing of other 3rd party systems / software’s (such as the Hotel Management Software) to integrate to the IBMS system.

Systems that require protocols / source code to be written at the system level to achieve this integration shall not be acceptable.

c) By means of this database, the IBMS system should be able to seamlessly read &

monitor continuously the data created or provided by the 3rd party software & then be


able to use this data to carry out controls and logic in the real-time devices /controllers connected to the IBMS systems

4.12 IBMS Station Operator Interface 4.12.1 General a) The operator interface software provided by the system shall allow for efficient

communication of operational data and abnormal conditions. It shall provide a consistent framework for viewing of information for all connected controller subsystems at the first tier of the system.

b) The operator interface shall be graphic based and shall be totally customized as per end user requirements. Systems with only standard displays shall not be accepted. It should be possible to view real time dynamic data from any and all of the subsystems ( fire monitoring as well as DDC ) in any graphic page. (for example : it shall be possible to view on the same graphic the temperature of a area, the status of the fire detector in an area or and any other real time controller data from any connected controller).

c) Critical areas (such as alarm icons) shall be visible at all times. A predefined area on the

screen shall provide operator messaging, and this area shall also be visible at all times. d) A set of standard displays for configuration, and navigation around the IBMS system

are to be provided. These are to be independent of any custom (process specific) display.

e) The operator interface software shall be capable of running on Windows NT, and

Windows XP environments. The operator interface shall appear similar in all environments.

f) The operator interface shall be interactive and totally graphics and/or icon based.

Graphics shall be capable of supporting up to 65K colours at a minimum 1024 x 768 pixel resolution.

g) The operator interface shall be windows based and shall employ standard Windowing

conventions so as to reduce required Operator training. In particular, standard tool bar icons and drop-down menus shall be available on all standard and custom displays to allow easy access to common functions. Similarly, such functions shall also be available via a standard set of Function-Key based pushbuttons without requiring configuration.

h) The operator interface shall support the ability to “full screen lock” the window so that

users can not access other applications. If “full screen lock” is not enabled, support for copy and paste facilities shall be provided between the operator window and other Microsoft applications.

i) Support for customized Win HELP files shall be provided for use as operator

instructions. It should be possible to create customized help instructions for the operator. Systems should not be limited to the standard system help menu provided.


j) User-configured displays shall be constructed using the integrated display building functions available through the Operator Station. It shall be possible to build/modify/change/enhance the graphic operator displays on any station without having to go off-line.

4.12.2 Operator Interface LAN Connection a) The operator interface shall be flexible in its connection to the IBMS station. Both

serial and LAN connection shall be possible. The operator interface shall provide standard dial-up modem support. Using other packages such as Microsoft Terminal to make the modem connection shall not be acceptable.

b) The operator interface LAN connection shall also be flexible to support both permanent

and casual access to the IBMS core station. Those users with casual access shall automatically disconnect from the IBMS server after an idle time-out period.

c) The operator interface shall support connection over poor quality, low bandwidth

channels. This support shall include radio links, microwave and VSAT communications.

d) To minimise bandwidth on both serial and LAN links, it shall be possible for the

operator interface to only require updated dynamic information from the IBMS server. All static information shall be stored locally.

For systems where static data ( such as point descriptors, displays, alarm messages, engineering units, graphics, etc.) is also transmitted on the network, vendors shall need to prove bandwidth requirement and confirm/show evidence for acceptable performance over the network under loaded conditions.

4.12.3 Operator Interface Characteristics 4.12.3.1 General a) The system shall provide a windowed operator interface with the following minimum

capabilities as standard. No custom programming or scripting shall be necessary to produce these:

• Window re-size, Zoom in, Zoom out • Dedicated push buttons and Pull Down Menus to perform the following: - Associated Display - Alarm Summary - Alarm Acknowledgment - Display Sequence Forward/Backward - Previous Display Recall (minimum of 8 displays) - Graphic Call-up - Trend Call-up - Group Call-up - In Service/Out of Service command - Point Detail • Alarm Zone showing highest priority, most recent (or oldest) unacknowledged alarm


• System Date and Time Zone • Current security Level • Station number • Alarm Annunciation • Communications Fail Annunciation • Operator Message Zone 4.12.3.2 Pointing and Input Devices a) The operator interface shall be capable of being mouse driven and simultaneously

support keyboard data input. Both fixed menus and configurable function keys shall be supported to aid novice and experienced operator respectively. The interface shall also be capable of supporting a touch-screen for pointing and command input.

b) The operator interface shall use a Tool Bar for common operator commands. The

operator shall be able to request display of commonly used displays and activate system functions via Drop-Down menus

c) All operator interface input shall be possible using only the pointing device and

QWERTY section of the keyboard. 4.12.3.3 Operator Functions The following functions shall be performed through the operator interface: • Display and control of field equipment • Acknowledge alarms on a priority basis • Initiate printing of reports • Archive and retrieve event logs • Change own password • On-line generation of database and colour graphic displays. • Monitoring of data communications channels • Configure system parameters 4.12.3.4 Multi-mode Window Sessions a) The core computer display unit shall also be capable of supporting multiple concurrent

sessions. Each session shall allow an operator to choose between the following different modes of operation:

Master Operator Station Mode: Normal operator access to the system

Engineering and Maintenance Mode: System configuration or application programming

Graphics builder Mode: Display construction using the Graphics Display Building package

b) It shall be possible for all modes to appear as separate Windows running simultaneously on one screen.


c) It must be possible to limit access to all modes via password protection. 4.13 Operator Security and Sign-On/Sign-Off 4.13.1 Security Levels a) The IBMS system shall provide up to six levels of security providing varying degrees of

access to system operation and configuration. The functions allowed from each security level shall be as follows:

Level 1: Signed Off mode - View start-up display only. Level 2: View only with Acknowledge - Permit all Level 1 functions and in addition the operator

shall be able to view displays. Typically used for an inexperienced operator. Level 3: Permit all Level 1 and 2 functions and in addition the building operator shall be

permitted to control points such as start/stop, disable/enable, etc. and acknowledge alarms as they occur.

Level 4: Permit all Level 1 through Level 3 functions in addition to accessing master time

schedules, system peripherals allocation, change point engineering parameters, build reports and use most standard system configuration displays. This level shall typically be reserved for the building engineer.

Level 5: Permit all Level 1 through Level 4 functions in addition to accessing the engineering

functions such as building and linking displays, allocating keyboard push button assignments, etc. Reserved for the building supervisor.

Level 6: This is the highest level of station security and shall allow the user unlimited access to

all station functions. Typically reserved for the building manager. b) If necessary, each operator may be assigned a user profile that defines the following: • Security Level (1-6) • Control Level (1-255) • Operator Identifier • Unique Password c) Any actions initiated by the operator shall be logged in the Event database by operator

identifier. In addition, any control actions to a given point shall only be allowed if the control level configured in the operator's profile exceeds the level assigned to the controlled point.

d) Utilities shall be provided to allow administration of the operator passwords. 4.13.2 Sign-On/Sign-Off a) The operator shall be permitted to sign on to the system if the correct Operator Identity

(up to 4 characters) and the Operator Password (up to 6 characters) have been entered. This password shall be encrypted.


b) After a series of three (3) unsuccessful attempts to sign-on the operator station interface

shall be locked for a configurable period of time. The lockout period shall be set via system configuration displays. During operator station lockout the other Windows functions of the computer running the operator station software shall not be affected.

c) It shall be possible to assign operators either single or multi-user passwords. Single user

passwords enable the operator to sign-on to only a single operator station thus preventing simultaneous sign-on by the same operator. The multi-user password would typically be used by operators with the highest sign-on security level who may require simultaneous access to more than one operator station.

d) Each operator shall be assigned a password and a set of authorised areas. e) The operator may sign-off at any time by issuing a sign-off command. f) A keyboard time-out feature shall be provided such that the operator shall be

automatically signed off after a defined period of keyboard inactivity. It shall optionally be possible to configure automatic calliope of a "logged-out" display when this occurs to hide restricted information for example.

4.1.3.3 Area Assignment a) Each operator shall be assigned one or more specific areas of the building with the

appropriate monitoring and control responsibility. An area shall be defined in this context as a logical entity comprising of a set of points in the system. This in turn may represent a physical space in the building.

b) It shall be possible to define individual tenant access by means of area assignment. c) An operator can only view or control those points within the assigned areas. 4.13.4 Password Authentication a) Each password shall be an alphanumeric character string programmable up to a

maximum of six (6) characters in length. The system shall not accept a password of less than five (5) characters in length nor shall the system force an operator to enter a password of more than five (5) characters in length.

b) The system shall provide a facility to allow all operators to change their own passwords

at any time. c) When a password is changed, the system shall not permit the new password to be the

same as any of the last ten (10) passwords used in the past three (3) months. This shall be configurable with the appropriate level of security. All passwords stored in the system shall be encrypted.

4.13.5 Time Schedules a) A minimum of one thousand (1000) time schedules shall be provided by the system.


b) The time schedule facility shall allow the scheduling of Point control on both a periodic

and one-off Basis by the IBMS. The time schedule facility shall execute every 60 seconds and it shall be possible to schedule Point controls on minute boundaries.

c) All time schedules shall be configurable via the Operator Station. d) Each time schedule entry shall consist of: • Date • Time • Point name • Point parameter • Target value • Type of scheduling e) The available time schedule type shall as a minimum be: • One shot - to be executed only once then deleted • Daily - to be executed every day • Workday - to be executed Monday to Friday • Weekend - to be executed on Saturday and Sunday • Holiday - to be executed on holidays • Individual days - to be executed on individual days (e.g. Monday) f) Where the controller/device supports an internal time schedule program, the IBMS shall

be able to upload, display, modify and download the control device time schedules. Support for the control device time schedules shall be in addition to the IBMS time schedules.

g) The system shall be capable of defining up to thirty (30) days of holidays upto one year

in advance. The holidays so defined shall be taken into account by other system functions such as the time schedules, etc.

4.13.6 Standard System Displays a) The following displays shall be included as part of the system: • Alarm Summary Display • Event Summary Display • Point Detail Template Displays (for each point in the database) • Trend Set Template Displays • Group Control and Group Trend Template Displays • Communications Status Displays • System Status Displays • Operator Scratch-pad Display b) In the case of the Trend and Group displays, configuration of these displays shall only

require entry of a point name to completely configure the display. The Alarm Summary, Event Summary, Point Detail, Communications Status, System Status shall not require any configuration.


c) Systems where standard graphical displays, showing all parameters for each system Point, do not exist, shall not be acceptable.

4.13.7 Status Displays a) System status displays shall be available on the main Operator Station. They shall

display the following information: • Points in alarm condition pending ACKNOWLEDGE command • Points remain in alarm state but have been acknowledged • Communication failures • Printers off-line • Operator Stations off-line 4.13.8 Administration Displays

The system shall provide the following full screen displays: • Master system menu • Report summary • Alarm summary • Event summary • Display summary • System parameters configuration • Operator Station configuration • Area assignment • Time period assignment • Holiday assignment • History assignment • Push-button assignment • Operator definition • Operator message board • Events archive and retrieval • Time Period summary and configuration • Point Detail for every configured Point 4.13.9 Custom Displays a) The system shall allow configuration of custom displays via a Graphic Display Building

editor. b) The Graphic Display Building editor shall be capable of operating in a window of the

operator interface on both the IBMS station and connected operator stations. It shall allow one step on-line building of display static and dynamic objects. It shall be a WYSIWYG editor (what you see is what you get) allowing the displays drawn using the editor to appear exactly the same when viewed from an operator station. The saved display shall automatically be available for use on the system if it created on any LAN connected operator station.


c) Static objects created using the Graphic Display Building Editor usually shall not have associated dynamic objects. Static objects shall include static text, rectangles, arcs and circles. However, it shall be possible to animate static objects to give the dynamic characteristics. For example, a tank could be drawn and then animated so that it is level filled based on a point's value.

d) Dynamic objects shall be linked to the IBMS systems database. They shall allow

information to be displayed from the database or to allow an operator to interact with them in order to make changes in the database and to perform control actions. Dynamic objects shall include dynamic text, push buttons, indicators, charts, check boxes, combo boxes and scroll bars.

e) It shall be possible to animate objects on the screen by linking the object to the real-

time point data/ value. The dynamic animation would include colour changes, moving of objects, re-sizing of objects, pop-up boxes, etc. ( For examples: a room location changing colours based on temperature in the room, level in a tank gradually rising or falling based on actual level in tank, etc.)

f) It shall be possible to include static and dynamic display objects on the one display. The

editor shall allow display objects to be manipulated by pointing, clicking and dragging. The editor shall allow display objects to be drawn, re-sized, copied, grouped, aligned and layered over each other. It shall be possible to copy and paste objects within and between displays.

g) The Graphic Display Building Editor shall support the following features: • one step display building • point and click operation • clipboard • world co-ordinate object placement • ruler and grid • tool, colour and line palettes • dialogue boxes for definition of object details • shape and page building • on-line help • import graphics from third party packages in the form of Windows Metafiles and

Bitmaps • standard shape library • three dimensional effects including raised, lowered, ridge and grove line styles

4.13.10 Animation & Display Scripting a) It shall also be possible to further animate display elements using Visual Basic Scripts.

By attaching Visual Basic script programs to individual elements on the display, it shall be possible to perform a variety of animations, which include but are not limited to: move objects resize objects re-colour objects pop up text messages and dialog boxes etc.


b) Scripts may be activated on displays using the following events:

On mouse click On mouse enter On mouse move On page calliope On a timer On the change of value of a point on the display

c) A script editor shall be provided which allows scripts to be created and modified. This

script editor shall be incorporated as part of the Graphic Display Building Editor. Systems which rely only on the use of standard available animation objects/symbols to create animation shall not be accepted.

4.13.11 Live Video a) To achieve true integration of various functional sub-systems, both the Graphic Display

Building Editor and the Operator Interface shall have built in support for the creation and display of live video objects without the need for programming.

b) The Microsoft Multimedia Control Interface (MCI) standard shall be used to facilitate

support for a video overlay card (such as Movie Machine II or equivalent). c) The video overlay card shall enable live video to be fully integrated into custom

schematics enabling real-time video to embed on the same screen alongside custom graphic displays. The size and position of the video object shall be configured on a per display basis.

d) Systems supporting the live video object as either a separate window to the display, or

on a separate monitor screen shall not be acceptable. 4.13.12 Scripting

a) To enable the user to create truly customised visual effects and animation on the screen,

it shall be possible to use an industry standard scripting language (such as VBScript) to provide graphical displays with objects and controls in addition to the standard objects available as in section 5.3. The scripts are to be imbedded in the displays using the Graphic Display Building Editor.

b) A proprietary scripting language or additional programming and drawing packages shall

not be acceptable.

4.13.13 ActiveX technology a) To facilitate interaction between different software components & to incorporate

Internet technology, the IBMS system shall have capability to support Microsoft ActiveX technology in the operator stations.


b) To ensure that users and operators have controlled access to Internet and Intranet network resources, as a minimum, the following features shall be incorporated :

i) Web Browsing - IBMS Station shall act as an Internet browser allowing HTML

(Hyper text Markup Language)pages to be viewed through normal Station displays.

ii) Active Document Support - the ability to embed Active Documents such as Microsoft Word documents into IBMS Displays for example: being able to access the company Intranet directly through an IBMS display, adding confirmations and control buttons to certain control actions on a display, incorporating the company phone list directly into a display, embedding company memos / notes , etc into a display, etc.

Using these tools the user shall be provided with –on a single window- information which includes live data from the building processes, active alarm information, access to external documents and also live vide0 – all on the same page./screen.

4.13.14 Web Browser a) The IBMS Graphic Display Builder Editor shall have the ability to imbed Internet web

browser objects into custom displays. b) This shall allow information from the organisations intranets, the internet or ActiveX

documents to appear in the operator interface along with other building data. c) It must be possible to restrict access to the World Wide Web, therefore launching an

external browser application shall not be acceptable. It shall also be possible to restrict access to a set of web sites ensuring that navigation is also controlled.

4.13.15 Launching External Applications a) To provide for operations flexibility & streamlining, it shall be possible to launch

applications (such as Microsoft Word, Excel, custom help files or any third party applications) from the IBMS display screen itself.

b) The application shall be launched from a push button on a custom display, but shall

open a file within the launched application. c) It shall also be possible launch applications from the operator station pull down menus.

4.13.16 Operator Station Email

a) The IBMS shall incorporate an integrated electronic mail facility that shall allow

operators across the network to send messages to each other. b) The facility shall provide all standard email functions : Send, receive, Forward, delete,

reply.


c) The email system may operate between the IBMS operators or it shall also be able to

integrate to the company’s email system so that messages can be sent to other people (outside world) as well

4.14 Alarm Management

The IBMS system shall support comprehensive alarm detection and management facilities to allow fast and accurate notification to the operator of abnormal conditions within the connected equipment and processes.

4.14.1 Alarm Types a) The system shall support the following alarm types: • Process value (PV) HI • PV LOW • PV HI HI • PV LOW LOW • Deviation Hi • Deviation Low • Rate of Change of process parameter • System Alarms • Unreasonable Data • Transmitter Fail b) Any four of these alarms shall be assignable to each Analog or Accumulator point on an

individual point Basis as part of the point configuration process. 4.14.2 Alarm Priorities a) The system shall support at least four alarm priorities as follows: • Urgent • High • Low • Journal b) For each alarm priority, there shall be the ability to assign up to 99 sub-priorities. Each

alarm type assigned to a point shall be individually assigned into one of the above categories.

c) Urgent, High and Low priority alarms shall be displayed in the system Alarm

Summary. Journal Priority alarms shall only be logged to the system alarm printer and written to the Event database.

d) The audible alarm shall be configurable for each of the above alarm priorities. It shall

be possible to assign to each alarm type a different type of annunciation on the operator station


e) The operator station shall be able to use multimedia technologies (such as .wav files and sound cards) to provide realistic alarm annunciation. In the event that subsequent alarms are received, the audible alarm shall once again be activated. The system shall also provide for re-activation of the audible alarm if the operator neglects to acknowledge the alarm after a configurable time period. Systems that give similar annunciation’s irrespective of alarm type and priority shall not be accepted.

4.14.3 Alarm Processing a) Assigning an alarm to the point shall automatically cause the system to perform the

following actions when an alarm occurs: • The alarm shall be time stamped to the nearest second and logged in the Event database

with the Point Name, Alarm type, Alarm Priority, Point Description, New value and Engineering Units

• The PV of the alarm shall turn red and flash on any standard or custom display, which uses the point on the graphic

• An Unacknowledged alarm entry shall be made in the system alarm summary for Low, High and Urgent Alarms

• The audible alarm shall sound (if configured) • The alarm annunciation indicator shall flash b) In addition, the alarm zone of the Operator Interface must show the most recent (or

optionally oldest), highest priority, unacknowledged alarm in the system. 4.14.4 Alarm Acknowledgment a) The system shall provide for efficient alarm acknowledgment in a number of ways as

follows: • Selection of any POINT.PARAMETER from a custom graphic and pressing the

dedicated acknowledge push-button • Selection of the alarm in the system alarm zone and pressing the dedicated

acknowledge button • Selection of the alarm in the alarm summary display and pressing the dedicated

acknowledge button • By performing a page acknowledge from the alarm summary display b) On acknowledgment by the operator, the flashing indicator shall turn steady, and the

PV shall remain red on any system or custom graphic. The acknowledgement shall also be logged in the Event database identifying the operator or station that acknowledged the alarm. Shall the point go out of alarm before being acknowledged by the operator, the alarm shall be shown by an inverse video indication and remain in the list until specifically acknowledged by the operator.

c) It must be possible for a controller connected to the server to confirm that an operator

has acknowledged a critical alarm condition before proceeding. 4.14.5 Alarm Annunciation a) Alarms shall be annunciated by:


• Alarm message appearing on dedicated alarm line on operator interface. • Alarm message appearing on alarm summary display. • Audible Tone (either using the PC Speaker or a sound card) • Alarm message printed on the alarm printer b) Alarm annunciation shall take advantage of multimedia technology by providing

realistic alarm sounds (via .wav files). c) Alarms shall be annunciated at the station even if there is no operator currently signed-

on. This feature shall be available on network connected operator stations as long as the computer running the operator station software remains logically connected to the network.

d) Points shall be annunciated whilst in alarm. If a point is set to alarm inhibited the point

shall no longer cause annunciation. If a point goes into an alarm state whilst inhibited and then is still in the alarm state when the point is set to alarm enabled, the point shall immediately cause annunciation.

4.14.6 Dedicated Alarm Line a) A dedicated alarm line shall appear on all displays/screens showing either the most

recent or oldest (configurable), highest priority, unacknowledged alarm in the system. The line shall be clear when there are no unacknowledged alarms for the operator to process. This line shall always be visible irrespective of the display that the operator is working on

b) On occurrence of an alarm, the graphic display shall output the point identification,

point type, and description on a dedicated line. If multiple alarm/change of state conditions occur subsequent messages shall overwrite the display if they are higher priority. As subsequent alarms are displayed, the previous alarm information shall move to an unacknowledged alarm list awaiting acknowledgment by the operator.

4.14.7 Alarm Logging

All alarms (when such configured) shall be logged on the respective printer/s. All Alarms shall also be logged on an event file for future retrieval in alarm reports or archiving to removable media.

4.14.8 Alarm Response Function Keys a) For ease of operations, the following dedicated function keys and equivalent toolbar

icons shall be provided as standard on the keyboard for alarm action: ACKNOWLEDGE - After moving the cursor to the point in alarm on the screen and

selecting the Point the operator shall be able to acknowledge an alarm by pressing this key. This action shall be logged in the event file and on the printer showing the operator ID with the message.


ALARM SUMMARY - By pressing this key at any time the operator shall be able to view a display showing all currently active alarms. The alarm messages shall be colour coded showing priorities. The operator shall be able to view the alarms according to priority. It shall be possible to acknowledge alarms from this display and also go to the associated display defined for the Point.

ASSOCIATED DISPLAY - After moving the cursor to the point in alarm on the screen

and selecting the Point the operator shall be able to bring up the display applicable to that alarm by pressing this key.

4.14.9 Alarm Filtering a) For providing operator flexibility during viewing of alarms, the Alarm Summary screen

shall be able to filter the alarms displayed to the operator. The filtering criteria shall include as a minimum:

Individual Priorities (i.e. Urgent, High, Low) Ranked Priorities (i.e. Urgent only, Urgent & High only, Urgent, High & Low) Unacknowledged Alarms only Individual Areas only This shall allow the operator to select the above filters to enable him to choose and view

the alarms as desired. 4.14.10 Additional Alarm Information

The IBMS system shall provide support for an additional custom message to be tagged to the alarm. This message shall provide the operator with additional information on the alarm but shall not clutter the alarm summary. It shall appear in a separate message summary at the same time as the alarm appears in the alarm summary. The messages can be pre-configured and then simply attached to individual points by means of a message ID.

4.14.11 Advanced Alarm Management features a) To ensure reliable alarm handling & management by operators, the system shall be

capable of applying to the functional subsystems advanced alarm management which includes set stages of alarm handling.

b) The stages shall be: -

Silence alarm condition acknowledge and action alarm condition respond to alarm condition by using pre-defined responses

optionally reset alarm c) All actions shall be recorded in the event file for retrieval and auditing purposes. d) When an alarm is silenced, an instruction page for the alarm will be displayed. The alarm

may then be acknowledged from this page and actioned.


e) Once the alarm is acknowledged and appropriate action has been taken, the operator

may move to the response page to select from up to 100 user defined responses to be logged in the event file. At the same time the alarm is removed from the alarm file.

f) It shall be possible to enable/disable this feature on a point by point basis given the

appropriate system privilege level. 4.15 Trending

The system shall provide flexible trending allowing real-time, historical or archived data to be trended in a variety of formats. In addition, trend data types shall be able to be combined to allow for comparisons between data e.g. current real-time data versus archived data.

4.15.1 Trend Capabilities a) The system shall provide trending capability with the following functions: • Real time trending • Historical trending • Archived History trending • Trend Scrolling • Trend Zoom • Engineering Unit or Percent • Cursor readout of trend data • Trend comparisons between archived, real-time and historical data (for example,

this year vs. last year). Comparisons between the same point offset in time, or different points must be possible.

• Trend decluttering via per-pen enable/disable on multi-plot style trends • Independent Y-axis per point on multi-plot style trends. It must be possible to

display the Y-axis for any point on the trend by simply selecting the point using the mouse or keyboard

• copying the currently displayed trend data to the clipboard for pasting into spreadsheet or document

Configuration of trends shall only require the entry of the Point Name into the desired

trend template to produce the trend. All trend configuration must be possible on-line without interruption to the system.

Historization of data shall not be affected by changes to trend configuration. 4.15.2 Trend Types a) The system shall be able to present real-time, historical or archived data in a variety of

formats as defined below: • Single Bar Trend Showing plotted historical values for one point • Dual Bar Trend Showing plotted historical values for up to 2 points • Triple Bar Trend Showing plotted historical values for up to 3 points • Multi-Plot Trend Showing plotted historical values for up to 8 points

• Multi-Range Trend Showing plotted re-rangable historical values


or up to 8 points • Numeric Trend Showing numeric historical values for up to 8 points • X-Y-Plot Trend Showing a graphical comparison between 2 points b) For each trend set display it shall be possible for operators to configure the number of

historical samples and ranges displayed. Points configured in trend sets shall be changeable on-line.

c) Operators shall be able to zoom in on information displayed on trend sets for closer

inspection. Scroll bars shall be available to move the Trend set backwards and forwards across the historical records. The trend sets shall automatically access archived history files without operator configuration.

4.15.3 Loop Tuning Trends Dedicated control loop tuning trends shall be available on the system. Access to these

trends shall be via the detail information display for each point. This loop tuning display shall be generated automatically with no configuration required.

4.15.4 Trends on Custom Displays a) It shall be possible to imbed trend objects as part of custom graphic displays. b) This shall allow for real-time displays of the trends as well as graphic / text objects on

the same screen without having to switch between screens/windows. c) The following formats shall be available: • Bar Trend • Line Trend • Numeric Trend • Tuning Trend • Pie Trend • X-Y Plot 4.16 Reporting

The system shall support a flexible reporting package to allow easy generation of report data. The reports provided shall include pre-configured standard reports for common requirements such as Alarm Event reports and custom report generation facilities that can be configured and modified by the user. Systems that provide only standard pre-configured reports and do not allow for custom report generation by users shall not be accepted.

4.16.1 Standard Reports a) The following pre-formatted reports shall be available on the system: • Alarm/Event Report • Operator Trail/Tracking Report • Point Trail/Tracking Report


• Alarm Duration Report • Point Attribute Report • Database Cross-Reference Report b) Configuration of these reports shall only require entry of the schedule information, and

other parameters such as Point Name or wildcard, Filter information, time interval for search and destination printer to fully configure the report. Specifically, no programming or software coding shall be required.

4.16.2 Alarm/Event Report

A report shall be provided to produce a summary of all events of a specified type occurring in a specified period.

4.16.3 Operator Trail Report

A report shall be provided to produce a summary of all operator actions relating to a specific operator in a specified period.

4.16.4 Point Trail Report

A report shall be provided to produce a summary of all events of a specified type occurring in a period on nominated points.

4.16.5 Point Cross Reference Report

A report shall provide to list the following information for a nominated point, or for each point in a set of points:

• A list of display numbers which reference the point. • A list of the algorithm numbers and corresponding algorithm blocks which reference

the point. • A list of the other reports in which the point is referenced.

4.16.6 Point Attribute Report

A report shall be provided to points selected by one of the following attribute criteria: • Out-of-service • Alarm suppressed • Abnormal input levels • In Manual mode

4.16.7 Free Format Reports


a) In addition, configurable report generation facilities must be provided to allow custom

reports to be produced. They shall be able to be configured at any time with the system ON LINE. Systems that require source code programming and /or require the system to be off line for producing custom reports are not acceptable.

b) These reports shall be able to access any data base values and have the facility for

carrying out inter-point calculations in order to produce averages, summations, efficiencies or any other derived values. Results of these calculations shall be stored in the database or in files. The report layout shall be also user defined and shall be up to 132 columns wide and of unrestricted length.

c) The report generator shall have the following capabilities: • Access to all real-time and historical databases • Access to user entered data • Arithmetic calculation capability • Statistical Calculation capability • User definable Report Format 4.16.8 Report Activation

Reports shall be activated in one or more of the following ways: • Periodic activation at user specified intervals • Operator Demanded • Event Initiated • Application Initiated 4.17 Data Exchange 4.17.1 Interfacing to Another System a) The IBMS system shall have the capability to interface to the point database of other

softwares in the building (i.e. nodes) on a TCP/IP network. This shall enable both the acquiring of point data and issuing control outputs to the other MIS / office automation systems.

b) The IBMS system shall also have the capability for ‘data hand off’. This shall allow

other similar systems /software in the building to have access to the IBMS real-time dynamic data (for example: point values, access/security data, alarms, etc.) .

4.17.2 Data Exchange with a Relational Database using ODBC a) The IBMS system shall provide an in-built standard Open database connectivity

(ODBC) driver to allow the users to choose their own reporting tools. The system must be able to write data to and read data from any of the following standard database packages

Oracle Access


Microsoft SQL using standard SQL queries. b) It shall be possible to transfer data either periodically (i.e. scheduled), when an event

occurs or on demand by the operator. c) Through the ODBC driver tool , it shall be possible for the user to also build his own

reports and combine data from the IBMS system with data from other MIS systems into a single report.

d) The ODBC driver shall be accessible to the stations across the connected network. 4.17.3 Data Exchange with Microsoft Excel

The system must be capable of exporting bulk data from the IBMS database to Microsoft Excel.

As a minimum the following shall be supported: • allow retrieval of data either periodically or snapshot • allow retrieval of data via POINT.PARAMETER requests • allow retrieval of tag-names, descriptions etc. • allow retrieval historical data • writing of values from Excel back to the supervisory system 4.18 Algorithms a) In addition to standard point processing functions, the IBMS system shall also allow

additional processing through the use of standard algorithms that may be attached to any analogue, status or accumulator point.

b) Typical functions to be provided by these algorithms are listed below: • Arithmetic Calculation • Boolean Calculation • Maximum/Minimum Value • Integration • Run Hours Totalisation • Group Alarm Inhibit • Report Request • Application Program Request 4.19 Historical Data Archiving a) The system shall support archiving of historical data to allow a continuous record of

history to be built up over a period of time. Archived data may be stored on the hard disk of the system or a remote network drive or moved off-line to removable media such as floppy disk, cartridge tape, DAT tape, or optical disk.

b) The number of archives maintained on the system before transferal to off-line media

shall only be limited by the size of the hard disk or remote network drive. The system


shall allow the user to define the specific intervals of history to be archived to avoid archiving of unnecessary data.

c) Archiving of historical data may be activated by one of the following methods: • Operator Demand • Periodic Schedule • Event Initiated d) Once archived, the data shall be available for re-trending through the system trend

facilities in combination with the current on-line history or other archives. e) Providing the archived history is present on the IBMS hard disk or remote network

drive, the trend facilities must be able to access it transparently for display, when a user scrolls beyond current on-line history limits.

f) The system shall continuously collect and store analogue and status point process

variables (PV) such as historical data from all the functional subsystems. g) The system shall contain fast, standard and extended history. Standard history consists

of a value snapshot taken at a specified interval and various averages of this snapshot representing the average value over longer periods of time. Extended history is a series of snapshots.

1. Standard History • 1 minute snapshots • 6 minute averages • 1 hour averages • 8 hour averages • 24 hour averages 2. Extended History • 1 hour snapshots • 8 hour snapshots • 24 hour snapshots 2. Fast History • 5 second snapshots. h) The historical data can be retrieved by trend sets, operating groups, user built

schematics, point detail trends, and point detail numeric history displays. Historical data can also be used in reports, application programs, or archived to off-line media for long term storage.

i) An operator may review history either in real-time or with an historical offset. Previous

history may be selected by scrolling forwards and backwards through the history file.


4.20 Application Programming Interface a) Application programming interface shall be provided to interface 3rd party systems and

to write custom software to have full access to real time IBMS data. Two types of application programming interface (API) are required, the first is for applications written on the IBMS stations and the second is for applications that are required to run on network based user stations (that are not necessarily operator stations).

b) The IBMS system API’s must have support for (as minimum) either Visual Basic or

C++ or both. Proprietary programming languages are not acceptable. c) The API on the IBMS stations requires the following functions as a minimum: • Read and write to points in the real-time database • Access to historical data • Initiate supervisory control actions • Access to the alarm/event subsystem • Access to user-defined database • Provide a prompt for operator input.

The API on the network-based clients requires the following functions as a minimum: • Read and write to points in the real-time database • Access to historical data • Initiate supervisory control actions • Access to user-defined database. II. GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR SYSTEM 1.0 HARDWARE

1.1 The IBMS/PDM shall comprise of windows based function units necessary to fulfill data acquisition directly or through a gateway / router, storing, visualizing and communicating with other providing high-level operator interface with the system. The IBMS/PDM shall be provided with an operator interface with the facility for remote system interrogation, control, and retrieval/storage of logged data, annunciation of alarms and reports. The PDM shall support consistent archiving of alarms, offline trend data, data backup.

1.2 The CMS shall comprise of windows based workstations providing Graphical User

Interface with the system. The CMS shall be capable of providing the operator with the facility for remote system interrogation, control and retrieval of logged data from PDMs, annunciation of alarms and reports, analysis of recorded data and the formatting of management reports.

2.0 SOFTWARE

2.1 The system offered shall be completely modular in structure and freely expandable at any stage. Each level of the system shall operate independently of the next level up.


2.2 The system shall fully consistent with the latest industry standards, operating on

Windows 2000 or Window NT on a network environment, allowing the user to make full use of the features provided with these operating systems.

3.0 THE MANAGEMENT LEVEL

The head-end of management shall be four CMS stations and operation of the CMS shall include process visualization, data analysis. These stations shall have the facility to have real time link with ERP and Facility management. The system shall be open for vertical and horizontal integration

4.0 NETWORK

The system configuration shall facilitate the current network to be expanded in future at locations designated by the user. Central management of user-specific information such as passwords and protected access to data and programs shall thus be made easily possible. The management system shall also support software updates and changes in the project data.

5.0 PRINTING

It shall be possible to connect printers either directly to the central management station or PDM.

6.0 REMOTE MANAGEMENT

The IBMS software shall support Remote Access management i.e. Remote management station shall be connected via I. Modems

II. ISDN facilities III. Internet/Intranet IV. RAS V. FTP etc.,

7.0 Deleted 8.0 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

8.1 The software shall be a graphically programming tool. It enables user to make the

function diagrams, to parameter, commission all the automation stations and to change the parameters while the system is in operation.

8.2 The programming tool shall be a windows based for convenience. It shall preferably fulfill the requirements laid down in the IEC1131-3 standard concerning the configuration (programming) of DDC/PLC devices.

9.0 PROCESS VISUALISATION SOFTWARE FEATURES


9.1 The PDM / CMS software shall be modular, structured and shall be based on Window NT or Windows 2000 standard 32-bit technology. Each PDM / CMS shall have the following features

I. Open system

II. Web technology III. Shall support 5 web clients IV. Scalable system V. System redundancy

VI. Smart user/maintenance management VII. Smart alarm management (Advanced alarm module: notification via SMS,

fax, email) VIII. Web scheduler

9.2 The PDM / CMS Software shall be a flexible, user friendly, user programmable

package that will allow the operator to construct customized display screens and programs for achieving optimum monitoring, controls and information management and analysis. The software shall be Year 2000 complaint.

9.3 The PDM / CMS Software shall include as a minimum the Operating system,

Communications Control, Graphic Operator Interface (OI) which includes editors and viewers with original licenses for editing and viewing .The editors includes Schematic editor, trend editor, alarm editor, event editor, report editor, and web application editors.

9.4 The PDM / CMS Software shall be a real time operating system and provide true

multitasking providing concurrent execution of multiple real time programs and custom program development. “Switching” from foreground applications to background applications where the background applications are suspended is not acceptable.

9.5 The software shall be totally user-programmable to allow an operator without any

software programming skills to construct programs for control, monitoring and information analysis. All program configurations will be done in clear English language.

9.6 The Software shall allow the user to modify and tailor the Operator Interface software

to the specific and unique requirements of the equipment installed, the programs implemented and to staffing and operational practices.

9.7 Online modification of system configuration, program parameters, and data base shall

be provided via menu selection and keyboard entry of data into preformatted self-prompting templates.

9.8 The Software shall provide a hierarchical linked dynamic graphic operator interface

for accessing and displaying system data and commanding and modifying equipment operation. The graphics shall form the main interface for all the operator actions.

9.9 Any levels of graphic penetration shall be provided with the hierarchy operator

assignable (for example, area, building, wing, floor, air handler, sequence of operator


pages, dynamic program display, point group). Dynamic system data points shall be assignable to each penetration level.

9.10 Descriptors for graphics, points, alarms, etc. shall be modified through the operator’s

station under password control.

9.11 Points shall be uniquely defined as to coloration, animation, audible rate and duration, point descriptors, operator messages ,printer options, alarm archival option, alarm and warning limits, and engineering units.

9.12 Point related change capability shall include system/point enable/disable; run time

enable/disable; analog value offset, lockout, run time limits, and setting a fixed input value or output status.

9.13 Sign-off from a station shall be a manual operation. All sign on/Sign-off activity shall

be automatically indicated on the operator station disk for subsequent display or printout as desired.

9.14 Operator access to system points shall be controlled by individual operator-assigned

graphic hierarchy and by privileges, i.e. an operator shall have access to only those graphics and points as assigned to him. The hierarchy shall permit access to an operator-assigned initial graphic and to all graphics linked to and below the initial graphic.

9.15 The operator shall not have access to graphics in another hierarchical graphic “tree”.

For example, an operator may have access to one building, but not to another building, or to lighting points, but not fire alarm points.

9.16 Each operator shall have any combination of user assigned operating privileges of

alarm acknowledgement, point commanding, data modification, Operating system access, schedule changes, and system configuration changes.

9.17 The graphics shall provide the operator dynamic screen displays of real-time data with

full color animated displays of equipment status, site layouts/building plans and other system configurations.

9.18 An on-line graphic development facility shall be provided to allow the user to develop

or modify graphic displays and assign and position any array of points within each graphic. Systems in which graphic creation & programming is not an on-line activity and/or which requires operator to close the Operator interface software shall not be accepted. Creation of the graphics and assigning of points to the graphics shall not require taking the operator station off-line or interfere with point archiving and alarms.

9.19 Graphics shall be created via mouse and keyboard selection of graphic library stored

symbols and system profiles. The Software shall provide the capability to create custom symbols, system profiles, floor plans, buildings, etc., and to store them in the graphic library.


9.20 It shall be possible to import third party developed drawings developed of the type *.bmp, *.jpg etc., these imported drawings shall be displayed just as regular graphics with dynamic displays programmed on them.

9.21 It shall be possible for the operator to penetrate from one graphic to another by a

simple mouse click on the graphic. Unlimited penetration feature is preferred.

9.22 It shall be possible for the operator to select further penetration via a mouse click on an area, building, floor, fan etc. The defined linked graphic below that selection shall then be displayed. Dynamic data shall be assignable to any and all graphics.

9.23 It shall be possible to display all data on a graphic regardless of physical hardware

address, communication channel or point type (temperature, humidity, fire alarm, etc.) Points may be assignable to multiple graphics where necessary to facilitate operator understanding of system operation and where specified.

9.24 Graphics shall also contain calculated or pseudo points. Each physical point and each

point assigned to a graphic shall be assigned an English descriptor for use in reports. Points (Physical and pseudo) shall be displayed on the Graphic with dynamic data provided by the system with appropriate text descriptors, status or value, and engineering unit.

9.25 To enable operators to view graphics in greater detail, a zoom/pan display feature shall

be provided. Zooming shall be by dragging the cursor diagonally across the area to be zoomed. Panning shall allow horizontal and vertical scrolling around graphics.

9.26 Coloration shall be used to denote status and alarm states. Coloration schemes shall be

variable for each class of points, as chosen by the user. It shall also be possible for the user to create and apply custom colors to depict different equipment status and conditions.

9.27 Dynamic animation shall be used to represent data (e.g., fan rotation, damper position,

fluid flow, tank levels, etc.) It shall be possible to create customize animation to enable effective depiction of real-time data on the screen. The animation shall be applicable to both analog as well as digital points.

9.28 It shall be possible for an operator with authorized privileges to stimulate a point

condition from the Operator station. This would enable operators to test logic functions and other control functionality without having to physically have the input devices connected.

9.29 It should be possible to simulate all types of points( analog as well as digital

irrespective of the nature of the point hardware.

9.30 An on-line context-sensitive “help” utility shall be provided to facilitate operator training and understanding, the help being project specific.

9.31 The document shall contain text and graphics to clarify system operation. At a

minimum, help shall be available for every menu item and dialog box.


9.32 The system shall also have a context-sensitive help feature where by an operator may, on as single mouse click call up the help document pertaining to the dialog box that he is currently on.

9.33 Messaging and Alarm routing facility shall be provided on the operator station for e-

mail, mobile, pager, fax etc., (such as field alarms like ”MCP FAULT” and operator messages like “CHANG BREAK GLASS UNIT” )

9.34 Operator shall be able to command a point without having to place the system in

manual mode first. This shall be only against password control.

For a digital command point such as a 2 position damper actuator, the actuator would show its current state (e.g., CLOSED) and the operator could select OPEN via mouse click. A keyboard equivalent shall be available for those operators with that preference.

10.0 PLANT VIEWER The plant viewer shall support the following features

I. Hierarchically linked animated high-resolution bit-map color graphics.

II. Choice of 2D and 3D symbols with animation based on status. III. Direct access to set points, parameters, operating modes, alarms, time programs, on-line

and off-line trend features. IV. Dynamic multi-tasking with all active pages V. Monitoring and operation of plant at several levels

VI. Navigation to all other management station software applications VII. User definable page size.

VIII. Jump tags for jumps on the same level or between levels IX. Capable of graphics to be printed in color or monochrome X. All graphic file formats supported by Windows can be imported(e.g. jpg, bmp etc.,)


Sub Section B (IBMS and BAS): Building Automation System for HVAC Control

1.0 SCOPE

1.1 The Scope of this section comprises the design, supply, erection, testing, commissioning of preprogrammed distributed digital type Building Automation system (BAS) with Process Data Manager (PDM), Direct Digital Controller (DDC) including hardware and software, signal & communication cabling etc., conforming of the features detailed in this specification and in accordance the requirement of I/O list and schedule of quantities.

1.2 “Building Automation System” means the portion of the control system concerned

with the ACMV system viz. as described elsewhere in the document. The BAS system installed shall be hierarchical in structure. The different levels shall be capable of working in either independently or in conjunction with one another.

2.0 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

The BAS shall provide for monitoring, data acquisition, control and optimization of all the building’s technical plant, plus monitoring and control of connected subsystems. The system structure shall be as follows: I. Autonomous substations in DDC technology with digital and analog inputs and outputs

plus impulse inputs; software for control, alarms, limit-value monitoring, formation and processing of historical data.

II. Autonomous individual- AHU’s, Ceiling mounted units, PAHU’s, Air Handling Units

for Dinning, control system in DDC technology for individual temperature control of individual conditioned areas either in relation to the number of occupants or as per time program.

III. Bus link to the central station (BMS PC), saving on cables.

3.0 Compatibility

3.1 The DDC system shall be compatible to industrial standard protocols like Modbus RTU to integrate with standard makes.

3.2 The DDC system shall be compatible to industrial standard protocols like Modbus

RTU, BACnet, Lonworks of any third party system coming on these universal protocols, Hence, it is necessary for any third party system to be an open or universal protocol. In case of non-compatibility, gateways can be utilized. It is deemed that either open protocol software is included or the required gateway and necessary software are included for this purpose. Total coordination and compatibility between any third party system supplier and DDC supplier and respective system is extremely important and deemed to have been taken care of and all related cost included for this.

4.0 LIST OF STANDARDS


Copper Wire IS-694-1977 Rubber Insulated Braided Wire IS-9968 (Pt-1)-1981 PVC Insulated cables IS-1554 (Pt-1)- 1976 All installations shall comply with current applicable provision of India and the following standards. NFPA71 Central Station signaling systems– protected Premises

Unit. NFPA72A Local Protective signaling systems– Protected

Premises Unit NFPA72D Proprietary Signaling Systems–Protected Premises

Unit. NFPA72E Automatic Fire Detectors. National Electric Code

Article 760 The systems and all components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Inc.

5.0 REQUIREMENTS

A state-of-Art Building Automation system is envisaged for the ACMV system described elsewhere in this specification. The design of the Integrated System shall have integration of the smallest sensor to the operator workstations (Computers). Integration shall mean all the parts of system are connected together through software and shall share all the information. The integration of all systems shall be achieved through software programs, electronic components, and hardware packaging and communication network. The Building Automation System comprises the following components –

I. DDC Substations

II. Field control devices/components like temperature sensors, humidity sensors, differential pressure switches, duct smoke detectors, chilled water valve actuators, fire damper actuators etc.

III. Central station (BMS PC), which processes the data from the field through, required interfaces.

IV. Field Communication cabling All the components mentioned above are integrated and were envisaged to work seamlessly thereby providing safety, protection, efficiency and comfort to the building.

6.0 FIELD DEVICES (BAS)

6.1 Ambient Conditions

All controls shall be capable of operating in ambient conditions varying between

0-50°C and 90% r.h. non-condensing.


6.2 Conduit Entry All control devices shall, unless provided with a flying lead, have a 20 mm conduit knockout. Alternatively, they shall be supplied with adapters for 20 mm conduit.

6.3 Ancillary Items When items of equipment are installed in the situations listed below the BMS/ Control Specialist shall include the following ancillary items: 6.4 Weather Protection All devices, which are exposed to the atmosphere, are to be weatherproofed. All controls, peripherals and associated accessories serving Chillers, Roof Mounted Air Handling Units and other equipment which are exposed shall be protected from Dust, Rain and Solar Radiation. Adequate protection shades etc., shall be provided by the BMS contractor 6.5 Immersion Corrosion resisting pockets of a length suitable for the complete active length of the device, screwed 1/2" or 3/4" BSPT suitable for the temperature, pressure and medium. Duct Mounting (Metal or Builders Work) Mounting flanges, clamping bushes, couplings, lock nuts, gaskets, brackets, sealing glands and any special fittings necessitated by the device, shall be provided by the BMS contractor.

Samples Samples of all types of room mounted equipment (i.e. detectors, thermostats, etc.) shall be provided by the BMS/Controls Specialist for approval by the Consultant/Engineer.

Accuracy Control and measuring devices shall have the following limits of accuracy: Temperature : +/- 1oC over the range of 0°C to 50°C Pressure : +/- 1.5% of measured value Humidity : +/- 5% r.h over the range of 10 to 90% r.h

6.6 Averaging Elements Averaging elements shall be used on supply air ducts having a cross-sectional area exceeding

1.6m2 and shall have a minimum capillary length of 8.2 m. The capillary element shall be serpentined across the whole duct.


Where the span of the element is less than 1 m then it shall be fixed with purpose-made clips and may be unsupported across the duct.

Where the span of the element is above 1 m then it should be supported on Unistrut or similar rigid support. The element shall be clipped every 200m and the supports and hangers shall be adequate to prevent vibration of the element.

6.7 Pressure switches for Air Systems Pressure switches for Air Systems shall be diaphragm operated. Switches shall be supplied

with air connections permitting their use as static or differential pressure switches. The switch shall be of differential pressure type complete with connecting tube and metal

bends for connections to the duct. The housing shall be IP54 rated. The pressure switches shall be available in minimum of 3 ranges suitable for applications like Airflow proving, dirty filter, etc. The setpoint shall be concealed type. The contact shall be SPDT type with 250 VAC, 1A rating.

Shall be supplied suitable for wall mounting or mounting on ducts in any plane. It should be

mounted in such a way so that the condensation flow out of the sensing tips. Proper adapter shall be provided for the cables.

The setpoint shall fall within 40%-70% of the scale range. Shall have differentials adjustable over 10%-30% of the scale range. 6.8 Air flow Switches The Airflow switches shall be selected for the correct air velocity, duct size and mounting

altitude. Where special atmospheric conditions are detailed in the Motor Control Panel Equipment

Schedules, the parts of the switches shall be suitably coated or made to withstand such conditions. Any variations from standard shall be detailed in the Tender.

Shall be suitable for mounting in any plane. 6.9 Water flow switches

Water flow switches shall be selected for the correct water velocity and pipe size and mounting attitude.

6.10 Room Temperature/Humidity Detectors The temperature sensor shall have sensitivities such that a change at the detector of 0.2oC from

the stabilised condition is sufficient to start modulating the corrective element. The temperature sensor shall be with silicon sensor having positive temperature coefficient.

The sensor shall be field wired using an unscreened cable to a base plate. The sensor housing


shall plug into the base so that the same can be easily removed without disturbing the wiring connections. The protection standard shall be IP30 in accordance with IEC 144, DIN 40050. These should be generally mounted 1.5 m above the floor level. These should not be mounted near the heat sources such as windows, electrical appliances, etc. The final location shall be as per the consulting engineers' approval. The sensor shall be linear over 0oC to 50oC.

Shall operate on extra-low voltage and be suitable for mounting on British Standard conduit

boxes. The humidity sensor shall be in an independent housing or be combined with the room/duct

type temperature sensor in he common housing. The sensor should be electronic type with capacitive sensing element. As a minimum it should have a range of 10 to 90% RH.

6.11 Immersion/temperature detector and duct mounted temperature/humidity detectors The temperature sensor shall have sensitivities such that changes at the detector, for 0.3oC and

0.2oC respectively, from the stabilised conditions, are sufficient to start modulating the corrective element.

The humidity sensor shall be in an independent housing or be combined with the room/duct

type temperature sensor in the common housing. The sensor should be electronic type with capacitive sensing element. As a minimum should have a range of 10 to 90% RH.

The temperature sensor shall be with silicon sensor having Positive Temperature Coefficient.

The sensor shall be field wired using an unscreened cable to a base plate. The sensor housing shall plug into the base so that the same can be easily removed without disturbing the wiring connections. The protection standard shall be IP43 in accordance with IEC 144, DIN 40050.

The wiring terminals shall be plug-in type for easy installation and maintenance. The sensor

shall be mounted in the duct based on the guidelines given by the specialist control supplier. The sensor shall be linear over 0oC to 50oC.

6.12 Pressure Detectors (for liquids and gaseous media) 6.13 Pressure detectors shall be suitable for the suitable for the medium and the working

temperatures and pressures. The pressure detector shall be capable of withstanding a hydraulic test pressure of 2 times the working pressure.

Connections shall be suitable for 1/2 to 1/8th in o.d. copper tube. Ductwork versions shall be supplied with the air connections permitting their use as static or

differential pressure detectors. The setpoint shall fall within 40%-70% of the sensing range of the detector. The detector shall have a sensitivity such that a change of 1.5% from the stabilised condition

shall cause modulation of the corrective element.


The static pressure sensor shall be rated for IP65 and the differential pressure sensor shall be as a minimum IP54.

The principle of operation should be based on a hall-effect transducer. The diaphragm should

be copper benylium type. The sensor must be pressure compensated for a medium temperature of -10 to 80oC with

ambient ranging between -25 to 60oC. 6.14 Air Pressure sensor: The pressure sensor shall be differential type. The construction shall be spring loaded

diaphragm type. The movement of the membrane in relation to the pressure should be converted by an inductive coupling, which would electromagnetically give an output suitable for the controller. The pressure sensor shall in a housing having IP54 ratings in accordance with IEC529. Suitable mounting arrangement shall be available on the sensor. The sensor shall come complete with the PVC tubes, probes, etc.

6.15 Actuators Shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. Shall have a sufficient torque to open and close valves and dampers against the maximum out

of balance pressure across them. 6.16 Control Damper Actuators Control Damper Actuators shall be of the type where the damper spindle passes through the

actuator and is secured by a U clamp. Rotary type damper actuators shall be used on the project. The actuators shall not require any

maintenance. The actuators shall have sufficient torque ratings to operate the dampers of various sizes.

These should be available in spring return versions as specified elsewhere in the document.

Limit switches, if required/specified shall be provided for. The actuators shall be suitable for On/Off and modulating operations. 6.17 Actuator Additional features Actuator Additional features are required when detailed in the Motor Control Panel Equipment

Schedules or the Performance Section of the Specification. 6.18 Auxiliary Switches: For On/off applications, the actuators shall have changeover contacts suitable for 220 VAC. 2

amp rating.


Auxiliary switch packs containing at least one, if specified two, electrically independent switches one for each end of the motor travel, adjustable for operation over at least half the motor travel.

6.19 Feedback signal 0 to 10 V dc. signal should be available from the modulating damper actuator for parallel

operation or as feedback. Please refer the data point schedules / sequence of operation/ drawings to incorporate this feature wherever asked for.


Sub Section C (IBMS and BAS): List of Various Components to be integrated through IBMS and BAS

1.0 SCOPE The contractor shall integrate with difference system through RS 485 Modbus protocol and through DDC controller for the following systems:

I. Vertical transportation system II. Lighting management system

III. Electrical System – Various parameters monitoring IV. UPS Monitoring system V. HVAC

VI. Water level Monitoring System with Auto Pump control VII. Fire Alarm System

VIII. Aspiration smoke detection system IX. FM 200 Gas based fire Suppression system X. Access Control System

XI. Public Address System XII. Closed Circuit Television System

XIII. Electrical Metering XIV. Fire door and Fire pump monitoring system XV. Water leakage detection system

1.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION (ELEVATORS)

1.1.1. All the lifts are interfaced with the IBMS system for the indication of mode of

operation and fault conditions. Each lift shall provide contacts for raising alarm conditions. The contacts are fire trip, attendant mode, service mode and auto mode. It shall be possible to display the floor levels of each lift at IBMS through a DDC system which shall take the necessary input contacts from the lift Bidder wired to the DDC system.

1.1.2. ON / OFF – Status and Trip Alarm Monitoring functions of Lifts shall be included. 1.1.3. Software function of Maintenance management, Run time totalisation and

sequential duty cycling shall be included.

1.2 Lighting Management System

1.2.1. Substation LDB: ON/OFF controls 1.2.2. External lighting/Façade lighting DB- ON/Off control

1.3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1.3.1. SUBSTATION AND LT PANEL


1.3.1.1. Monitor Incoming HT voltage, current, frequency, power, MVA 1.3.1.2. Monitor outgoing LT voltage, current, KW 1.3.1.3. Monitor breaker status (ON/OFF/TRIP) 1.3.1.4. Monitor Transformer fault status 1.3.1.5. MCC feeder monitoring 1.3.1.6. Energy monitoring and recording of individual feeder 1.3.1.7. Measurement of KWH at substation level

1.3.2. DG SET

1.3.2.1. Monitor the status of DG set and Log number of run hours. 1.3.2.2. Monitor DG Battery charger. 1.3.2.3. Control start/stop of each pump and link it to start/stop of D G sets. 1.3.2.4. Monitor MW, MVA, frequency & PF of each DG.

Alarms shall be raised in case of any trip or if the measurements are out of range.

1.4 UPS Monitoring system

1.4.1.1. Input/Output voltage 1.4.1.2. Percentage of load and output Amps

1.4.1.3. Input/Output frequency

1.4.1.4. Battery voltage

1.5 HVAC

The various functions that this system shall perform are as follows:

I. The system shall ensure sequential and automatic start/stop of the various air-conditioning equipment based on time schedule and ambient temperature.

II. It shall maintain design inside conditions, within the specified limits, throughout the

year.

III. It shall monitor the start/stop and faults of units.


IV. It shall duty cycle to provide equal run time for all equipment and start the standby unit on a similar unit failure.

V. It shall provide automatic startup of standby equipment in case of failure of operating

unit and indicate fault status of the biped unit.

1.5.1. Chiller Panel

1.5.1.1. Remote start stop. 1.5.1.2. Status of chiller. 1.5.1.3. Chiller trip status. 1.5.1.4. Auto/Manual status. Auto Manual switch to be provided in Chiller Panel. 1.5.1.5. Open/close position feedback from valve actuator.

1.5.2. Primary pump starter panel

1.5.2.1. Remote Start stop. 1.5.2.2. Status of pump. 1.5.2.3. Pump trip status. 1.5.2.4. Auto/Manual status. Auto Manual switch to be provided in pump starter

Panel.

1.5.3. Secondary Pump –Logic Control Panel

1.5.3.1. Remote start stop. 1.5.3.2. The speed control of the secondary pumps

1.5.3.3. Pump trip status. 1.5.3.4. Auto/Manual status. Auto Manual switch to be provided in pump logic

control Panel.

1.5.4. AHU (Comfort)

1.5.4.1. Remote start stop. 1.5.4.2. Auto/Manual status. Auto Manual switch to be provided in AHU starter

Panel.


1.5.4.3. Filter status, return air temp. status

1.5.4.4. Fire damper status

1.5.4.5. VFD control

1.5.5. Ventilation & Exhaust Fans

1.5.5.1. Remote start stop. 1.5.5.2. Remote start stop status.

1.5.5.3. Auto/Manual status. Auto Manual switch to be provided in AHU starter

Panel.

1.5.6. AHU (Precision)

1.5.6.1. Remote start stop. 1.5.6.2. Compressor ON/OFF status

1.5.6.3. Filter status

1.6 WATER LEVEL MONITORING SYSTEM 1.6.1. The proposed water management system consists of one underground sump

consisting of 3 divisions. There is also an underground fire sump. 1.6.2. The proposal consists of water level transmitters in each compartment of UGs 1.6.3. There shall be level transmitters giving an output, which is linear/proportional to

the level of water in each tank. 1.6.4. These displacement type level transmitters shall be connected to a controllers

which is hooked up to a PDM where the levels are monitored depending upon the low level and high level.

1.6.5. The DDC shall also raise alarm to the PDM in case of low or high water limit in

both auto and manual modes.

1.6.6. The pumps will work based on the input signals received from level sensor from the tank.

1.7 Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm System

1.7.1. The monitoring of the status of various detectors/devices should be possible at the

PDM and the CMS.


1.7.2. Fire pumps shall be monitored independently by the DDC controllers and data visualized at the PDM and the CMS.

1.7.3. Alarms and trouble condition reporting at fire system central panel shall also report

at the PDM and CMS. 1.7.4. In the event of fire alarm, FAS shall directly trip the AHUs at Floor MCC. The

FAS using addressable relay outputs shall carry this out. Similarly, start of pressurization stairwells fans and alarm output to the Lift control units shall be carried out by the FAS. Necessary IRMs (Interposing relay Modules) of 2A, 230V AC rating for implementing the above shall be provided.

1.7.5. The supervisory controllers/gateways shall simultaneously convey the fire alarm

data to the PDM and CMS terminals. 1.7.6. The fire system outputs shall be used to deactivate security gate locks and boom

barriers to facilitate speedy evacuation.

1.8 Aspirated smoke detection system:

This should be integrated with Gas suppression for Data centre applications.

1.9 FM-200/ HFC227 based Fire Suppression System.

1.9.1. In the event of fire in the server rooms, the fire alarm system will activate the FM-200 system after cross zoning verification with time delay. This system shall be integrated from Separate panel with separate detectors.

1.10 Access control & security system:

1.10.1. In event of fire, the door locks controlled by the Access control system shall be

automatically released. This shall be carried out directly from the FAS, using addressable outputs. This shall be conveyed through the Gateway/supervisory control to PDM and CMS terminals.

1.10.2. In case of a door magnetic contact showing open without a valid card read,

Access station shall raise an audio alarm and also initiate CCTV recording from cameras in proximity. The event shall be recorded at the PDMs and the images shall be recorded on the DVR.

1.11 PA System

1.11.1. The system shall have pre-recorded message to be announced in all the

groups/zones in case of fire. A signal from fire alarm panel shall initiate such announcements. This announcement shall have highest priority. In the event of fire, announcement of pre-recorded message in all the groups/zones has been foreseen .To avoid panic in the entire building, announcements are to be restricted to the affected areas. The group/zone selection of the PA system is to allow for such selection of affected areas.


1.12 Closed Circuit Television System

1.12.1. Motion Alarm Sensing 1.12.2. DVR to record on external Alarm

1.13 Electrical Metering.

The electrical energy consumption of all the areas should be integrated to PDMs where the data are utilized for billing.

1.14 Glass break detection system:

The glass partition with in the datacenter needs to be monitored and integrated with IBMS for breakage.

1.15 Fire door and Fire pump monitoring system

All the fire doors and Fire pumps should be integrated with IBMS and monitored from the control room.

1.16 Water leakage detection system:

Water leakage under the raised floor area shall be monitored from control room.


Sub Section D (IBMS and BAS): Intellegent Addressable Fire detection System

Scope: A. The control panel, to be intelligent device addressable, analog detecting, low voltage

and modular, with digital communication techniques, in full compliance with all applicable codes and standards. The features and capacities described in this specification are equired as a minimum for this project and shall be furnished by the successful contractor.

B. The system shall be in full compliance with National and Local Codes. C. The system shall include all required hardware, raceways, interconnecting wiring and software to

accomplish the requirements of this specification and the contract drawings, whether or not specifically itemized herein.

D. All equipment furnished shall be new and the latest state of the art products of a single

manufacturer E. The system as specified shall be supplied, installed, tested and approved by the local Authority

Having Jurisdiction, and turned over to the owner in an operational condition.

Standards & Codes:

A. The publications listed below form a part of this publication to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. The latest version of each listed publication shall be used as a guide unless the authority having jurisdiction has adopted an earlier version.

B. Factory Mutual (FM) 1. FM AG Approval Guide.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 13 Standard For The Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 13A Recommended Practice For The Inspection, Testing And Maintenance

of Sprinkler Systems. 3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code. 5. NFPA 90A Standard For The Installation of Air Conditioning And Ventilating

Systems. 6. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. 7. NFPA 12A Halon 8. NFPA 2001 FM-200 9. NFPA 170 Standard Fire Safety and Hazmat Symbols

D. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Appropriate “UL” equipment standards. 1. “UL” 864 Control Panels. 2. “UL” 268 Smoke Detectors. 3. “UL” 268A Smoke Detectors (HVAC). 4. “UL”1076 Security. 5. “UL” 1971, Standard for Visual Signaling Appliances.


Building Codes

1. BOCA National Building Code and the BOCA Fire Code. 2. Standard Building Code and the Standard Fire Code. 3. Uniform Building Code and the Uniform Fire Code. 4. International Building Code and the International Fire Code. 5. State and Local Building Codes as adopted and/or amended by The Authority

Having Jurisdiction. 6. ADA, and/or State and local equivalency standards as adopted by The Authority

Having Jurisdiction. VDS Approval

Manufacturer's Representative:

A. Provide the services of a factory trained and certified representative or technician, experienced in the installation and operation, maintenance and service of the type of system provided. The technician shall supervise installation, software documentation, adjustment, preliminary testing, final testing and certification of the system. The technician shall provide the required instruction to the owner's personnel in the system operation, maintenance and programming.

Submittal:

A. The contractor shall include the following information in the equipment submittal: 1. Power calculations. Battery capacity calculations. Battery size shall be a minimum

of 125% of the calculated requirement. 2. NAC circuit design shall incorporate a 15% spare capacity for future expansion.

3. Complete manufacturers catalog data including supervisory power usage, alarm power usage, physical dimensions, and finish and mounting requirements.

4. Complete drawings covering the following shall be submitted by the contractor for

the proposed system: a) Floor plans in a CAD compatible format showing all equipment and

raceways, marked for size, conductor count with type and size, showing the percentage of allowable National Electric Code fill used.

System Requirements:

A. The system shall be a complete, electrically supervised fire detection and notification

system, microprocessor based operating system having the following; capabilities, features and capacities: 1. Communication between network nodes, each supporting an interactive, self-

standing, intelligent local control panel, with system wide displays. Any network node shall be capable of supporting a local system in excess of 4000 input/output points.


2. The local system shall provide status indicators and control switches for all of the

following functions: a) Audible and visual notification alarm circuit zone control. b) Status indicators for sprinkling system water-flow and valve supervisory

devices. c) Any additional status or control functions as indicated on the drawings,

including but not limited to; emergency generator functions, fire pump functions, door unlocking and security with bypass capabilities.

3. Each intelligent addressable device or conventional zone on the system shall be

displayed at the Central Alarm Receiving Terminal and the local fire alarm control panel by a unique alphanumeric label identifying its location.

System Operation:

A. Activation of any system fire, security, supervisory, trouble, or status initiating device shall cause the following actions and indications at all network displays with basic graphics and multiple detail screens.

B. Fire Alarm Condition:

1. Sound an audible alarm and display a custom screen/message defining the building in alarm and the specific alarm point initiating the alarm in a graphic display. The display shall provide standard NFPA graphical symbols indicating hazardous materials and personnel situations critical to situation management. Hazmat ICONs must conform to NFPA standard 170 format. The system shall supply a simple building floor plan and icons representing alarm devices in off normal or alarm condition.

2. Log to the system history archives all activity pertaining to the alarm condition.

3. Print to system printer (where required) alarm condition information.

4. Sound the signal with synchronized audibles and synchronized strobes throughout

the facility.

5. Audible signals shall be silenced from the fire alarm control panel by an alarm silence switch. Visual signals shall be programmable to flash until system reset or alarm silencing, as required.

6. A signal dedicated to sprinkler system water flow alarm shall not be silenced while

the sprinkler system is flowing at a rate of flow equal to a single head.

7. The alarm information shall be displayed on a Graphic Annunciator located where show on drawings.

8. Where indicated on drawings heat detectors in elevator shaft and machine rooms shall activated an elevator power shunt trip breaker. The heat detectors shall be rated at a temperature below the ratings of the sprinkler heads in respective


locations to insure that the power shall be shut off before activation of sprinkler system.

9. HVAC shut down shall, be accomplished by system operated duct detectors as per

local requirements.

10. Door closure devices shall operate by floor or by local requirements.

C. Supervisory Condition:

1. Display the origin of the supervisory condition report at the local fire alarm control panel graphic LCD display.

2. Activate supervisory audible and dedicated visual signal. 3. Audible signals shall be silenced from the control panel by the supervisory

acknowledge switch.

4. Record within system history the initiating device and time of occurrence of the event.

5. Print to the system printer (where required) the supervisory condition.

D. Trouble Condition. 1. Display at the local fire alarm control panel graphic LCD display, the origin of the

trouble condition report. 2. Activate trouble audible and visual signals at the control panel and as indicated on

the drawings.

3. Audible signals shall be silenced from the fire alarm control panel by a trouble acknowledge switch.

4. Trouble reports for primary system power failure to the master control shall be

optionally delayed for a period of time not greater than 200 seconds. Trouble conditions that have been restored to normal shall be automatically removed from the trouble display queue and nor require operator intervention. This feature shall be software selectable and shall not preclude the logging of trouble events to the historical file.

5. Record within system history, the occurrence of the event, the time of occurrence

and the device initiating the event.

6. Print to the system printer (where required) the trouble condition. E. Security Condition:

1. Display at the local fire alarm control panel graphic LCD display, the origin of the security condition report. A dedicated security LED shall flash until the alarm has been acknowledged, then revert to a steady "ON" state.


2. The control system shall be capable of bypassing the alarms from an individual

security system installed within selected areas. The pass code allowing this function shall be assignable to individual security personnel and each bypass action shall be logged to system history. Intrusion alarms occurring during a bypass period shall be logged to history and displayed but no audible alarm shall occur at the control panel.

3. Print to the system printer (where required) the security condition.

4. The Local Fire Control Panel shall be “UL” 1076 listed for security purposes.

2.01 Control Panel: A. The fire alarm control panel shall be microprocessor based using the multiple

microprocessors throughout the system providing rapid processing of smoke detector and other initiation device information to control system output functions. There shall be a watchdog circuit, which shall verify the system processors and the software program. Problems with either the processors or the system program shall activate a trouble signal, and reset the panel. The system modules shall communicate with an RS 485 network communications protocol. All module wiring shall be to terminal blocks, which will plug into the system card cage. The blocks shall be color coded to prevent accidental crossing of wiring.

B. The basic system shall have capabilities for 252 intelligent initiation devices and can be

expanded up to 2500 intelligent initiation devices. The system shall employ a flexible number of detection input loops to reach maximum system capacity. Systems which, have a fixed number of device addresses per node based on a fixed number of device circuits (loops) shall provide 50% of loop maximum spare capacity on all loops to meet this requirement.

C. The Device Loop Card shall be capable of minimum 252 intelligent devices distributed

between two SLC circuits. Any trouble on one circuit shall not affect the other circuit. This module controls the signaling from the initiation devices reporting alarms and troubles to the control panel. This module shall also provide the signaling to the field devices for controlling the output of specific initiation devices. The circuit shall be capable of being connected with polarity insensitive intelligent initiation devices. The circuits shall have the ability to be wired, Style 4, Style 6. Any of all of the 252 devices on the loop card shall be capable of activating up to two devices (relay base, audible base or remote lamps). These accessories shall not take away from the 252 addresses available per loop. Systems which, require unique addresses for SLC circuit accessories (remote relays, relay bases, audible bases and remote lamps) shall provide 50% spare capacity for each loop to provide for system expansion. The on board microprocessor provides the loop card with the ability to function even if the main microprocessor fails. LED’s on the board shall provide annunciation for the following; Power, Card Failure, Network Failure, Ground. Fault, Alarm, Trouble, Short Zone 1, Short Zone 2, Style 6 Open Zone 1, Style 6 Open Zone 2. This card shall plug into the system card cage.

D. The Signal Line Circuits shall be tested for opens, shorts, ground faults, device status and

multiple device response (2 devices at same address) and communications with all


addressable devices installed before connection to the control panel. Systems without this capability shall have a test panel installed for initial testing to eliminate any possible damage short term or long term to the control panel. After initial testing replace the test panel and proceed with complete testing.

E. The Person Machine Interface (Display) or the Remote Person Machine Interface

(Repeater) shall provide the system information on six inch ¼ VGA monochrome LCD, with Touch Screen and LED display. The DISPLAY shall provide floor plans with alarm type and “you are here” indication. The DISPLAY shall be navigable by device/module custom message in the system architecture with no need for device address knowledge. The DISPLAY shall provide a physical as well as a system geographic view. Graphic user interface shall be menu driven with 4 tabs showing the level and the total events for each tab. The tabs shall be; Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Security. Each level shall show 5 events simultaneously. The LED displays shall indicate Power, Audibles On or Silenced, and Partial system disabled. Systems not having the above LED’s shall provide separate LED’s within the control panel enclosure with appropriate labels. Selection buttons shall be backlit to aid the operator in the selection process. There shall be controls for scrolling throughout the event list. A button shall provide zoom in zoom out for the amount of information desired for a specific entry. The DISPLAY shall be capable of monitoring the power supply loading and show available capacity for future expansion planning. The DISPLAY LCD shall provide standard NFPA symbols showing Fire Service Equipment, Hazards, compliant with NFPA 170 and People in the area of alarm. Systems without this type of display shall supply a “UL” listed Graphics package with their system. The LCD shall have a keyboard screen to allow the technician ability to enter test and numbers for passwords or text changes.

F. The Zone Indicating Card shall contain 8 NAC circuits rated at 2 amps each with power-

limited outputs. The four zone inputs for the card shall be isolated and independently supervised. There shall be unique codes/signals for each circuit based on system logic. These signals shall be Temporal Code 3 (Evacuation), Steady (Such as “Recall”), and Alert ( such as “Tornado Alert”),MT 30 PPM, MT 60 PPM and MT 120PPMThe card shall be listed for notification appliances, horns, bells, strobes, and speakers. The card shall also be listed for NFPA 13 Pre-Action Release, Halon 1301 NFPA 12A, NFPA 2001. The card shall have the ability to wire the circuits Style Y or Style Z with outputs synchronized. The card shall have the following LED’s to provide trouble shooting and annunciation; Reset, Power, Card Failure, Network Failure, Ground. Fault, Zone Activation or Trouble. This card shall plug into the system card cage.

G. The Zone Indicating Card shall contain 4 NAC circuits rated at 4 amps each with power-

limited outputs. All zone inputs for the card shall be isolated and independently supervised. There shall be at least 3 unique codes/signals for each circuit based on system logic. These signals shall be Temporal Code 3 (Evacuation), Steady (Such as “Recall”), and Alert (such as “Tornado Alert”). The card shall be listed for notification appliances, horns, bells, strobes, and speakers. The card shall also be listed for NFPA 13 Pre-Action Release, Halon 1301 NFPA 12A, NFPA 2001, Lease Line, and Municipal Tie. The card shall have the ability to wire the circuits Style Y or Style Z with outputs synchronized. The card shall have the following LED’s to provide trouble shooting and annunciation; Reset, Power, Card Failure, Network Failure, Ground. Fault, Zone Activation or Trouble. This card shall plug into the system card cage.


H. The Convention Detector Card shall have 4 circuits of conventional initiation circuits. Each zone shall be capable of supporting 30 smoke detectors and an unlimited number of contact devices. This card shall also have the ability to power and monitor Linear Beam detectors and Flame detectors. The card shall have the ability to wire the circuits Style D or Style B. This card shall plug into the system card cage.

I. Where needed a Conventional Zone Module shall connect to the Signal Line Circuit, which

will allow the use of conventional initiation devices. This module shall have the ability to support up to 15 convention smoke detectors and an unlimited number of contact devices. The module shall have the ability to wire the circuits Style D or Style B. This module shall also be capable of monitoring Linear Beam detectors as well as Flame detectors.

J. The Network Interface Card shall provide communication between enclosures. The

network card supervises the network to insure proper operation. Any faults that are detected shall be reported to the DISPLAY for annunciation. The network card shall isolate short circuits to each individual segment of the network. If a short occurs only the segment between the network card will be affected. The card shall have the ability to provide Style 4 or 7 network wiring configurations. The card shall have as the minimum the following diagnostic LED; Reset, Power, Card Fail, CAN Fail, HNET Fail, ZNET Fail, GND Fault, Loop A Fail, Loop B fail, Networks - Style 7, Style 4, Gnd Fault Enabled, GND Fault Disabled.

K. The Controllable Relay Card shall provide 6 programmable relays. Each relay shall have

SPDT contacts rated at 4 amps at 30VDC/120VAC resistive and 3.5 amps, 120VAC inductive. The card shall have as a minimum the following diagnostic LED’s; Reset, Power, Card Fail, 24V Fail, Relay 1, Relay2, Relay3, Relay 4, Relay5, Relay6.

L. Where required to monitor a large amount of relays, such as monitoring subsystems or

normally open contact devices, provide a Supervised Input Module, which will monitor up to 16 inputs. Each input shall be individually programmed for supervised or non-supervised circuits. This module shall be connected to a system network. The module shall contain 2 programmable form “C” relays for control of the monitored subsystem.

M. Where required for control of relays or LED’s the Output control Module shall provide 16

open collector outputs to operate LED’s, incandescent lamps or relays as needed. The module shall contain a local audible output, Lamp Test and local audible silence. All circuits shall be power limited.

N. The system card cage shall provide the mounting of all system cards, field wiring, and

panel’s inter-card wiring. The terminal strips for the cards shall be color-coded to eliminate the possibility of making the wrong connection. The terminal blocks maybe disconnected and reconnected while the system is powered up without causing any difficulties. All power limited field wiring shall connect to the top of the card cage. All non-power limited internal wiring shall be connected to the bottom of the card cage. The card cage shall hold the systems cards and have capability of connecting multiple card cages to meet system demands.

O. System response time from alarm to output shall not exceed four (4) seconds.


P. To expedite system troubleshooting, the system cards shall have ground fault detection, and diagnostic LED’s by card.

Q. All system cards and modules shall have Flash memory for downloading the latest module

firmware. 2.02 Power Supply: A. The system Power Supply/Charger shall be a 12-amp supply with battery charger. The

power supply shall be filtered and regulated. The power supply shall have a minimum of 1 power limited output rated at 4 amps, and a minimum of 1 output rated at 12 amps. The system power supply can be expanded up to 48 amps. The auxiliary power supply module shall share common batteries with the primary power supply. The system power supply shall have 4 relays, one for common alarm, one for common trouble and two programmable relays. The power supply shall be rated for 120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz.

B. The battery charger shall be able to charge the system Lead Acid batteries up to 100 AH

batteries. Battery charging shall be microprocessor controlled and programmed with a special software package to select charging rates and battery sizes. An optional Thermistor for monitoring battery temperature to control charging rate shall be available.

C. The power supply shall have a plug for an AC adapter cable, which allows a technician to

plug in a laptop computer for up or down loading program information or test equipment. 2.03 System Enclosures: A. Provide the enclosure needed to hold all the cards and modules as specified with at least spare capacity for

two cards. The enclosures shall be either black or red. The outer doors shall be capable of being a left hand open or a right hand open. The inner door shall have a left hand opening. System enclosure doors shall provide where required ventilation for the modules or cards in the enclosure.

2.04 System Printer:

The system printer shall be operated from a Remote Printer Module, which shall be mounts outside the enclosure. This module shall provide a parallel port and 2 serial ports for RS 232 protocol. One of the serial ports shall be able to be programmed for RS485 protocol. Supervised network connection shall be either Style 4 or 7 as directed by local requirements.

The logging printer shall be “UL” listed with the system. This parallel printer shall be supervised for: On/Off line, out of paper, paper jam, power off, and connection the system. The printer shall be a; high speed, 24 dot matrix, wide carriage, and capable of using tractor or friction fed paper. The printer shall contain diagnostic LED’s for ease in maintenance.

2.05 Remote Annunciators: A. The remote annunciator shall be either a system display or a graphic display as indicated on

the drawings. 1. The System Status Display shall be a 4-line 40-character display with backlit screen

for easy viewing. The module shall be connected to the network allowing it to be placed any where on the system. The system display shall have local sounder with silence control, local acknowledgement, local scrolling.

2. The graphic annunciator design and layout shall be submittal to the architect for

approved prior to construction. The graphics annunciator shall be a Brushed


Stainless Steel cover with hinged door. The LED’s shall be driven from a module with a minimum of 16 outputs, and connected to a system network.

B. The annunciators shall receive vectored information such as; all events, Alarm only, Supervisory only, Trouble only, or Security only.

2.06 Intelligent Initiation Devices: A. All initiation devices shall be insensitive to initiating loop polarity. Specifically, the

devices shall be insensitive to plus/minus voltage connections on either Style 4 or Style 6 circuits.

B. The smoke detector shall be an intelligent digital photoelectric detector with a

programmable heat detector. Detectors shall be listed for use as open area protective coverage, in duct installation and duct sampling assembly installation and shall be insensitive to air velocity changes. The detector communications shall allow the detector to provide alarm input to the system and alarm output from the system within four (4) seconds. Detectors shall be programmable as application specific, selected in software for a minimum of eleven environmental fire profiles unique to the installed location. These fire profiles shall eliminate the possibility of false indications caused by dust, moisture, RFI/EMI, chemical fumes and air movement while factoring in conditions of ambient temperature rise, obscuration rate changes and hot/cold smoke phenomenon into the alarm decision to give the earliest possible real alarm condition report. The intelligent smoke detector shall be capable of providing three distinct outputs from the control panel. The system controlled output functions shall be from an individual or unique input of smoke obscuration, a thermal condition or a combination of obscuration and thermal conditions. The detector shall be designed to eliminate calibration errors associated with field cleaning of the chamber. The detector shall support the use of a relay and LED remote indicator at the same time. Low profile, white case shall not exceed 2.5 inches of extension below the finish ceiling. Detector wiring shall not require any special shielded cable.

C. Thermal Detectors shall be rated at 135 degrees fixed temperature and 15 degrees per

minute rate of rise. Detectors shall be constructed to compensate for the thermal lag inherent in conventional type detectors due to the thermal mass, and alarm at the set point of 135 degrees Fahrenheit. The choice of alarm reporting as a fixed temperature detector or a combination of fixed and rate of rise shall be made in system software and be changeable at any time without the necessity of hardware replacement. The detectors furnished shall have a listed spacing for coverage up to 2,500 square feet and shall be installed according to the requirements of NFPA 72 for open area coverage.

D. The smoke detector shall be an intelligent digital photoelectric detector with a

programmable heat detector. Detectors shall be listed for use as open area protective coverage, in duct installation and sampling assembly installation and shall be insensitive to air velocity changes. The detector communications shall allow the detector to provide alarm input to the system and alarm output from the system within four (4) seconds. The detector shall be mounted in a duct detector housing listed for that purpose. The duct detector shall support the use of a remote test switch, relay or LED remote indicator. The


duct detector shall be supplied with the appropriate sampling tubes to fit the installation. Where duct detectors are exposed to the weather provide a weatherproof enclosure.

E. Detector bases shall be low profile twist lock type with screw clamp terminals and self-

wiping contacts. Bases shall be installed on an industry standard, 4" square or octagonal electrical outlet box.

1. Where selective localized control of electrical devices is required for system

operation, furnish and install detector base with software programmed addressable relay integral to the base. The relay shall switch electrical loads within relay ratings, as indicated on the drawings. Operation of the addressable control circuit shall be independent of the number of detectors and relays on the circuit or the number in an alarm state. Relay bases shall be rated for resistive or inductive load (120VAC or 30VDC) 3 amps.

2. Where indicated on the drawings, furnish detector base with integral approved

audible evacuation alarm signal having an output of 85db. The audible signal shall be individually addressable and software programmed for operation.

F. Provide single action addressable manual stations where shown on the drawings, to be flush

or surface mounted as required. Manual stations shall contain the intelligence for reporting address, identity, alarm and trouble to the fire alarm control panel. The manual station communications shall allow the station to provide alarm input to the system and alarm output from the system within less than four (4) seconds. The manual station shall be equipped with terminal strip and pressure style screw terminals for the connection of field wiring. Surface mounted stations where indicated on the drawings shall be mounted using a manufacturer's prescribed matching red enamel outlet box.

G. Provide double action addressable manual stations where shown on the drawings, to be

flush or surface mounted as required. Manual stations shall contain the intelligence for reporting address, identity, alarm and trouble to the fire alarm control panel. The manual station communications shall allow the station to provide alarm input to the system and alarm output from the system within less than four (4) seconds. The manual station shall be equipped with terminal strip and pressure style screw terminals for the connection of field wiring. Surface mounted stations where indicated on the drawings shall be mounted using a manufacturer's prescribed matching red enamel outlet box.

H. Addressable Interface Devices shall be provided to monitor contacts for such items as

water-flow, tamper, and PIV switches connected to the fire alarm system. These interface devices shall be able to monitor a single or dual contacts. An address will be provided for each device and all physical devices shall require only one address on a signaling line circuit regardless of the number of circuits on an individual module. Where remote supervised relay is required the interface shall be equipped with a SPDT relay rated for 4 amps resistive and 3.5 amps inductive.

2.07 Conventional Initiation Devices: . A. Heat Detector explosion proof shall be rate compensation type detector rated for 140° up to

450°. Provide detector with temperature ratings for the appropriate application or as


indicated on drawings. The detector shall mount in an explosion proof electrical box with a ½ inch NPT in cover.

B. Heat Detector 135° F Rate of Rise detector shall be a dual heat detector using the rate of

rise and fixed temperature principles. Rate of rise portion shall operate when a change of temperature exceeds 15° within 60 seconds. The fixed temperature portion shall operate at rated temperature. The detector shall mount to a standard electrical 4” box.

C. Heat Detector 200° F Rate of Rise detector shall be a dual heat detector using the rate of

rise and fixed temperature principles. Rate of rise portion shall operate when a change of temperature exceeds 15° within 60 seconds. The fixed temperature portion shall operate at rated temperature. The detector shall mount to a standard electrical 4” box.

D. Heat Detector 135° F Fixed temperature portion shall operate at the rated temperature. The

detector shall mount to a standard electrical 4” box. E. Heat Detector 200° F Fixed temperature portion shall operate at the rated temperature. The

detector shall mount to a standard electrical 4” box. F. Heat Detector 135° F Rate Compensated shall use the rate compensation principle of

detection. This type of detector compensates for the thermal lag inherent in heat detectors. The detector shall mount in a standard electrical box with a ½ inch knock out in cover.

G. Heat Detector 200° F Rate Compensated shall use the rate compensation principle of

detection. This type of detector compensates for the thermal lag inherent in heat detectors. The detector shall mount in a standard electrical box with a ½ inch knock out in cover.

H. Heat Detector 135° F Rate Compensated Weatherproof shall use the rate compensation

principle of detection. This type of detector compensates for the thermal lag inherent in heat detectors. The detector shall mount in a weatherproof electrical box with a ½ inch knock out in cover.

I. Heat Detector 200° F Rate Compensated Weatherproof shall use the rate compensation

principle of detection. This type of detector compensates for the thermal lag inherent in heat detectors. The detector shall mount in a weatherproof electrical box with a ½ inch knock out in cover.

J. Photoelectric Smoke Detector shall be microprocessor operated providing indication of

detector trouble. The detector shall have a tri colored LED, green for normal, red for alarm and amber for trouble. The detector shall have supervised optics and shall provide an indication when detector requires service. The detector shall be low profile and plug into a twist lock base. The base shall have the ability to have a relay or an audible base as needed.

K. Electronic Thermal Detector 135° F is a fixed temperature self-restoring detector. The

detector is rated for 2500 sq. ft. coverage. The detector shall be low profile and plug into a twist lock base. The base shall have the ability to have a relay or an audible base as needed.


4.0 FIRE DETECTION DEVICES AND MODULES 4.1 Deleted 4.2 Intelligent Detectors a. All fire sensors shall mount on a common base to facilitate the changing of sensor type

if building conditions change. The base shall be incompatible with conventional detectors to preclude the mounting on a non-intelligent device.

b. Each sensor shall contain an LED which shall blink each time the sensor is scanned by

the Fire Signaling panel (FSP). If the FSP determines that the sensor is in alarm, the FSP shall command the sensor LED to remain latched on to indicate alarm.

c. Each sensor shall contain a magnetically-actuated test switch such that it can be tested

for alarm from the sensor location. d. Each sensor shall be capable of being tested for alarm via command from the FSP. e. Each sensor shall respond to FSP scan for information with its type identification to

preclude inadvertent substitution of another sensor type. The FSP shall operate with the installed type but shall initiate a mismatch (trouble) condition until the proper type is installed or the programmed sensor type changed.

f. Each sensor shall respond to FSP scan for information with an analog representation of

measured fire-related phenomena (smoke density, particles of combustion, temperature). Such response proves end-to-end sensor response including the operation of the sensor electronics. Systems which only monitor the presence of a conventional detector in an addressable base shall not be acceptable.

g. Each Photoelectric detector shall contain an optical sensing chamber with nominal

sensitivity of 2.3%/foot obscuration. h. Provide Ionization Smoke Sensors as indicated on the plans. Each shall contain a

unipolar dual chamber configuration with nominal sensitivity of 1.55/foot obscuration. i. Each Thermal sensor shall provide temperature measurement when scanned by the FSP

for information. 4.2.1 Ionization Smoke Detector

This detector will be capable fo detecting a fire both in its incipient or smouldering stages as well as visible flames. To meet this requirement the detector will respond to visible combustion products in the form of smoke as well as invisible particles, aerosols and pyroslysis products from a clear burning fire.

The sensitivity / response threshold value, the design and construction of the detector will be in accordance with IS-11360, BS-5445 Part 7 (European Standard EN54-7) or ANSI-UL.268 as applicable. The detectors will be marked with their normal


sensitivity, sensitivity range listed spacing, radiation level or radio active component etc., as per relevant standards.

Radio active material used in ionisation smoke detector will be such as not to have any harmful effect on the personnel in the area where installed even if the area is continuously inhabited. The radiation will be in the range 0.5 micro curie to 0.9 micro curie.

4.2.2 Photoelectric Smoke Detector

This detector working on the light scattering principle will be capable of detecting visible smoke from smouldering fires long before the fire breaks out into visible flame.

The normal sensitivity / response threshold value, the design and construction of the detector will be in accordance with IS-11360, BS-5445 Part 7 (European Standard EN54-7) or ANSI-UL.268 as applicable. Smoke detectors will be marked with their normal sensitivity and tolerance limits and listed spacing as per relevant standards.

4.3 Intelligent Modules 4.3.1 Input Module a. The Input Device shall provide an addressable input for N.O. or N.C. contact devices

such as manual stations, waterflow switches, sprinkler supervisory devices, etc. b. The Input Device shall provide a supervised initiating circuit. An open-circuit fault

shall be annunciated at the FSP. (Subsequent alarms shall be reported in spite of the fault)

a. The device shall contain an LED which blinks upon being scanned by the FSP. Upon

determination of an alarm condition, the LED shall be latched on. 4.3.2 Output Module a. The Output Device shall provide an addressable output for a separately powered alarm

indicating circuit or for a control relay. b. The Output Device shall provide a supervised indicating circuit where indicated on the

plans. An open-circuit fault shall be annunciated at the FSP. ( Subsequent alarm signaling shall occur in spite of the fault condition. )

c. The Output Device shall provide a control relay where indicated on the plans. The

relay contacts shall be SPDT (Form "C") rated at two amps @ 28 V dc. d. The device module shall contain an LED which blinks upon being scanned by the DGP.

Upon activation of the device, the LED shall be latched on. e. The device shall mount in a standard electrical box. 4.4 Manual Call Point


Each Addressable Manual Call Point (MCP) comprise of an electronic circuit built into it to provide addressing capability and or reputed make push button enclosed in a box. The push button will have adequate number of contacts. The push button actuator will be unshrouded and the push button will project out from the surface of the box. The front part of the Manual Call Point will be provided with frame having breakable glass sheet on the front surface suitably sealed with neoprone gaskets. The arrangement will be such that when completely assembled, the front glass sheet keeps the push button actuated, as long as the glass cover is intact. In case of fire when the glass cover is broken to give a fire alarm the push button shall be automatically released by its spring action and give necessary signal to the fire alarm panel for annunciation of fire and its address.

The enclosure of the MCP will be dust, weather and vermin proof, having a degree of protection IP 54 in indoor areas and IP 65 in outdoor areas.

The MCP will be suitable for wall mounting.

The complete unit will be painted fire red shade No.536 as per IS-5. The internal surface of the enclosure will be painted with semi-glossy white. The push button knob will be red in colour.

A label will be provided on each MCP with an inscription reading “FIRE ALARM – IN CASE OF FIRE BREAK GLASS”, either on the enclosure or on a separate plate mounted behind the glass cover. A translation of this inscription in the vernacular prevailing at site will also be provided on the label. The metal plate used as a label will not tarnish under the prevalent atmospheric condition. The inscription will be indelibly marked on the label.

Each MCP will be provided with the following accessories :

• If not of the press to break type glass or pull type, an iron hammer of sufficient weight

suitable for breaking the glass cover. The iron hammer will be attached to the MCP enclosure by means of non-corrodable iron chain of sufficient length and play to facilitate easy breaking of the glass. A hook to support the hammer will also be provided on the MCP.

• An identification plate, with a tag number. The tag number will be identical to that

displayed on the fire alarm panel. • Compression type nickel plated brass cable glands on the external enclosure for the

connecting cables. Suitable knock outs will be provided on both the top and bottom surfaces of the enclosure to facilitate either top or bottom entry of cables. The degree of protection will remain intact with knockouts in place.

• Terminal blocks with the required number of terminals for connecting external cables. • Earthing studs (if the enclosure is metallic and the operating voltage is greater than 24

V) suitable for connecting to the Purchaser’s earthing conductor.


The MCP will be addressable type having the following features :

• Individual addressing capability on the control unit to facilitate precise location of fire /

manual call point actuated. • Continuous monitoring of individual manual call point and operating conditions /

healthiness.

1.1 MIMIC PANEL: A mimic panel shall be provided at each floor lobby indicating all the four/more zones and it shall give the location of fire. It shall consist of an architectural layout of the each zone/wing of Protected area. Each symbolic detector / component or equipment on the mimic panel shall be fitted with LED to give indication of alarm in case of detector signify operation of equipment. The mimic panel shall be of adequate size to give clarity to the fire protection personal and its size and layout be subject to the approval of the Engineers in charge.


Sub Section E (IBMS and BAS): High Sensitivity very Early Smoke Detection Alarm System

SCOPE This document provides specification details of the VESDA Laser PLUS/COMPACT aspirating smoke etection products to supply,install and commissioning . 1.01 General A Very Early Smoke Detection System similar to the VESDA LaserPLUS/compact System shall be installed throughout the areas nominated on the drawings.The system shall consist of highly sensitive LASER-based Smoke Detectors with aspirators connected to networks of sampling pipes. When required, an optional Display unit shall be provided to monitor each detector, and a Programmer shall be supplied to configure the system.

1.02 Approvals The Very Early Smoke Detection System must be of a type submitted to, tested, approved, and/or listed by:

AFNOR (Association Francaise de Normalisation), France FM (Factory Mutual), US LPCB (Loss Prevention Certification Board), UK NTC (National Test Centre), China SSL (Scientific Services Laboratory), Australia UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc), US ULC (Underwriters Laboratories Canada), Canada VdS (Verband der Sachversicherer e.V.), Germany

1.03 Codes, Standards or Regulations The entire installation shall be installed to comply with one or more of the following codes or standards:

AS 1670, AS1603 NZ Part 2, 4, 8, ASNZS 3000 British Fire Protection Systems Association, Code of Practice for Category 1 Aspirating Detection Systems British Standards, BS 5839 Part 1 or BS 6266 NFPA Standards, US NEC Standards, US NZ 4512 1994 Local codes and standards Year 2000 compliancy standards including, LPS2000, GTE PA96014T

1.04 System Description

1.04.1 Design Requirements Shall consist of a highly sensitive LASER-based smoke detector, aspirator, and filter.


It shall be modular, with each detector optionally monitored by a Display featuring LEDs and a sounder. The system shall be configured by a Programmer that is either integral to the system, portable or PC based.

The system shall allow programming of: four smoke threshold alarm levels;

time delays; faults including airflow, detector, power, filter and network as well as an indication of the urgency of the fault;

seven or more configurable relay outputs for remote indication of alarm and fault conditions.

1. It shall consist of an air sampling pipe network to transport air to the detection system, supported by calculations from a computer-based design modelling tool.

2. Optional equipment may include intelligent remote displays and/or a high level interface with the building fire alarm system, or a dedicated VESDA System Management (VSM) graphics package. 3. Performance Requirements

Shall be tested and approved to cover up to 2,000 sq.m. Shall be approved to provide very early smoke detection and provide four output levels corresponding to Alert, Action, Fire 1 and Fire 2. These levels shall be programmable and able to be set at sensitivities ranging from 0.005 – 20% obsc/m. Shall report any fault on the unit by using configurable fault output relays or via VSM. Shall be self monitoring for filter contamination. Shall incorporate a flow sensor in each pipe and provide staged airflow faults.

1.05 Submittals Product data and site drawings shall be submitted and shall include pipe layout, operational calculations (ASPIRE™) and performance criteria. A copy of the manufacturer’s installation, operation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied upon completion of the installation. System commissioning data shall be supplied (in a format recommended by the manufacturer and per the instructions provided by the manufacturer) within 30 days of completion of the installation.

1.06 Quality Assurance 1.06.1 Qualifications Both Light Scattering and Particle Counting shall be utilised in this device as follows: The Laser Detection Chamber shall be of the mass Light Scattering type and capable of detecting a wide range of smoke particle types of varying size. A particle counting method shall be employed for the purposes of

preventing large particles from affecting the true smoke reading monitoring contamination of the filter (dust & dirt etc.) to automatically notify when maintenance is required. Note: The Particle counting circuitry shall not be used for the purpose of smoke density measurement.

The Laser Detection Chamber shall incorporate a separate secondary clean air feed from the filter; providing clean air barriers across critical detector optics to eliminate internal detector contamination.


The detector shall not use adaptive algorithms to adjust the sensitivity from that set during commissioning. A learning tool shall be provided to ensure the best selection of appropriate alarm thresholds during the commissioning process. Equipment Supplier The equipment supplier shall be authorised and trained by the manufacturer to calculate/design, install, test and maintain the air sampling system and shall be able to produce a certificate stating such on request.

Detector Assembly The Detector, Filter, Aspirator and Relay Outputs shall be housed in a mounting box and shall be arranged in such a way that air is drawn from the fire risk and a sample passed through the Dual Stage Filter and Detector by the Aspirator. The Detector shall be LASER-based type and shall have an obscuration sensitivity range of 0.005 – 20% obs/m.

The Detector shall have four independent field programmable smoke alarm thresholds across its sensitivity range with adjustable time delays for each threshold between 0-60 seconds. The Detector shall also incorporate facilities to transmit the following faults

Detector Air flow

Filter System Zone Network Power

Urgent and Minor faults. Minor faults shall be considered as servicing or maintenance signals. Urgent faults indicate the unit may not be able to detect smoke. The detector shall have four in-line sample pipe inlets and must contain a flow sensor for each pipe inlet. Both Minor and Urgent flow faults can be reported.

The filter must be a two-stage disposable filter cartridge. The first stage shall be capable of filtering particles in excess of 20 microns from the air sample. The second stage shall be ultra- fine, removing more than 99% of contaminant particles of 0.3microns or larger, to provide a clean air barrier around the detector’s optics to prevent contamination and increase service life. The aspirator shall be a purpose-designed rotary vane air pump. It shall be capable of allowing for multiple sampling pipe runs up to 200m in total, (4 pipe runs per detector) with a transport time of less than 90 seconds or as appropriate codes dictate.

The Assembly must contain relays for alarm and fault conditions. The relays shall be software programmable to the required functions. The relays must be rated at 2 AMP at 30 VDC. Remote relays shall be offered as an option and either configured to replicate those on the detector or programmed differently.

The Assembly shall be able to be surface mounted to a wall or recessed in the wall cavity (the unit may be inverted in either option). The assembly shall have built-in event and smoke logging. It shall store smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator actions and faults. The date and time of each even shall be recorded. Each detector (zone) shall be capable of storing up to 18,000 events and does not require the presence of a display in order to do so.


2.0 to 2.03- deleted

2.04 Displays When required, a detector Display module may be located within the detector, a remote mounting box or a 19 inch remote rack. Each Display shall provide the following features at a minimum:

• A 20 segment bargraph display. • Four independent high intensity alarm indicators, Alert, Action, Fire 1 and Fire2,

corresponding to the four alarm thresholds of the detector. • Alarm threshold indicators for Alert, Action and Fire 1. • Detector fault and airflow fault indicators. • Faults originating in the particular VLP zone (Zone Fault) shall be distinguished from those

produced by the overall smoke detection system and from those resulting from network wiring errors (Network Fault). LED indicators shall be provided for each fault category.

• Minor and urgent fault LED indicators. • A remotely mounted Display may be optionally equipped with 7 or 12 configurable relays for

signalling alarm and fault conditions. • Four buttons supporting the following features: • Mode/Test - Scrolls through the information on the Display’s digital display: Sensitivity (Fire 1

Threshold setting), current smoke level and VLP Zone number. When pressed and held initiates a lamp test on the individual display module.

• Silence - Silences all devices on the system • Reset - Unlatches all latched alarm conditions on the assigned VLP zone. • Isolate - Isolates the individual VLP zone (inhibits Alarm and Fault relays and initiates Isolate

relay). 2.05 Programmers When required, a Programmer module may be located within the detector, a remote mounting box, a 19 inch remote rack, or in a portable hand-held unit. Alternatively, programming may be performed using a Windows™ application running on a PC connected through a High Level Interfacing unit (PC-Link HLI). Each Programmer shall support the following features at a minimum: Programming of any device on the Software system. Viewing of the status of any device in the system. Adjustment of the alarm thresholds of a nominated detector. Setting of Day/night, weekend and holiday sensitivity threshold settings. Multi-level password control. Programmable latching or non-latching relay operation. Programmable engergised or de-energised relays. Programmable high and low flow settings for airflow supervision. Programmable aspirator speed control. Programmable maintenance intervals. Facilities for referencing with time dilution compensation. Testing of relays assigned to a specific zone to aid commissioning.


2.06 Device Networking Requirements The devices in the smoke detection system shall be capable of communicating with each other via twisted pair RS485 cable. The network shall be able to support up to 250 devices (detectors, displays and programmers), of which at least 100 detectors can be supported. The network shall be capable of being configured in a fault tolerant loop for both short circuit and open circuit. Any communication faults shall be reported unambiguously and shall be clearly attributable to an individual device or wire link in the fault messages. PC based configuration tools shall be available to configure and manage the network of detectors.

2.07 Digital Communication Port Shall comply with EIA RS485 Protocol. Application Detection Alarm Levels The laser based aspirating detection system shall have four (4) independently programmable alarm thresholds. The four alarm levels may be used as follows:

Alarm Level 1 (Alert) Activate a visual and audible alarm in the fire risk area. Alarm Level 2 (Action) Activate the electrical/electronic equipment shutdown relay and activate visual and audible alarms in the Security Office or other appropriate location. Alarm Level 3 (Fire 1) Alarm Level 4 (Fire 2) Activate a suppression system and/or other suitable countermeasures (e.g. evacuation action or shut down of systems).

NOTE: The alarm level functions as listed are possible scenarios. Consideration should be given to the best utilisation of these facilities for each application and the requirements of local authorities Initial Detection Alarm Settings Initial settings for the alarm levels shall be determined by the requirements of the fire zone. However, the setting for Fire 1 (Alarm Level 3) shall always appear as 100% on the bargraph scale. Default settings of the unit shall be:

Alarm Level 1 (Alert) 0.08% Obs/m Alarm Level 2 (Action) 0.14% Obs/m Alarm Level 3 (Fire 1) 0.2% Obs/m Alarm Level 4 (Fire 2) 2.0% Obs/m Initial (factory default) Alarm Delay Thresholds Initial (factory default) settings for the alarm delay threshold shall be: Alarm Level 1 (Alert) 10 seconds Alarm Level 2 (Action) 10 seconds Alarm Level 3 (Fire 1) 10 seconds Alarm Level 4 (Fire 2) 10 seconds Fault Alarm 5 seconds Fault Alarms


The Detector Fault relay shall be connected to the appropriate alarm zone on the Fire Alarm Control Panel in such a way that a Detector Fault would register a fault condition on the FACP. The Minor Fault and Isolate relays shall also be connected to the appropriate control system. (Check local Codes, Standards or Regulations to determine whether compliance with this set-up is required). Power Supply and Batteries The system shall be powered from a regulated supply of nominally 24V DC. The battery charger and battery shall comply with the relevant Codes, Standards or Regulations. Typically 24 hours standby battery back up is required followed by 30 minutes in an alarm condition. Local Power Supply Standards that may apply:

ASNZ 1603 Part 4 - 1987 UL 1481 Listed (provided the power supply and standby batteries have been appropriately sized/rated to accommodate the system’s power requirements). 2.08 deleted

2.09 Sampling Pipe Design 2.09.1 Sampling Pipe The sampling pipe shall be smooth bore with an internal diameter between 15-25mm. Normally, pipe with an outside diameter of 25mm and internal diameter of 21mm should be used. The pipe material should be suitable for the environment in which it is installed, or should be the material as required by the specifying body. All joints in the sampling pipe must be air tight and made by using solvent cement, except at entry to the detector. The pipe shall be identified as Aspirating Smoke Detector Pipe (or similar wording) along its entire length at regular intervals not exceeding the manufacturers recommendation or that of local codes and standards. All pipes should be supported at not less than 1.5m centres, or that of the local codes or standards. The far end of each trunk or branch pipe shall be fitted with an end cap and drilled with a hole appropriately sized to achieve the performance as specified and as calculated by the system design. Sampling Holes • Sampling holes of 2mm, or otherwise appropriately sized holes (see Section 3.03), shall not be

separated by more than the maximum distance allowable for conventional point detectors as specified in the local code or standard. Intervals may vary according to calculations.

• Each sampling point shall be identified in accordance with Codes or Standards. • Consideration shall be given to the manufacturers recommendations and standards in relation to

the number of Sampling Points and the distance of the Sampling Points from the ceiling or roof structure and forced ventilation systems.


3. INSTALLATION

3.01 The Detection system The contractor shall install the system in accordance with the manufacturer's System Design Manual.

3.02 The Capillary Sampling Network • Where false ceilings are installed, the sampling pipe shall be installed above the ceiling, and

Capillary Sampling Points shall be installed on the ceiling and connected by means of a capillary tube.

• The minimum internal diameter of the Capillary tube shall be 5mm, the maximum length of the Capillary tube shall be 2m unless the manufacturer in consultation with the engineer have specified otherwise.

• The Capillary tube shall terminate at a Ceiling Sampling Point specifically designed and approved by the manufacturer. The performance characteristics of the Sampling Points shall be taken into account during the system design.

3.03 Air Sampling Pipe Network Calculations Air Sampling Pipe Network Calculations shall be provided by a sampling pipe aspiration modelling program . Pipework calculations shall be supplied with the proposed pipe layout design to indicate the following performance criteria: Transport Time The manufacturers recommended transport time (time taken for the smoke to enter the pipe and reach the detector) for the least favourable sampling point is 60 seconds or less. Local codes or end users standards may also apply. For example: AS1670, Part 1 Australia 90 Seconds NFPA72 US 120 Seconds BFPSA Code of Practice UK 120 Seconds The maximum transport time must never exceed the local codes. Balance % The sample point balance for the pipe shall not be less than 70% as indicated by ASPIRE. That is, the volume of air drawn from the last sampling point shall not be less than 70% of the average volume of air through the other holes. Share % The sample hole share for the pipe shall not be less that 70% as indicated by ASPIRE. That is, the sum volume of air drawn through the sampling holes must always be greater than 70% of the total volume of air entering the pipe (i.e. the End Vent must not exceed 30% of the total flow).

3.04 Commissioning Tests • The contractor shall allow for the manufacturer’s representative to attend commissioning of the

entire installation in the presence of the owner and/or its representative.

• All necessary instrumentation, equipment, materials and labour shall be provided by the Contractor.


• The Contractor shall record all tests and system calibrations and a copy of these results shall be retained on site in the System Log Book.

3.05 System Checks • Visually check all pipes to ensure that all joints, fittings, bends, sampling points, etc., comply

with the Specification.

• Check the system to ensure the following features are operational and programmed in accordance with the specification.

• Alarm threshold levels (for both day and night settings),

• Pipes in use,

• Detector address,

• Display address,

• Time and date,

• Time delays,

• Air flow fault thresholds,

• Display buttons operable (Mode, Silence, Reset, Isolate),

• Referencing

• Units set to U.S./S.I., • Check to ensure that all ancillary warning devices operate as specified. • Check interconnection with Fire Alarm Control Panel to ensure correct operation.

3.06 Tests • Introduce Smoke into the Detector Assembly to provide a basic functional test.

• Introduce smoke to the least favourable Sampling Point in each Sampling Pipe. Transport time is not to exceed the local codes (see 3.03).

• If more than two bargraph divisions illuminate under normal conditions (no smoke test), review event log for two (2) weeks from date of commissioning and make appropriate adjustments to the alarm and delay thresholds.

• Activate the appropriate Fire Alarm zones and advise all concerned that the system is fully operational. Fill out the log book and commissioning report accordingly.


Sub Section F (IBMS and BAS): Public Address System, Voice Communications System and

Emergency Voice Communication System A) Public Address System 1.0 Objective:

The Public Address System is designed to serve the multi purpose of playing the music or to make general announcement or to transit the fire tone under fire condition. These different signals are transmitted through the same set of speakers hence different levels of priorities are allotted to different signals. The music is with the least priority and the fire tone is having next priority and the emergency announcements are having the highest priority level.

2.0 Functionality:

2.1 All control consoles shall be placed in the IBMS room. Announcement and background music shall be played from the IBMS room and car calling mike shall be provided in the reception area.

2.2 An EPABX will be provided in the control center. It shall be possible to ‘page’ to

designated zones within the specified group from the EPABX extensions. 2.3 The System shall have pre-recorded message to be announced in all the groups/zones

in case of fire. A signal from fire alarm panel shall initiate such announcements. This announcement shall have highest priority.

2.4 The system shall have a chime module. The chime module shall generate two types of

signals consisting of either a two-note chime or a single gong tone to capture attention before paging.

2.5 Normally background music shall be played in the lobbies and other common areas

paging will receive a higher priority and the highest priority shall be accorded to emergency announcements initiated by the fire control panel.

2.6 The speakers are distributed in the entire building and are configured in different

zones. The announcement can be made in individual mode i.e. one zone at a time or to all the speakers simultaneously in ALL CALL mode.

3.0 Components

3.1 SPEAKERS

3.1.1. Speakers are in wooden or metal enclosures. All the speakers are with its associated line matching transformers. The speakers are interconnected in the zone configurations. The types of speakers to be used in various areas are

I. Lift lobbies and Datacenter Area and office area with false ceiling – 6 W flush

mounting ceiling ring speakers”


II. Staircases – 20 W Column speakers.

3.2 PUBLIC ADDRESSING AMPLIFIERS

These amplifiers are designed to accept the input sources i.e., Microphone/CD Player/Fire tone generator. The output is having a 100 Volts line to take care of line drop. The Amplifiers are stacked inside the rack system. Tone control circuit is provided to alter the quality of the output as per the users requirement.

3.3 RACK ASSEMBLY

Rack assembly is to stack the public addressing amplifiers. This is factory prewired and is having different channels for AC mains cable and Audio signal Cables. The rack is provided with wheels for easy maintenance. One lockable rear door is provided. The rack assembly is operating on 230 VAC.

3.4 CONTROL CONSOLE

The heart of the entire public addressing system is the Console. The selection of Music or Announcements is done through the console. The system shall make provision for dual channel output i.e both music and audio announcement shall be made for the entire system in which either music or audio announcement shall be selected through a hardware or software switching facility. The announcements can be made through the control console zone wise such as Music, Fire tone or Announcements. The console is provided with keypads on a sloped surface. The switches are having respective LED’s.

4.0 The different modes of transmission in P.A System are as follows:

4.1 MUSIC

4.1.1. The music is through the CD Players can be fed to the amplifiers. The music transmission is having the least priority. That is if FIRE condition occurs, then the Alert tone overrides the music in the speaker. If any announcement is made, then the music will be stopped till the time of announcement and continues after pressing key.

4.1.2. To play music a separate switch MUSIC is given and by operating this switch, the

music is transmitted to tall departments/zones.

4.2 ANNOUNCEMENTS

4.2.1. Announcements can be made through the microphone and by selecting the required zones.

4.2.2. Announcements can be made in following modes:

I. 1.Individual mode


II. 2.All Call mode 4.2.3. In this mode announcement can be made to all the speakers simultaneously. This

is useful when any common message to be passed to all. Also this is more convenient and fast to address the people during emergencies.

5.0 SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION

The speakers in each zone are connected in parallel and are connected to the relay and switching unit. The cables from each zone are separately routed and are terminated in the relay-switching unit.

6.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

6.1 3 Disc CD changer carouses/DVD/MP3: Program up to 30 selections from 5 different CDs Up to 3 discs can be changed while one is playing. Skip, search, shuffle, reappear and quick play function. Dedicated remote control.

6.2 Dual auto reverse cassette deck:

Type: Auto reverse 4 – track, 2-channel recording and playback setup, double cassette deck.

6.3 Power Amplifier: Type: Dual channel audio amplifiers.

6.4 Ceiling Ring Speakers: Flush mounting ceiling ring with attractive grill, spring

loaded mechanism for clamping with in built line matching transformer. Power: 6 W with taps

6.5 Column Speakers: Suitable for wall mounting the columns shall direct sound in the

horizontal plane. Power: 20 W with taps

B) Emergency Voice Communication System (EVC System) 1.0 Functionality:

1.1 EVC System shall provide Announcements for evacuating people during emergency on receipt of signal from fire alarm system.

1.2 Two way communication between handsets at the following areas:


I. All service corridors II. Ventilation fan, treated fresh air units room

III. All AHU room IV. All Electrical rooms V. All security rooms

VI. Fire control center (IBMS Room) 2.0 Components

2.1 Hand Sets

2.1.1. Handset stations shall be

I. Indoor wall / Column mounting type

II. Indoor wall / column mounting pilfer proof type and shall be provided in all

staircase area.

2.1.2. All switches shall be dust proof encapsulated micro-switches. The relays shall be dust proof encapsulated reed relays having guaranteed long life

2.1.3. For Desk/Wall/Pole mounting, indoor-outdoor type handset stations, the

mouthpiece receiver unit shall rest or cradle switch. On lifting the mouthpiece receiver unit off the handset station, the cradle switch shall automatically cut out the associated loudspeaker.

2.1.4. For Pilfer proof type handset stations, the mount piece microphone shall be

completely enclosed in the handset station. 2.1.5. Handset microphone shall be the low-impedance, dynamic type designed for

close talking and minimum acoustic feedback. The handset shall pick-up only the operator’s voice, and shall shield out extraneous noise.

2.1.6. Each mouthpiece/receiver unit shall be provided with retractable-coiled cord type

of cable of length not less than two metres. 2.1.7. Handset cord shall be terminated at the mild steel box on PVC terminal blocks. 2.1.8. Handset mouthpieces shall be protected from dirt and other foreign particles by

means filters. 2.1.9. Cradle switch and all associated equipment shall be completely assembled

and wired at factory

2.1.10. Rugged weatherproof and corrosion proof enclosures, fabricated out of 2mm mild steel sheets shall be provided for handset stations. Wall/Pole mounting facility shall be provided on the enclosure, earthing terminal, cable glands for terminating cables shall be provided.


2.1.11. The handset stations shall have an enclosure with a clear indication as “Emergency Communications Centre”. Access to this shall be only by authorised fire alarm personnel.

2.2 EVC CONTROL PANEL

2.2.1. The EVC control panel shall have the following features:

I. Continuous monitoring of the telephone circuits and trouble indications.

II. Announcements /Instructions to selected speakers III. Indication- audio & visual when any handset station is activated IV. EVC shall have provision for making pre recorded evacuation messages on getting

signal from fire alarm system and it shall stop when it is reset at the fire alarm panel. It shall also be possible to over ride this and make an impromptu announcement from the IBMS Control room.

2.3 WIRING

2.3.1. Microphone level circuits, line level circuits, loudspeaker circuits and power

circuits shall run in separate conduits. The conduits shall be medium duty PVC when run concealed and metal conduit when run exposed.

2.3.2. All audio lines, including microphone, line level and loud-speaker lines shall be

floating with respect to ground, neither side of the audio lines shall be grounded. No equipment employing single ended input shall be used in the system. If equipment has a single ended input, it must be provided with an input transformer to provide for floating condition.

2.3.3. Cables for both internal wiring and external connections shall be of high

conductivity stranded annealed copper conductor. PVC insulated, Extruded PVC inner sheathed, overall extruded PVC sheathed conforming to applicable standard. Voltage grade, size, no. of cores and screening shall be consistent with circuit requirements and shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR. All outdoor cables shall be armoured.

2.3.4. The cables shall be run in cable trays in the communication shaft and in conduits

upto the handsets/loudspeakers in each floor. The installation of the cable trays and conduits shall be in line with the requirements given in the electrical installation write-up.


Sub Section G (IBMS and BAS): Access Control System 1.0 OBJECTIVE:

The objective is to prevent unauthorized entry in to the facilities and keep track of the occupancy of the building all the time.

2.0 Functionality:

2.1 The system shall be designed and implemented to provide following the functionality:

I. Controlled Entries to defined access points II. Controlled exits from defined access points

III. Controlled entries and exits for visitors. IV. Configurable system for user defined access policy for each access point V. Record, report and archive each and every activity (permission granted and / or

rejected) for each access point. VI. Users defined reporting and log formats.

VII. Fail safe operation in case of no-power condition and abnormal condition such as fire, theft, intrusion, loss of access control, etc.

VIII. Day, Date, Time and duration based access rights shall be user configurable for each access point and for each user.

IX. One user can have different policy / access rights for different access points. X. It should be possible to use the access devices like biometrics, proximity card

readers, push buttons, manual switches, etc. in user defined combination for any and all of the access points.

2.2 Access control system shall be designed and integrated with the access gates / doors.

2.3 System offered shall use the reliable devices to provide trouble free operation.

System shall be compatible to the Proximity cards to be provided by the Bidder. System should have anti-pass back feature with time scheduling and zonal access defined.

2.4 The system should provide facility to generate reports based on but not limited to,

card number / card reader /date wise/ consolidated report.

3.0 Components:

3.1 Application Software: The application software shall mean the access & time management software that shall be supplied together with the system in order to provide a Graphical User Interface (GUI) for human – machine interface. It shall be same for both biometric and Proximity.

3.2 Door Controller: Suitable Door Controller system shall be provided. The door

controller system must be intelligent and capable of controlling one door having IN and OUT interface. Bidder to ensure that single point of failure shall affect the corresponding access door only. The door controller system shall store in its memory all the system parameters & card databases and shall be virtually independent of the network server for its regular operations. It shall also update the network server of the card entry / exit transaction data with time & date stamp when the network is online. If the network is off line, the door controller system shall store such data in its internal


memory & transfer the same to the server as and when it comes back on line. The controllers shall be connected over a network and the network shall be connected to PDM. The controllers shall be interlocked with the fire alarm system to release the access door in the event of fire.

3.3 Proximity Card Reader: The unit shall be capable of reading the card without

physical contact. The card reader shall only read the card data & pass it on to the door controller system for validation. The card reader, on its own may not take any decisions for granting / denying the access. Card reader shall have keypad for PIN facility and palm/thumb read for biometric as required. Two-factor authentication is envisaged for entry to the access points. Card reader shall have the indications for entry granted, entry denied and reader fault.

3.4 Proximity Card Reader with Keypad: The unit shall be capable of reading the card

without physical contact. The card reader shall only read the card data & pass it on to the door controller system for validation. The card reader, on its own may not take any decisions for granting / denying the access. The Card Reader shall have a RED/GREEN Led Indication to highlight the User Access. The card Reader must be slim and capable of directly mounting on the provided surface. The card reader must be able to communicate with the controller employing a RS232 Format. The Card Reader will have a Keypad/reader on the front facia for the PIN/biometric. The PIN/biometric information will be used for verification of the user along with the Card INPUT.

3.5 Proximity Card: The proximity card shall mean the access card that is capable of

being read without a direct contact by the proximity card reader. The card numbers shall be unique to each card & the systems at each facility shall permit access only to select card numbers, based on the programming.

3.6 Deleted 3.6 Biometric Cum Proximity Reader

a) The Biometric Reader shall provide anti pass back solution for proximity card reader by requiring a valid finger print for each card.

b) The unit shall store more than 4000 fingerprints. c) The unit shall have various communication option viz. RS 485, RS 232 &

Wiegand. d) The unit should not take more than 3 Sec for enrollment of Finger Prints. e) Verification Time should be less than 1 Sec f) The unit shall use Advanced Technology to maintain fingerprints

verification accuracy with dirt, cut, scarred, aged, wet & dry finger prints. g) It shall be possible to enroll or delete card in proximity mode or in Network

mode. h) Users Original Fingerprints enrollments shall be maintained & employable

across a variety of Finger Prints imaging devices i)

3.8 Door Position Sensors

Door position sensors shall be non contact type magnetic switches.


a) The position sensor shall consist of the magnetic device and the switching device both of which shall be recessed (flush); the magnet in the door and the switch in the style around the door.

b) The sensor shall withstand applications where doors / windows are subject to jarring and vibrations.

c) The switch shall provide an SPDT contact which shall be rated for at least 1Amp @ 24vac/dc.

d) The contacts shall not be subject to sticking or freezing in seldom used doors.

e) Contact transfer time shall be 10 milliseconds or better.

f) The sensor shall be hermetically sealed and shall work in moist or dusty environments.

g) Maximum spacing between the magnet and the switch without any degradation in the sensor’s performance shall be at least 1(one) inch.

6.4 Electromagnetic Locks

a) Electromagnetic locks shall comprise of the electromagnet which mounts on the fixed

frame and a strike plate which shall be mounted on the moving door or gate. The lock housings shall be vandal resistant and shall have an aesthetic appearance.

b) The lock shall come in a stainless steel case and all ferrous metal surfaces

c) The locks shall have built in mechanisms for reversing residual magnetism to ensure that the locks release instantly and fully on deactivation.

d) They shall also have built in mechanisms to suppress inductive kickbacks and EMI so that there is no arching over the switches or any interference with any nearby devices and also mechanisms to avoid stickiness due to ferrous metal aging.

e) The force offered by the electromagnet to secure the door shall be at least 300lbs. f) The electromagnetic lock shall be suitable for mounting on both doors as well as outdoor

gates g) The locks shall be low power consuming with a typical consumption of 250mA @ 12vdc

(or 125mA @ 24vdc)


Sub Section H (IBMS and BAS): Water Leak Detection System

1.0 General:

1.1 Water leak detection System shall be designed to protect the Air-conditioned premises and to alert the personnel about the leak in the AC systems. The system shall be capable of interfacing to Water leak detection sensors, condensation sensors & I/O modules.

1.2 The system shall also be designed to trip the AC when the sensor is activated. Events

should be clearly reported on LCD/LED display with full English language description of the nature of the fault in the panel.

2.0 COMPONENTS

2.1 The Water leak detection system shall comprise of Cable Sensors, Water Leak detection modules, Condensation detectors, I/O modules and sounders all connected to a Control Panel.

2.2 Control Panel

2.2.1. The control panel shall be Computerized 16 zone multiplex controller with a

facility to add on dialer and speech processor. The system shall be programmed, armed or disarmed through a control key pad. The control key pad shall have a 16 character LCD display for viewing various events. The code to arm or disarm the system shall be changed only by entering a master code.

2.2.2. The system shall have 16 zones and all the detectors shall be connected through a

2-core cable. Each area of the premises shall be divided into specific zones such that the user if required shall isolate any zone. A maintenance free rechargeable battery to take care of system’s power requirements whenever power fails shall back up the entire system. The system shall be totally tamper proof and shall activate an alarm if the control panel is opened, the sensors tampered with or if the system cables are cut even in the disarmed state. The system shall log 500 events and optionally printer shall be connected for generating reports.

2.2.3. The Detectors, I/O Modules, Remote Keypads and other Devices shall be

connected to a system on a single 2/4/6 Core Cable Bus to avoid individual cabling of zones. The system shall have a Buffer memory of minimum 250 events and log each event with exact date and time. The controller shall have a Serial Port for connecting to a computer.

2.2.4. The controller shall work on 220/240V AC power supply and it shall also have a

built in battery backup. A lithium battery shall back up the memory inside the controller. The controller shall work effectively over a temperature range of - 10 Deg. C to + 55 Deg. C. and 0 to 90% of Humidity.

2.2.5. The panel should have the facility to interface with an automatic two-channel

programmable speech dialer for verbal reporting of any alarm condition. It shall be


able to call four telephone numbers per channel. The programmable speech dialer shall have two alarm inputs and shall provide listen-in capabilities through the built-in microphone. The dialer shall have a built-in keypad for easy operation, programming and voice recording.

2.2.6. The system shall be totally tamperproof and shall activate an alarm if the control

panel is opened, the sensors tampered with or if the system cables are cut even in the disarmed state.

2.3 Water Leak Detection Sensors

2.3.1. Water Leak Detection sensors shall be able to mount in DIN rails, inside AHU’s,

power distribution units or other equipment where localized leak detection is required. The detectors shall be resistant to oxidation and erosion. The detector shall have relay output for connection to the controller. LED alarm indication shall also be provided. The detectors shall operate in AC or DC supply.

2.4 Cable Sensors

2.4.1. Cable sensors for use with water leak detectors shall be covered with plastic

netting to prevent short circuits when used in metal trays or conduits, and enables the cable to be folded at right angles to allow easy routing.

2.5 Sounder

2.5.1. The sounder shall give audible alarm when any sensor operates. It shall be complete with electronic oscillations, magnetic coil (sound coil) and accessories ready for mounting (fixing). The sound output from the Hooter should not be less than 85 decibels at the source point.

2.6 Glass Break Sensors

2.6.1. The sensor shall be capable of detecting glass break and signal the control panel. It

shall have the capability to differentiate real alarm form false alarm. 2.6.2. The Glass break sensor shall utilise advanced algorithm/technique such as CAIR

technology (Computerized Acoustic Image Recognition). The Sensor shall have software controlled Digital Signal Processing circuitry so that a multistage statistical analysis shall be done before deciding between false and real alarm. Diagnostic self test shall be done periodically to verify the electronic circuitry functions.


Sub Section I (IBMS and BAS): CCTV

1.0 Functionality

1.1 The system is required to monitor the Facility on continuous basis for the movement of people within and around the Facility.

1.2 The primary purpose of the system is to sense the abnormal movement / behavior of

the people so that the security and the concerned Facility operation staff can be alerted in case of abnormal behavior. This also provides the recording of the abnormal events such as fire, intrusion, etc.

1.3 To provide clear & accurate indication of an intruder or abnormal movement within

and around the Facility. 1.4 Activities to be recorded and the archival to be kept for at least 30 days. System should

include automatic back up to suitable device at regular (configurable) interval. Such recording shall be kept for analysis at a later date.

1.5 The Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV system) shall provide an on-line display

of video images on monitor. 1.6 Cameras with suitable lenses should be strategically located to view specific areas of

interest. 1.7 Bidder to specifically ensure that the CCTV system shall accurately cover the areas of

interest and serve the intended security purpose by providing clear and accurate image display on the video monitor at Security Room and Facility Manager’s room, during all the climatic conditions.

1.8 Cameras ancillary equipment shall be selected considering the levels of natural and

artificial lights. 1.9 Automatic video recording for the cameras displaying image of the area for which

Access Control System has generated an alarm shall be provided. Also, such cameras shall be automatically selected on to one of the Monitors in the BMS room, Reception, Datacenter Manager room.

1.10 The CCTV system shall be based on the use of fixed cameras integrated dome cameras

(fixed) and integrated pan/tilt/zoom cameras that can be controlled from monitor location.

1.11 The CCTV System shall be based on 625 lines 2:1 interlaced and shall be compatible

with the national and local TV broadcasting standards. 2.0 Components


2.1 Vari-focal Dome Camera

The Dome camera unit shall be 1/3” CCD Colour Dome camera and shall provide a minimum of 480 TV lines resolution. It shall have built-in 4-9mm varifocal lens The complete unit shall be housed in a integrated dome and base unit, both preferably made from injection moulded plastic. It shall be possible to adjust the camera head inside the dome in both the planes so that it can be wall or ceiling mounted. The camera shall operate on 24 V AC or 12 volts D.C.

2.2 Hi-Speed Pan / Tilt / Zoom Color Dome camera

2.2.1. The Dome camera system would be consisting of a ¼” image format, DSP color

CCD camera with a 18X Optical zoom and 12X digital zoom auto-iris lens delivering the power of 300X zoom to ensure that the finest details are captured. The Unit shall have a camera with 480 TV lines and auto focus lens, a high-speed pan/tilt in a dome enclosure. The High speed dome shall have an integral RS-485 communication channel for direct control via the multiplexer.

2.2.2. The auto dome shall contain an integral 360-degree pan/tilt device. This variable

speed pan/tilt shall be capable of operating in the manual mode to speeds up to 150 degree per second (variable speed). The camera shall operate on 24 volts A.C. The auto dome system shall be compatible with the multiplexer.

2.2.3. Monitors:

There shall be total of 2 (14” and 21”) monitors for each Digital Video Recorder one to view the multiplexed (21”) output second to view the switched (14”). This monitor should be located in the main control room. The monitor shall be positioned such that room lights and windows are minimized.

Plasma Television:

2.2.4. The monitors may also be built in to the control desk as appropriate. 2.2.5. Each of the monitors used at the main control room and operator status shall have

the following basic minimum requirements.

Size 42” diagonal Resolution 1024 x 768 Pixels – MINIMUM Voltage 230 V AC Mounting type Suitable for Wall /floor/ceiling mounting Remote control To be provided Built in speaker To be provided - 2 nos Input Composite video, S Video, SVGA, Co-axial

cable, Stereo Audio in and suitable PC input (15 Pin)

Output 4 Audio out, Video out Power Cord To be provide with earth pin.


I. The monitor shall be suitable for use as desktop units.

II. The monitors shall be high-resolution video monitors. The monitor shall have a bandwidth of at least 10 MHz (-3dB) and a horizontal resolution in the center of the picture 650 lines in the case of color monitor.

III. The monitors shall have the facilities to loop the video signal through the other

monitor.

IV. Each monitor shall have local control knobs and remote control equipment and panel for monitor controls associated with power on/off switch standby on/off switch and for adjustment brightness, contrast, horizontal hold, vertical hold etc.

V. Monitor shall be suitable for use as desktop units or can be rack mounted with

suitable racks as appropriate. 2.3 VIDEO & TELEMETRY CABLES:

2.3.1. The video signal shall be transmitted using co-axial cable and control of all zoom

lens and Pan-Tilt functions through twisted pair interconnected between receiver and DVR.

2.3.2. The cable shall be shielded or provided with facilities to avoid interference

between signals.

2.4 CABINETS:

2.4.1. CCTV cabinets shall be provided near set of monitors. The cable from the cameras shall be terminated in this cabinet from where these signals are distributed to the monitors.

2.4.2. All necessary video amplifiers, interfaces etc., that forms the part of the CCTV

system shall be installed in the cabinet.

2.5 Digital video recorder

2.5.1. The digital video recorder shall provide a high quality recorder capable of storage and play back of images from at a rate of up to 400FPS(PAL) and shall posses an internal watchdog, duplex operation, windows 2000 Operating system, watermarking of each frame, 8 alarm inputs, software configurable video motion detection and scheduled event recording.

2.5.2. The digital recorder shall comply or exceed the following design and performance

specifications:

I. The digital recorder shall have 4 recording modes ‘motion detection’, ‘time lapse’, “alarm input’ or ‘audio triggered’. All modes shall be disabled and enabled using scheduled configuration. Images shall be stored on IDE hard disks in encrypted mpeg format.


II. The recorder shall be built on a Pentium P4 >1.6GHz PC based platform with 128MB RAM.

III. The recorder shall run on Windows 2000 Professional.

IV. The recorder shall provide PAL or NTSC output, with recording resolutions of

320 X 240 or 640 X 480. The compressed image size shall vary from 5kB to 25kB depending on configuration.

V. The recorder shall provide 8 or 16 camera inputs and shall have a refresh rate of

up to 400FPS.

VI. The recorder shall be a full duplex recorder type with 8 or 16 camera inputs and shall have the ability to control PTZ functions

VII. The recorder shall allow cameras to be viewed on screen in 1,4,9 or a variety of

multi screen modes.

VIII. The recorder shall support simultaneous playback and record full duplex operation.

IX. The recorder shall have the facility for each hour to be divided into 4 time zones

and programmed separately. This shall provide 96 time zones per day, complete schedule runs for 1 week before it repeats itself. In addition to this 4 groups shall be programmable which shall enable up to 4 different recording speeds for each recording mode for each camera.

X. The recorder shall have the feature of an internal hardware watchdog.

XI. The recorder shall have password protections for up to 7 individual users, one of

which is the administrator. The remaining 6 users shall have any combination of the following 3 capabilities. (1) PTZ control (2) Search (3) Backup. In addition to this any combination of the recording cameras shall be enabled or disabled for each user.

XII. The recorder shall provide programmable motion detection. Each camera shall

be customized for specific ‘motion triggered’ recording rates with up to 50 areas of motion and any ‘one’ of 10 levels of sensitivity.

XIII. The recorder shall have 8 hard-wired alarm inputs, which shall be capable of

configuring globally as normally open or normally closed. each of these inputs shall be assigned to any or all of the cameras to trigger recording at custom record rates. up to 5 seconds of pre-alarm shall also be available on each camera.

XIV. The recorder shall provide 8 dry contact outputs, each of which shall be

associated with any or all of the camera inputs and/or alarm inputs.

XV. The recorder shall provide an extremely flexible scheduling on a week-by-week basis. Each 24-hour period shall be divided into 15-minute blocks enabling


different configurations of recording triggers to be available during each 15-minute period.

XVI. The recorder shall provide 16 video inputs. It shall also have an additional

feature of 29-way D-type comport connectors, 2 mini din connectors for a PS2 mouse and keyboard, 15 ping VGA port for a monitor, a 25 pin printer port, 1 or 2 BNC spot monitor outputs (depending on model) and an RJ45 connector for networking. It shall also provide 8 push in connectors for alarm inputs and 8 for digital outputs.

XVII. The recorder shall provide onscreen controls for operation of PTZ cameras. All

fully functional cameras shall be controlled via a PC comport which shall use an additional converter to communicate via RS485/422

XVIII. The recorder shall provide an Ethernet port as standard. If required in addition

free client software shall supplied which enables remote control and connectivity via TCP/IP.

XIX. The recorder shall be tested to comply with FCC regulations.

XX. The recorder shall provide high quality recording in NTSC or PAL format at up

to 640 X 480 pixels per image. Recording speed should be atleast 240 fps.

XXI. The recorder shall provide a 32-bit true color (>16 million) at a screen resolution of 1024 X 768

XXII. The recorder shall have a built in watchdog that will automatically restart after a

power failure and begins to record as per its configured settings.

XXIII. The recorder shall provide the ability to manually ‘back up’ recorded data to hard disk or CD while the unit continues to record.

XXIV. The recorder shall provide up to eight 120GB internal hard disk drives or up to

several Terabytes using external RAID for extending the recording time.

XXV. The recorder shall be programmed using a keyboard and mouse via on screen menus.

XXVI. The recording of the recorders is watermarked and encrypted requiring backup

software to open and view them. In addition, images backed up in bitmap or JPEG format can be verified for authenticity

XXVII. The recorder shall be suitable for mounting on a standard 19” rack.

XXVIII. There shall be a network management Digital Video Recorder (DVR) if more

than DVR is required to allow viewing of cameras from multiple DVR’s in any combination.


Sub Section J (IBMS and BAS): FM 200/HFC 227 gas Suppression System 1.0 Scope of Tender

1.1 The contractor shall supply, install, test and put in operation FM 200/HFC 227 based fire suppression system. The fire suppression system shall include and not be limited to gas release control panel, CCOE approved seamless cylinders, discharge valve (with solenoid or pneumatic actuator) as the case may be, discharge pipe, non-return valve and all other accessories required to provide a complete operation system meeting applicable requirements of NFPA 2001 or ISO standards and installed in compliance with all applicable requirements of the local codes and standards.

1.2 The system design should be based on the specifications contained herein, NFPA

2001 & in accordance with the requirements specified in the design manual of the agent. The bidder shall confirm compliance to the above along with their bid.

1.3 The system shall be properly filled and supplied by an approved OEM (Original

Equipment Manufacturer)

1.4 Whereever FM 200 is mentioned It shall also mean the generic agent HFC 227

2.0 Design and Engineering:

2.1 FM 200 systems shall be designed taking the minimum design concentration of 7.0% (0.548 gm/m³) as applicable to class 'A' risks.

2.2 The system design must consider the limitations caused by the void height. The

bidder should clearly indicate the qty. of the gas in Kgs. to be used for the system. All voids within each hazard shall be discharged simultaneously. Each hazard shall have an independent system, unless otherwise specifically stated, when a centralized system with directional valves can be used.

2.3 FM 200 systems shall have a working pressure of 25 /42 bar.

2.4 A fill density between 0.85 Kg /Lit. to 1.1 Kg/Lit. should be considered for the agent to

be discharged within the specified time of 10 seconds. 2.5 The system engineering company should carry out the piping Isometric design and

validate the same with a hydraulic flow calculation generated by using the agent's design software. The appropriate fill density to be arrived at based on the same.

3.0 FM 200 Authentication

A certification (from the manufacturer of the agent or their direct distributor) on the genuinity and quality of the agent filled in the system procured should be submitted.

4.0 Refilling and Maintenance

In case of any leakage or accidental discharge of the agent, it should be possible to refill the cylinders in India itself. The contractor should indicate the source of refilling and time that will be taken for refilling and replacement.


5.0 Discharge Time

After ascertaining the discharge status on manual intervention the gas has to be fully discharged within 10 seconds for effective quenching of fire as per the relevant standards, the contractor has to ensure that the design meets this requirement. Once the discharge takes place there should be warning signs restricting personal from entering the protected area until the gas has been cleared from the area.

6.0 Materials and Equipments

6.1 All materials and equipments shall be from approved manufacturers and shall be

suitable for the performance of their respective functions.

6.2 The cylinders should be complete with all accessories. The contractor shall indicate the dimensions of the cylinders required for each area while quoting.

6.3 The number of nozzles and their positions must be chosen so that the design

concentration is established everywhere in the enclosure. 6.4 The gas release panel should have manual override and manual release lever.

7.0 Cylinder

7.1 The cylinder shall be high pressure, seamless steel gas cylinder, flat type, concave

bottom as per IS 7285 complete with neck ring. Welded and non-CCE approved cylinders will not be accepted.

7.2 As per the regulations of the Chief Controller of Explosives (CCE) Nagpur, any

system which has a working pressure above 19 bar (280 psi) will require the use of seamless cylinders that have been duly approved by the CCE, Nagpur.

7.3 The maximum fill density of FM 200 in a cylinder shall not be less than 0.85 kg/lit. and

not exceed 1.1 Kg/Lit. of internal volume. Appropriate fill density shall be chosen based on the cylinder location and piping retrofit. The hydraulic calculations should prove that the fill density is appropriate and total discharge will take place within 10 seconds.

7.4 The cylinders shall be super-pressurized with dry nitrogen to 42/25 bar at 20°C. The

cylinder shall be capable of withstanding any temperature between -30° C and 70°C.

7.5 Cylinder shall be mounted according to manufacturer recommendations. 7.6 The cylinder shall withstand Hydrostatic test pressure upto 250 bar and maximum

working pressure at 15°C shall be 150 bar.

8.0 Valves

The discharge valve shall be approved or listed for use with FM 200. All the gaskets, O-ring, sealant and other valve component shall be constructed of materials compatible with the clean agent. The system should be engineered using hardware approved for use with FM systems. This would include main discharge valve, solenoid, check valve / non-return valve and pneumatic actuators.


9.0 Pipes & Fittings

All Pipes shall be of ASTM - A-106, Gr: B, schedule - 40 seamless Mild Steel Pipes and fittings shall be as per ASTM-A-105 standard.

10.0 Discharge Nozzle

Nozzle shall control the flow of FM 200 to ensure high velocity, proper mixing in the surrounding air and uniform distribution of the agent throughout the enclosure. The number of nozzles and their positions must be chosen so that the design concentration is maintained everywhere in the enclosure. Nozzle shall be located where they can be adequately supported on walls, ceiling or structural members. Software generated calculation supporting the nozzle design shall be submitted by the successful bidder before signing of contract.

11.0 Documentation

11.1 The Contractor should prepare & submit the piping Isometric drawing and support the same with a hydraulic flow calculation generated by using the agent's design software. The calculations shall validate the fill density assumed by the contractor.

11.2 The bidder shall also submit calculations to evidence the qty of agent considered for

the system. 11.3 The contractor must submit, along with the supply invoice, quality certificate of

authenticity/quality of the gas from the gas manufacturer supported by a gas chromatography test report from the manufacturer of the agent with respect to sample drawn from the corresponding production batch.

11.4 The contractor should provide, as part of handing over, the as-built drawing, operation

manual and maintenance manual. The as-built drawing shall exactly match the Isometric drawing submitted with the flow calculation prior to commencement of work.


Sub Section K (IBMS and BAS): Ultrasonic Pest Repellent System

1.0 Console:

The console (controller) shall have power card with 3-pin power supply of 2.5 Mtr long. All the subsystem shall be connected through this system. The pest repellers shall be electronic transmitters of high frequency sound waves of above 20 Hz frequency. Each controller shall support the minimum of 12 Satellites.

2.0 Specification for Satellites:

Each Satellite shall cover the area of minimum 300 Sqft and height of ceiling of Maximum 10 feet. The system shall be mounted in a suitable size angle wherever necessary. The system shall be capable of withstanding the high temperature in false ceiling and low temperature in cooled area. The system shall have self-testing facility at own with an audible range.


SUB-SECTION-L

INPUT AND OUTPUT SUMMARY FOR BAS.

FUNCTIONS

Sl.NO

DESCRIPTION

AI AO

DI

DO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

CONTROL/ MONITORING

LOCATION

1 DDC TYPE - A (For chiller) - 1 No

Chillers: -3 NOS

1 Chiller ON/OFF command.

3

*

Command from PC/DDC to the chiller MCC panel.

2 Chiller ON/OFF status. 3

* From chiller

panel

3 Chiller Auto / Manual status. 3 * signal from A/M

switch.

4 Chiller trip status.

3 *

signal from potential free contact.

5 Motorized Vavle ON/OFF Command

3 *


6 Motorized Vavle ON/OFF Status 3

7

Immersion type Temp sensor for In and out 6

*

Signal from Immersion type Temp sensor .

Primary Chilled Water Pumps- 4 Nos

8

Primary Chilled Water pumps ON / OFF command.

4

*

Command from PC/DDC to the primary CHW Pumps panel.

9

Primary Chilled Water pumps ON / OFF Status.

4 *

Differential pressure switch.

10

Primary Chilled Water pumps Auto / Manual status.

4 *

signal from A/M switch.

11

Primary Chilled Water pumps trip status.

4 *


12

Immersion type Flow switch

4

*

signal For dry run status

AHU ROOM-1 AT SECO

ND FLOO

R.


13

Secondary Chilled Water Pumps- 3 nos

14

Secondary CHW pumps ON / OFF Command.

3

* Command from PC/DDC to the MCC panel.

15

Secondary CHW pumps ON / OFF status.

3 *

Differential pressure switch.

16

Secondary CHW pumps VFD speed Control.

3

*

Proportional signal from DDC to the VFD panel.

17

Secondary CHW pumps VFD speed feedback. 3

*

signal from VFD.

18 Secondary CHW pumps trip status.

3 *

VFD trip status .

19

Secondary CHW pumps A/M status & Bypass status.

6 *

signal from A/M switch.

20 Immersion type Flow switch

3 *

signal for Dry Run status

21

Differential pressure Switch across the supply & return headers.(4 nos Pr Pump, 3 Nos Sec pump)

7

*

Signal from DP switch for flow.

22

Differential pressure sensor across the common supply & return headers. 2

*

Differential pressure sensor.

23 CHW flow measurement 1

*

Pulse O/P from flow meter.

24 MCC power supply status.

1 *

Command from PC/DDC to the MCC panel.

Total 12 3 51 13

2 TYPE - B ( For 1NO AHU with VFD.) -

4Nos

1 AHU ON/OFF Command. 1 * At local control

panel

2 AHU ON/OFF Status. 1 * At local control

panel

3 AHU Auto/Manual Status 1 * At Auto / Manual switch

4 Filter status. 1 * DP switch

5 RA Temparature status 1 *

From Temparature sensor

6 RA Rh status 1 * From Rh sensor

7 CHW 2-Way Valve Control. 1

* 2 Way Valve

REF

DDC

LOCATION

DRAWING.


with Actuator

8 Fire trip status. 1 * From Fire Relay

9 Fire Damper On/Off Status

1

*

At local control panel

10 VFD speed control. 1 * At VFD Panel

11 VFD speed refference. 1 * At VFD Panel 12 VFD trip status. 1 * At VFD Panel

13 Duct static pressure sensor. 1 * Pressure sensor

14 VFD Bypass status. 1 * At VFD Panel

Total 4 2 7 1

3 TYPE - C (3 Nos AHU's/CAHU with

Starter ) - 2 Nos


panel

2 AHU ON/OFF Status. 3 * At local control panel






6 CHW 2-Way Valve Control. 3 * 2 Way Valve

with Actuator 7 Fire trip status. 3 * From Fire Relay

8 Fire Damper On/Off Status

3

*

*

At local control panel


REF DDC LOCATION

DRAWING.

Total 9 3 15 3

4 TYPE -D(4 Nos CAHU's with Starter

)- 1 No


panel

2 AHU ON/OFF Status. 4 * At local control panel






6 CHW 2-Way Valve Control. 4 * 2 Way Valve

with Actuator

7 Fire trip status.

4

*

From Fire Relay

REF DDC LOCATION

DRAWING.


8 Fire Damper On/Off Status 4 * At local control panel


Total 12 4 20 4

5 TYPE -E (22 Nos PAC )- 1 No

1 AHU ON/OFF Command.

22

*

At local control panel PAC

ROOM AT 1ST FLOOR

Total 0 0 0 22 6 TYPE -F (7 Nos PAC )- 1 No

1 AHU ON/OFF Command.

7

*

At local control panel PAC

ROOM AT 1ST FLOOR

Total 0 0 0 7 The IBMS vendor to note above I/O summary before quoting for the job. The HVAC system will be executed through a different agency during the course of the building interior jobs.


SUB-SECTION – M

I/O SUMMARY

SECTION I: I/O LIST FOR HT/LT ELECTRICAL MONITORING

S.No. DESCRIPTION DI AI STATUS ALARM CONTROL LINK LOCATION

SUBSTATIION FUNCTIONS

1.0 11KV SWITCHGEAR SIGNALS (HPCL HT PANEL SIDE)

1.1 11 KV INCOMING VCB 630A 350 MVA

ON/OFF/Auto trip - functions 3 *

Incoming HT voltage/current/frequency,power,MVA - Measurements 5 *

1.2 MICROPROCESSOR BASED RELAYS - Trip circuit Un-Healthy 1 *

1.3 MANUAL OPERATION STATUS - 1 *

1.4 11 KV RECEIVING VCB 630A 350 MVA

ON/OFF/trip - functions 3

Incoming HT voltage/current/frequency,power,MVA - Measurements 5

1.5 MANUAL OPERATION STATUS-on/off 2

1.6 MICROPROCESSOR BASED RELAYS - Trip circuit Un-Healthy 2

BATTERY CHARGER:

1.7 BATTERY CHARGER - Mains on/ DC supply on/fails 3 *

Signals are to be

acquired from Circuit Breakers &

Relays over serial interface. Electrical contractor shall make available CBs and

relays with RS 485 port and MODBUS

RTU PROTOCOL

SUB-STATION

BLDG- HT

ROOM


1.8 BATTERY VOLTAGE -Measurement 1 *


MAIN POWER CONTROL CENTER

2.0 433 V INCOMING FEEDERS For TRANSFORMERS

2.1 INCOMING 433 V 3200 AMPS ACBS

2.2 ON/OFF/Auto trip - functions 3 *

2.3 Incoming LT voltage/current/frequency,power,MVA - Measurements 5 *


2.5 MANUAL OPERATION STATUS 2 *

BUSCOUPLER: - 1 NO

2.6 BUS Coupler - On/off/trip 3 *

2.7 MANUAL OPERATION STATUS - On/off 2 *

DG INCOMER feeders: - 2 NOS

2.8 DG INCOMER - ACBS - On/off/trip 6 *

2.9 Incoming LT voltage/current/frequency,KW, kVA - Measurements 15 *


3.1 MANUAL OPERATION STATUS- 3 *

Signals are to be

acquired from Circuit Breakers &

Relays over serial interface. Electrical contractor shall make available CBs and

relays with RS 485 port and

MODBUS RTU

PROTOCOL

SUB-STATION

BLDG- MPCC ROOM

4.0 UPS MONITORING


1.0

STATUS MONITORING, VOLTAGE, CURRENT, LOAD, BATTERY VOLTAGE ETC 6 NOS 200 AND 2 NOS 100 KVA UPS - Total around 80 soft points

RS 485 port and MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL to be provided by UPS vendor

Ground floor UPS room


2.0

KW. Voltage, Amps from each feeder through DATA Load manager meter - Total 28 feeder each 5 soft points = 140 soft points

*

RS 485 port and MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL to be provided by Electrical vendor AT METER LEVEL

SUB-STATION

BLDG- MPCC.

The wiring

shall be takenout

and terminted at one common chamber

by electrical vendor.

3.0 DG set - ON/Off status, KW, Amps, Voltage, Frequency etc through PLC - Approximately - 50 soft point

RS 485 port and MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL to be provided by Electrical vendor IN PLC PANEL

SUB-STATION

BLDG- MPCC ROOM

Total 39 31

DI = DIGITAL INPUTS AI= ANALOG INPUTS


SECTION-II

I/O LIST FOR /LT ELECTRICAL MONITERING

S.No. DESCRIPTION DI AI STATUS ALARM CONTROL LINK

4.00 433V OUTGOING FEEDERS - On/off/Trip status

LIFT FEEDER- 2NOS 6

4.10 FIRE HYDRANT PANEL--1 3 *

4.20 CHILLER NO.1,2,3, AND STAND BY FEEDER 12 *

4.30 CHILLER PUMPS PANEL - 2 NOS 6 *

4.40 WORKSTATION UPS- 2NOS 6 *

4.50 APFC PANEL - 2 NOS 6 *

4.60 SPARES- 4 NOS 12 *

4.70 SUBSTATIION PANEL 3 *

4.80 EMERGENCY LIGHTING FEEDER 3 *

4.90 AC PANELS- 5 NOS 15

5.00 LIGHTING AND POWER FEEDER - 2NOS 6

5.10 UPS FEEDERS- 2NOS 6

Thorugh DDC

controllers. BMS vendor

to provide the controller

along with wiring.

Electrical vendor to

provide the necessary

Potential free contact in the each breakers. The wiring

shall be takenout and terminted at one common chamber by

electrical vendo


SECTION-III

WATER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM I/O LIST

FUNCTIONS

Sr No. DESCRIPTION AI DO AO STATUS ALARM CONTROL CONTROL/

MONITORING LOCATION

1 Pump ON/OFF - - 2 *

2

Pump trip,ON/OFF status 4 - - *

3

Linear levels for all the sumps and tanks - 2 - *

THROUGH DDC. Local display shall be provided indicating water level and pumps status

UG SUMP AREA AND TERRACE OH TANK

Total 4 2 2


SECTION-IV

LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - I/O LIST FUNCTION

Sr No. DESCRIPTION

DI AI DO AO STATUS ALARM CONTROL

CONTROL / MONITORING

LOCATION

I

LIGHTING MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM - Controller-1

1 External Street Lighting & SUB

STATION

FAÇADE LIGHTING SUB

STATION

Lighting MCCB ON/OFF 5 - 5 - * *

ON/OFF Contactor shall be

provided by the Electrical

vendor. Controllojng through DDC

by BMS vendor

SUB STATION

Controller-2 - 6 sets

2

Incomer MCCB switch on/OFF at Ground floor, Second floor LSSB 2 2

3

Induvidual circuit ON/OFF controlls - Each controller - 20 circuits 20 20

At floor level, shall be

provided by the Electrical vendor.

Controllojng through DDC

by BMS vendor At floor level

TOTAL 27 - 27 -


SECTION-V

FIRE FIGHTING PUMPS I/O LIST

FUNCTION

Sr.No DESCRIPTION DI DO AI AO STATUS ALARM CONTROL CONROL /MONITORING

A) HYDRANT and SPRINKLER PUMPS:

1

JOCKEY PUMP: -1 NOS

Pump Trip /ON/OFF Status 3 *

2

HYDRANT PUMP:- 2NOS

Pump Trip ON/OFF Status 6 *

3

SPRINLER PUMP STANDBY PUMP- 2 NOS

Pump Trip/ ON/OFF Status 6 *

TOTAL 15

Status monitoring through DDC. Suitable potential-free contacts shall be made available by the Fire Fighting contractor


SECTION-VI

I/O LIST FOR LIFTS

FUNCTION

Sr. NO DISCRIPTION SP DI AI DO AO STATUS ALARM CONTROL

CONTROL /MONITORING

LOCATION

1

Monitor alarm bell status of lifts 2 * -

2

Monitor Fireman's emergency operation status 2 * -

3

Monitor operation of elevator in 'Attendant mode' 2 * -

4

Monitor lift under inspection/test drive 2 * -

5 Monitor lift under fire drive 2 * -

6 Trip Alarm 2 * -

7 ON/OFF Status 2 *

Lift machine room

8

FLOOR LEVEL Status(each lift 3 levels= 2 nos x 3 levels) 6 *

Total 20

For monitoring through DDC. Potential free contacts shall be made available by Elevators supplier.


SUB-SECTION N

SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS The following shall be verified/conducted during SAT

1) Checking of all system for completeness of supplies for both software & hardware. 2) Checking whether guaranteed performance of individual equipment/item is achieved as per

specification. 3) Checking if installation of the complete system is as per approved drawing. 4) Checking out of the equipment installations per the owner approved installation drawings

for each equipment/item and system as a whole. 5) Checking of interconnection, hardware and software configuration, system interfaces and

overall system function. Checking self diagnostic feature on individual equipment. 6) Loop checking: Field cable termination and inter cabinet cabling and termination. 7) Field tests. 8) Commissioning and on-line debugging of the system 9) Performance of integrated system including communication to remote location. 10) Test Run 11) Test Report

B) TRIAL RUN Vendor shall conduct trial run of his system for a minimum period of 5 days after the mechanical completion of job. The interface among the various equipments supplied by the BMS vendor and other vendors shall be established during these trial runs. These trial runs are conducted to verify the satisfactory performance of the system in its entirety. In case of major failure in the system, the trial run shall be repeated for a period of another 15 continuous days. After trial run site acceptance test (SAT) will be conducted and system shall be handed over. The project is deemed to be complete after the compliance of pending points of SAT. Acceptance Testing: A. A written acceptance test procedure (ATP) for testing the system components and


installation will be prepared by the contractor. The contractor shall be responsible for the performance of the ATP, demonstrating the function of the system and verifying the correct operation of all system components, circuits, and programming. Documentation: System documentation shall be supplied to the owner and shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. System record drawings and wiring details including one set of reproducible drawings, and a CD

ROM with copies of the record drawings in DXF format for use in a CAD drafting program. 2. System Operating, Installation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. System matrix showing input signals to output commands. 4. Provide a copy of the system program on a CD. STABILIZATION PERIOD After successful commissioning of the entire system, the system shall be observed for faultless working for a period of 15 days. If the following subsystems remain down for more than 2 hours in a day, the same shall be rectified by the vendor at his cost including the replacement of any equipment/components if required and the system shall be observed for a further period of 10 days for stabilization. These subsystems are :

1. BAS System 2. Access Control System 3. HT & LT Electrical System and UPS System 4. CCTV 5. Fire Alarm System & Aspiration Smoke Detection System 6. Gas Supression System 7. PA & EVC system 8. Water Managemnt System 9. Water Leak Detection System 10. Ultrasonic Pest Repeller System

However, during the stabilization period, incase of fault in any individual equipment which does not result in complete break down of any of the above subsystems or any other subsystems, the same shall be rectified within 24 hours of breakdown and restored back to operation and such fault will not be considered as major fault. At the end of stabilization period, vendor shall handover the entire system in fully working condition.


SUB-SECTION- O

COMPREHENSIVE ANNUAL MAINTENANCE CONTRACT The equipment supplied and installed will be maintained by contractor as follows:

1.1 REGULAR SERVICE:

All equipment will be checked and serviced 12 times a year. Each such preventive maintenance service shall mainly consist of:

• Checking general functioning of all the equipment and components of Building Managemnt

system • Break down call will be attended to as and when call upon by the owner.

The following will be included in Preventive Maintenance Contract:

• Free replacement of defective/worn out parts with new or serviceable parts. • Free over hauling/repairing of equipment at site/service station as and when necessary. • Reporting healthiness of the system and suggesting improvements if any • Repairs to or replacement of electrical installation like lungs, switch boards isolators,

panels, fuses, strip heaters with ammeters/voltmeters. • Any other consumable that is not exclusively mentioned above but not in the exclusion list.

1.2 RESPONSE TIME:

Any break-down call form the Owner must be attended as follows: If the call is made before 12.00noon, the breakdown must be attended to on the same day

before 6.00 PM. If the call is made after 12.00noon, the breakdown must be attended by the next day before 11.00 AM.

The nature of breakdown must be informed immediately to the Owner. The response time clause must be strictly adhered to failing to which HPCL reserves to get the defects rectified at contractors risk & cost.

1.3 PURCHASE ORDER:

A separate purchase order shall be released for comprehensive Annual Maintenance after completion of Defect liability Period on the rates quoted by the contractor and accepted by HPCL along with the terms and conditions mentioned herewith. For evaluation purpose AMC rates/amount shall be considered for arriving at the lowest offer. The contractor shall have to agree to the above.


SUB-SECTION- P TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CONTROL / SIGNAL CABLES

1.0 SCOPE

This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at works, inspection and delivery

at site of LT- Copper conductor, XLPE insulated, extruded PVC inner sheathed, armoured,

extruded FRLS outer sheathed Control and Signal cables.

2.0 CONTROL CABLES

1100 V grade multicore, 1.5sq.mm stranded Multistrand conductor, PVC insulated and extruded PVC inner sheathed and extruded FRLS PVC outer sheathed.

3.0 CONDUCTOR

The conductor shall be stranded Annealed Tinned stranded Copper as specified in the Schedule of Quantities. It shall be smooth, uniform in quality and free from scale and other defects. The stranded conductor shall be clean and reasonably uniform in size and shape. The conductor shall be either circular or shaped.

4.0 CONDUCTOR SHIELD

Conductor shield shall be extruded in the same operation as the insulation. The semi-

conductor polymer shall be cross linked.

5.0 INSULATION

Insulation shall be Cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) / PVC for Control cable as specified

in the Schedule of quantities.

6.0 OUTER SHEATH:

All cables specified in the Schedule of Quantities shall have Outer sheath with Fire retardant low smoke (FRLS) PVC compound to reduce the Fire hazard. The FRLS outer sheath material shall meet the following requirements:

a. Oxygen Index - 29 when tested at 27 + 2°C as per


ASTM – D – 2863 -77

b. Temperature Index - Minimum 250°C at Oxygen Index 21 – as Per NES 715.

c. Flammability - As per IEC – 332 – 1. It shall also

Pass Flammability Test as per Class F3 of Swedish Standard SS – 424 - 1475.

d. Smoke Density -Smoke density rating shall not be

More than 60%. When tested as per ASTM – D – 2843 – 77 (1988).

e. Acid gas generation - Less than 20% by weight as per IEC – 754 – 1.

The sheath shall be resistant to water, UV radiation, fungus, termite and rodent attacks. The colour of the outer sheath shall be black.

7.0 INSULATION SHIELD

This shall preferably be of the strippable, triple-extruded thermo set type.

8.0 ARMOUR

The Armour may be of galvanized steel wires or galvanized steel strips as per IS.

9.0 SERVING

The cable serving shall protect the cable sheath and armour from electrolysis caused by stray currents, and from galvanic action. It shall also protect the cable from mechanical

10.0 GENERAL

The cable shall withstand all mechanical and thermal stresses under steady state and

transient operating conditions.

damage and corrosion 11.0 TESTS 11.1 Routine Tests (To be performed on each drum length)

All tests as per relevant IS shall be conducted and shall be witnessed by PMC/AEC. 11.2 Type Tests

The Bidder shall furnish two (2) copies of type test certificates conducted on similar cables

along with the Bid.


a. Partial discharge test b. Bending test followed by partial discharge test c. Dielectric power factor as function of voltage d. Dielectric power factor as function of temperature

e. Heating cycle test followed by dielectric power factor as a function of voltage and partial discharge tests.

f. Impulse withstand test

g. High voltage test.

12.0 Installation

Cables shall be laid in the routes marked in the drawings. Where the route is not marked, the

contractor shall mark it out on the drawings and also on the site and obtain the approval of the

Architect / Client before laying the cable. Procurement of cables shall be on the basis of

actual site measurements and the quantities shown on the schedule of work shall be regarded

as a guide.

All cables shall be new without any kinds or visible damage. The manufacturers name,

insulating material, conductor size and voltage class shall be marked on the surface of the

cable at every 600mm centres.

Cables rising indoors shall be laid on walls, ceiling, inside shafts, or trenches. Single cables

laid shall be fixed directly to walls or ceiling. All supports shall be at not more than 500 mm.

Where numbers of cables are run, necessary cable trays shall be provided wherever shown.

Cables laid in built-up trenches shall be on steel supports. Aluminium identification tags

shall be provided at every 20 m.

Cables shall be bent to a radius not less than 12 times the overall diameter of the cable, or in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations whichever is higher.

In case of direct buried cables, the cable route shall be parallel or perpendicular to roadways,

walls, etc., Cables shall be laid in an excavated, graded trench, over a sand cushion to provide

protection against abrasion. Width of excavated trenches shall be as per drawings. Backfill

over the cables shall be sifted earth 90% compacted cables shall be buried with a minimum

earth cover of 600 mm. The cables shall be provided with cable markers at every 20 metres.


The general arrangement of cable laying is shown on drawings. All cables shall be full runs

from panel to panel without any joints or splices. Cables shall be identified at end

terminations indicating the feeder number and the Panel / Distribution Board from where it is

being laid. All cable terminations for conductors upto 4 sq.mm may be insertion type .Cables

terminations shall have The end-terminations shall be insulated with a minimum of six-

half-lapped layers of PVC tape. Cable armouring shall be earthed at both ends.


J. APPROVED MAKES


LIST OF APPROVED MAKE

Description Make

Fire Alarm Detectors/ Control Modules/ Monitor Modules/ Fault Isolator

Notiifier/Simplex/Johnson/siemens

Fire Control Panel Notiifier/Simplex/Johnson/siemens Access Controllers Honeywell/Cardkey/Casi

Rusco/simens Copper Conductor Thermopads/ ECC/ Control

Cablematez/ Beldon/ Teleflex/

Communication Cables RR Kable, Finolex, Teleflex, Polycab

Computer for CMS’s HP/IBM /DELL Printer HP/Canon/Epson Public Address System Philips/ Ahuja/ Bose Eslectronics/

Bosch CCTV Equipments Honeywell/Affiance/I-watch/Panasonic/

Samsung/simens GUI Software Johnson / Honeywell / siemens/TAC /

Distech DDC Controllers Johnson / Honeywell / siemens/TAC /

Distech Interfaces / Router / Gateways / Network Controllers :

Johnson / Honeywell / TAC / Distech

Immersion Temp Sensors Simens/Johnson / Honeywell / TAC / Sontay

Room Temp Sensors Johnson / Honeywell / TAC / Sontay Outside Air Temp Sensors Johnson / Honeywell / TAC / Sontay Water Diff. Pressure Switch Johnson / Honeywell / TAC / Sontay Water Diff. Pressure Sensor Johnson / Honeywell / TAC / Sontay Spring Return Fire Damper Actuator

Johnson / Honeywell / TAC / Sontay

Air Differential pressure sensor Johnson / Honeywell / TAC / Sontay

Air Differential Pressure Switches

Johnson / Honeywell / TAC / Sontay

Flow Meter Johnson / Honeywell / TAC / Sontay/ Data Industrial / Forbes Marshall

Duct Smoke Detectors Notifier/Honeywell / Johnson/simens/system sensor

Carbon mono-oxide sensor Johnson / Honeywell / TAC / Distech / Sontay

Level Switches Johnson / Honeywell / TAC / Distech / Sontay


Description Make

Copper Conductor control cable / Communication cable / Signal cable.

Finolex / Heatflex / Finecore /Sothwest Wire & Cable

APPROVED MAKES FOR INTRUSION / WATER LEAK

Control Panel Texecom /JE /Sontay Multi I/O Module Verifier / JE / Sontay Cable Sensors Sontay or equivalent Water leak detection sensors Sontay or Equivalent Condensation Detectors Sontay or equivalent Sounder System sensor/LBS/Sontay Glass break sensor Visonic / Glass tech LIST OF MAKES FOR FM-200.

Cylinders with Valve Assembly Worthington / Norris / heiser

Electric Control Head Cerberus / Kidde Duegra / Hygood Chemetron.

Pressure Operated Control Head

Cerberus / Kidde Duegra / Hygood Chemetron.

Discharge Nozzle Cerberus / Kidde Duegra / Hygood Chemetron.

Master Cylinder Adopter Kit Cerberus / Kidde Duegra / Hygood Chemetron.

Flexible Discharge Hose Cerberus / Kidde Duegra / Hygood Chemetron.

Manifold Check Valve Cerberus / Kidde Duegra / Hygood Chemetron.

Actuation Hose Cerberus / Kidde Duegra / Hygood Chemetron.

FM 200 Gas/HfC 227 Great Lakes Chemical Corporation/approved equivalant

Seamless Pipe Maharastra Seamless/ BHEL/ Eqvt. Gas Release Panel pcd / Notifier / Safezone Detector System Sensor / Apollo / Notifier Cables Teleflex / Eqvt.


K. ENVIRONMENT,

HEALTH AND

SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

(EHS POLICY)


SAFETY , HEALTH & ENVIRONMENT POLICY

SPECIFICATION FOR SAFETY HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT (SHE) MANAGEMENT

CONTENTS ________________________________________________________________________ CLAUSE NO. TITLE ________________________________________________________________________ 1.0 SCOPE 2.0 REFERENCES 3.0 REQUIREMENT OF SAFETY, HEALTH AND

ENVIRONMENT (SHE)

3.1 MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY

3.2 HOUSE KEEPING

3.3 SAFETY, HEALTH & ENVIRONMENT

4.0 DETAILS OF SHE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

BY CONTRACTOR

4.1 ON AWARD OF CONTRACT

4.2 DURING JOB EXECUTION


1.0 SCOPE

This specification establishes the Safety Health and Environment (SHE) management requirement to be complied with by the Contractors during construction.

Requirements stipulated in this specification shall supplement the requirements of SHE Management given in relevant Act (s) / legislations. General Conditions of Contract (GCC), Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) and Job Specifications. Where different documents stipulate different requirements, the most stringent shall be adopted.

2.0 REFERENCES

This document should be read in conjunction with following:

- General Conditions of Contract (GCC) - Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) - Job Specifications

3.0 REQUIREMENTS OF SAFETY HEALTH & ENVIRONMENT (SHE) MANAGEMENT SYSTEM TO BE COMPLIED BY BIDDERS

3.1 MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY

3.1.1 The Contractor should have a documented SHE policy to cover commitment of their organization to ensure health, safety and environment aspects in their line of operations.

3.1.2 The SHE management system of the Contractor shall cover the SHE requirements including but not limited to what is specified under Para 1.0 and para 2.0 above.

3.1.3 Contractor shall be fully responsible for planning and implementing SHE requirements. Contractor as a minimum requirement shall designate / deploy the following to co-ordinate the above :

No. of workers deployed

Up to 250 - Designate one safety supervisor

Above 250 & up to 500 - Deploy one qualified and experienced safety Engineer / officer


Above 500 - One additional safety (for every 500 or less) engineer/officer as above.

Contractor shall indemnify & hold harmless Owner / HPCL & either representatives free from any and all liabilities arising out of non – fulfilments of SHE requirements.

3.1.4 The Contractor shall ensure that the Safety, Health and Environment (SHE) requirements are clearly understood & faithfully implemented at all levels at site.

3.1.5 The Contractor shall promote and develop consciousness for Safety , Health and Environment among all personnel working for the Contractor. Regular awareness, programme site meetings shall be arranged on SHE activities to cover hazards involved in various operations during construction.

3.1.6 Arrange suitable first aid measures such as First Aid Box, trained personnel to give First Aid, Stand by Ambulance or Vehicle and install fire protection measures such as : adequate number of steel buckets with sand and adequate fire extinguishers to the satisfaction of HPCL/Owner.

3.1.7 The Contractor shall evolve a comprehensive planned and documented system for implementation and monitoring of the SHE requirements. This shall be submitted to HPCL/Owner for approval. The monitoring for implementation shall be done by regular inspections and compliance to the observations thereof. The Contractor shall get similar SHE requirements implemented at his sub-contractor(s) work site/office. However, compliance of SHE requirements shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Any review / approval by HPCL/Owner shall not absolve contractor of his responsibility / liability in relation to all HSE requirements.

3.1.8 Non-Conformance on SHE by Contractor (including his Sub-contractors) as brought out during review/audit by HPCL/Owner representatives shall be resolved forthwith by Contractor. Compliance report shall be provided to HPCL/Owner.

3.1.9 The Contractor shall ensure participation of his Resident Engineer / Site-in-Charge in the Safety Committee / SHE Committees meetings arranged by HPCL/Owner. The compliance of any observations shall be arranged urgently. He shall assist HPCL/Owner to achieve the targets set by them on SHE during the project implementation.

3.1.10 The Contractor shall adhere consistently to all provisions of SHE requirements. In case of non-compliance or continuous failure in implementation of any of SHE provisions; HPCL/Owner may impose stoppage of work without any Cost & Time implication to Owner and/or impose a suitable penalty for non-compliance with a notice of suitable


period, up to a cumulative limit of 1.0% (one percent) of Contract Value with a maximum limit of Rs. 10 lakhs. This penalty shall be in addition to all other penalties specified else where in the contract. The decision of imposing stoppage work, its extent & monitory penalty shall rest with HPCL/Owner & binding on the Contractor.

3.1.11 All fatal accidents and other personnel accidents shall be investigated by a team of Contractor’s senior personnel for root cause & recommend corrective and preventive actions. Findings shall be documented and suitable actions taken to avoid recurrences shall be communicated to HPCL/Owner. Owner / HPCL shall have the liberty to independently investigate such occurrences and Contractor shall extend all necessary help and co-operation in this regard.

3.2 HOUSE KEEPING

3.2.1 Contractor shall ensure that a high degree of house keeping is maintained and shall ensure inter alia the followings wherever applicable:

a. All surplus earth and debris are removed/disposed off from the working areas to identified location(s).

b. Unused/Surplus Cables, Steel items and steel scrap lying scattered at different places within the working areas are removed to identified location(s).

c. All wooden scrap, empty wooden cable drums and other combustible packing materials, shall be removed from work place to identified location(s).

d. Roads shall be kept clear and materials like: pipes, steel, sand boulders, concrete, chips and bricks etc. shall not be allowed on the roads to obstruct free movement of men & machineries.

e. Fabricated steel structural, pipes & piping materials shall be stacked properly for erection.

f. Water logging on roads shall not be allowed.

g. No parking of trucks / trolleys, cranes and trailers etc. shall be allowed on roads which may obstruct the traffic movement.

h. Utmost care shall be taken to ensure over all cleanliness and proper upkeep of the working areas.


i. Trucks carrying sand, earth and pulverised materials etc. shall be covered while moving within the premises.

j Only properly designed steel scaffolding materials to be used for working at heights more than 3.0M . Double scaffolding using wooden ballis may be allowed for working at height less than 3.0M

3.3 SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT

3.3.1 The Contractor shall provide safe means of access to any working place including provisions of suitable and sufficient scaffolding at various stages during all operations of the work for the safety of his workmen, and, HPCL/Owner. Contractor shall ensure deployment of appropriate equipment and appliances for adequate safety and health of the workmen and protection of surrounding areas.

3.3.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all their staff and workers including their sub-contractor(s) shall wear Safety Helmet and Safety shoes. Contractor shall also ensure use of safety belt, protective goggles, gloves etc. by the personnel as per job requirements. All these gadgets shall conform to relevant IS specifications or equivalent.

3.3.3 Contractor shall ensure that a proper Safety Net System shall be used at appropriate locations. The safety net shall be located not more than 30 feet (9.0 metres) below the working surface at site to arrest or to reduce the consequences of a possible fall of persons working at different heights.

3.3.4 Contractor shall ensure that flash back arrester shall be used while using Gas Cylinders at site. Cylinders shall be mounted on trolleys.

3.3.5 The Contractor shall assign to his workmen, tasks commensurate with their qualification, experience and state of health for driving of vehicles, handling and erection of materials and equipments. All lifting equipments shall be tested certified for its capacity before use. Adequate and suitable lighting at every work place and approach there to, shall be provided by the Contractor before starting the actual operations at night.

3.3.6 Hazardous and/or toxic materials such as solvent coating, or thinners shall be stored in appropriate containers.

3.3.7 All hazardous materials shall be labelled with the name of the materials, the hazards associated with its use and necessary precautions to be taken.


3.3.8 Contractor shall ensure that during the performance of the work, all hazards to be health of personnel, have been identified, assessed and eliminated.

3.3.9 Chemical spills shall be contained & cleaned up immediately to prevent further contamination.

3.3.10 All personnel exposed to physical agents such as ionizing radiation, ultraviolet rays or similar other physical agents shall be provided with adequate shielding or protection commensurate with the type of exposure involved.

3.3.11 Where contact or exposure of hazardous materials could exceed limits or could otherwise have harmful affects, appropriate personal protective equipments such as gloves, goggles, aprons, chemical resistant clothing and respirator shall be used.

- A Crèche where 10 or more female workers are having children below the age of 6 years.

- Reasonable Canteen facilities are made available at appropriate location depending upon site conditions.

3.3.13 Suitable facilities for toilet, drinking water, proper lighting shall be provided at site and labour camps, commensurate with applicable Laws / Legislation.

3.3.14 Contractor shall ensure storage and utilization methodology of materials that are not detrimental to the environment. Where required Contractor shall ensure that only the environment friendly materials are selected.

3.3.15 All persons deployed at site shall be knowledgeable of and comply with the environmental laws, rules & regulations relating to the hazardous materials substances and wastes. Contractor shall not dump, release or otherwise discharge or dispose off any such materials without the express authorization of HPCL/Owner.

4.0 DETAILS OF SHE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM BY CONTRACTOR

4.1 On Award of Contract


The Contractor shall prior to start of work submit his Safety Health and Environment Manual or procedure and SHE Plans for approval by HPCL/Owner. The Contractor shall participate in the pre-start meeting with HPCL/Owner to finalise SHE Plans including the following :

- Job procedure to be followed by Contractor for activities covering. Handling of equipment, Scaffolding, Electric Installation, describing the risks involved, actions to be taken and methodology for monitoring each activity.

- HPCL/Owner review / audit requirement.

- Organization structure along with responsibility and authority records / reports etc. on SHE activities.

4.2 During job execution

4.2.1 Implement approved Safety Health, and Environment management procedure including but not limited to as brought out under para 3.0. Contractor shall also ensure to:

- arrange workmen compensation insurance, registration under ESI Act, third party liability insurance etc., as applicable.

- arrange all HSE permits before start of activities (as applicable) like hot work, confined space, work at heights, storage of chemical / explosive materials and its use and implement all precautions mentioned therein.

- submit timely the completed checklist on SHE activities, Monthly SHE report, accident reports, investigation reports etc. as per HPCL/Owner requirements. Compliance of instructions on SHE shall be done by Contractor and informed urgently to HPCL/Owner.

- ensure that Resident Engineer / Site-in-Charge of the Contractor shall attend all the Safety Committee / SHE meetings arranged by HPCL/Owner. Only in case of his absence from site that a second senior most person shall be nominated by him in advance and communicated to HPCL/Owner.

- display at site office and work locations caution boards, list of hospitals,

emergency services available.

- provide posters, banners for safe working to promote safety consciousness.


- carryout audits / inspection at sub contractor works as per approved SHE document and submit the reports for HPCL/Owner review.

- assist in SHE audits by HPCL/Owner, and submit compliance report.

- generate & submit HSE records / report as per SHE Plan.

- appraise HPCL/Owner on SHE activities at site.


L. EMD FORMAT


M. GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS

OF CONTRACT

(GTC)


GENERAL TERMS & CONDITIONS OF WORKS CONTRACT

1 PRELIMINARY 1.1 This is a Contract for execution of __________________ work at

_______________________. (please fill up the blanks) 1.2 The tenderer for the abovementioned item of work is

____________________________. (please give the name and address of the tenderer)

1.3 The terms and conditions mentioned hereunder are the terms and conditions of

the Contract for the execution of the work mentioned under item 1.1 above. 1.4 It is the clear understanding between Hindustan Petroleum Corporation

Limited and the tenderer ______________________________________ that (name and address of the tenderer) in case the tender of ______________________________________________________________ is (name and address of the tenderer) accepted by Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited and an intimation to that effect is so issued and also a Purchase Order is placed with ________________________________________________________

(name and address of the tenderer) this document will be termed as a Contract between the parties and terms and conditions hereunder would govern the parties interest.

1.5 Interpretation of Contract Documents: All documents forming part of the

Contract are to be taken mutually explanatory. Should there be any discrepancy, inconsistency, error or omission in the contract, the decision of the Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall be the final and the contractor


shall abide by the decision. The decision shall not be arbitrable. Works shown upon

the drawings but not mentioned in the specification or described in the specifications without being shown on the drawings shall nevertheless be deemed to be included in the same manner as if they are shown in the drawings and described in the specifications.

1.6 Special conditions of Contract : The special conditions of contract, if any provided

and whenever and wherever referred to shall be read in conjunction with General Terms and Conditions of contract, specifications, drawings, and any other documents forming part of this contract wherever the context so requires. Notwithstanding the subdivision of the documents into separate sections, parts volumes, every section, part or volume shall be deemed to be supplementary or complementary to each other and shall be read in whole. In case of any misunderstanding arising the same shall be referred to decision of the Owner/ Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and their decision shall be final and binding and the decision shall not be arbitrable.

It is the clear understanding that wherever it is mentioned that the Contractor shall

do/perform a work and/or provide facilities for the performance of the work, the doing or the performance or the providing of the facilities is at the cost and expenses of the work not liable to be paid or reimbursed by the Owner.

2. DEFINITIONS In this contract unless otherwise specifically provided or defined and unless a contrary

intention appears from the contract the following words and expressions are used in the following meanings;

2.1 The term "Agreement" wherever appearing in this document shall be read as

"Contract". 2.2 The "Authority" for the purpose of this Contract shall be the Chairman and Managing

Director or any other person so appointed or authorised. 2.3 The "Chairman and Managing Director" shall mean the Chairman and Managing

Director of HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED or any person so appointed, nominated or designated and holding the office of Chairman & Managing Director.


2.4 The "Change Order" means an order given in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge or by

Owner to effect additions to or deletion from or alterations into the Work. 2.5 The "Construction Equipment" means all appliances and equipment of whatsoever

nature for the use in or for the execution, completion, operation or maintenance of the work except those intended to form part of the Permanent Work.

2.6 The "Contract" between the Owner and the Contractor shall mean and include all

documents like enquiry, tender submitted by the contractor and the purchase order issued by the owner and other documents connected with the issue of the purchase order and orders, instruction, drawings, change orders, directions issued by the Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for the execution, completion and commissioning of the works and the period of contract mentioned in the Contract including such periods of time extensions as may be granted by the owner at the request of the contractor and such period of time for which the work is continued by the contractor for purposes of completion of the work.

2.7 "The Contractor" means the person or the persons, firm or Company whose tender has

been accepted by the Owner and includes the Contractor's legal heirs, representative, successor(s) and permitted assignees.

2.8 The "Drawings" shall include maps, plans and tracings or prints thereof with any

modifications approved in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge and such other drawings as may, from time to time, be furnished or approved in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.9 The "Engineer-in-Charge or Site-in-Charge" shall mean the person appointed or

designated as such by the Owner and shall include those who are expressly authorised by the owner to act for and on its behalf.

2.10 "The Owner" means the HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED

incorporated in India having its Registered office at PETROLEUM HOUSE, 17, JAMSHEDJI TATA ROAD, BOMBAY - 400020 and Marketing office at ____________________________________________ or their successors or assignees.

2.11 The "Permanent Work" means and includes works which form a part of the work to

be handed over to the Owner by the Contractor on completion of the contract.


2.12 The "Project Manager" shall mean the Project Manager of HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM

CORPORATION LIMITED, or any person so appointed, nominated or designated. 2.13 The "Site" means the land on which the work is to be executed or carried out and such

other place(s) for purpose of performing the Contract. 2.14 The "Specifications" shall mean the various technical and other specifications attached

and referred to in the tender documents. It shall also include the latest editions, including all addenda/corrigenda or relevant Indian Standard Specifications and Bureau Of Indian Standards.

2.15 The "Sub-Contractor" means any person or firm or Company (other than the

Contractor) to whom any part of the work has been entrusted by the Contractor with the prior written consent of the Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- Charge and their legal heirs, representatives, successors and permitted assignees of such person, firm or Company.

2.16 The "Temporary Work" means and includes all such works which are a part of the

contract for execution of the permanent work but does not form part of the permanent work confirming to practices, procedures applicable rules and regulations relevant in that behalf.

2.17 The "Tender" means the document submitted by a person or authority for carrying out the

work and the Tenderer means a person or authority who submits the tender offering to carry out the work as per the terms and conditions.

2.18 The "Work" shall mean the works to be executed in accordance with the Contract or

part thereof as the case may be and shall include extra, additional, altered or substituted works as maybe required for the purposes of completion of the work contemplated under the Contract.

3. SUBMISSION OF TENDER 3.1 Before submitting the Tender, the Tenderer shall at their own cost and expenses visit

the site, examine and satisfy as to the nature of the existing roads, means of communications, the character of the soil, state of land and of the excavations, the correct dimensions of the work facilities for procuring various construction and other material and their availability, and shall obtain information on all


matters and conditions as they may feel necessary for the execution of the works as intended by the Owners and shall also satisfy of the availability of suitable water for construction of civil works and for drinking purpose and power required for fabrication work etc. Tenderer, whose tender may be accepted and with whom the Contract is entered into shall not be eligible and be able to make any claim on any of the said counts in what so ever manner for what so ever reasons at any point of time and such a claim shall not be raised as a dispute and shall not be arbitrable.

3.2 The Tenderer shall be deemed to have satisfied fully before tendering as to the correctness

and sufficiency of his tender for the works and of the rates and prices quoted in the schedule of quantities which rates and prices shall except as otherwise provided cover all his obligations under the contract.

3.3 It must be clearly understood that the whole of the conditions and specifications are

intended to be strictly enforced and that no work will be considered as extra work and allowed and paid for unless they are clearly outside the scope, spirit, meaning of the Contract and intent of the Owner and have been so ordered in writing by Owner and/or Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge, whose decision shall be final and binding.

3.4 Before filling the Tender the Contractor will check and satisfy all drawings and materials

to be procured and the schedule of quantities by obtaining clarification from the Owner on all the items as may be desired by the Tenderer. No claim for any alleged loss or compensation will be entertained on this account, after submission of Tender by the Tenderer/Contractor and such a claim shall not be arbitrable.

3.5 No escalation in the Tender rates will be permitted throughout the period of contract or

the period of completion of the job whichever is later on account of any variation in prices of materials or cost of labour or due to any other reasons. Claims on account of escalation shall not be arbitrable.

3.6 The quantities indicated in the Tender are approximate. The approved schedule of rates of

the contract will be applicable for variations up to plus or minus 25% of the contract value. No revision of schedule of rates will be permitted for such variations in the contract value, including variations of individual quantities, addition of new items, alterations, additions/deletions or substitutions of items, as mentioned above. Quantities etc. mentioned and accepted in the joint measurement sheets shall alone be final and binding on the parties.


3.7 Owner reserve their right to award the contract to any tenderer and their decision in this regard shall be final. They also reserve their right to reject any or all tenders received. No disputes could be raised by any tenderer(s) whose tender has been rejected.

3.8 The Rates quoted by the Tenderer shall include Costs and expenses on all counts viz.

cost of materials, transportation of machine(s), tools, equipments, labour, power, Administration charges, price escalations, profits, etc. etc. except to the extent of the cost of material(s), if any, agreed to be supplied by Owner and mentioned specifically in that regard in condition of Contract, in which case, the cost of such material if taken for preparation of the Contractor's Bill(s) shall be deducted before making payment of the Bill(s) of the Contractor. The description given in the schedule of quantities shall unless otherwise stated be held to include wastage on materials, carriage and cartage, carrying in and return of empties, hoisting, setting, fitting and fixing in position and all other expenses necessary in and for the full and complete execution and completion of works and in accordance with good practice and recognised principles in that regard.

3.9 Employees of the State and Central Govt. and employees of the Public Sector

Undertakings, including retired employees are covered under their respective service conditions/rules in regard to their submitting the tender. All such persons should ensure compliance to the respective/applicable conditions, rules etc. etc. Any person not complying with those rules etc. but submitting the tender in violation of such rules, after being so noticed shall be liable for the forfeiture of the Earnest Money Deposit made with the tender, termination of Contract and sufferance on account of forfeiture of Security Deposit and sufferance of damages arising as a result of termination of Contract.

3.10 Tender submitted by Tenderer shall remain valid for a period of 6 months from the date

of opening of the tender. The Tenderer shall not be entitled during the said period of 6 months, to revoke or cancel the tender without the consent in writing from the Owner.

In case the tenderer revokes or cancels the tender or varies any of terms of the tender

without the Consent of the Owner, in writing, the Tenderer forfeits the right to the refund of the Earnest Money paid along with the tender.

3.11 The prices quoted by the tenderer shall be firm during the validity period of 6 months and

also during the period of Contract including period(s) of extensions of time, if any, as stated earlier. Escalation in prices will not be permitted during the said period. The tenderer shall particularly take note of this factor before submitting their tender(s).


3.12 The works shall be carried out strictly as per approved specifications. Deviations, if any, shall have to be authorised by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge in writing prior to implementing deviations. The price benefit, if any, arising out of the accepted deviation shall be passed on to the Owner. The decision of Engineer-in-Charge shall be final in this matter.

3.13 The contractor shall make all arrangements at his own cost to transport the required

materials outside and inside the working places and leaving the premises in a neat and tidy condition after completion of the job to the satisfaction of Owner. All materials except those agreed to be supplied by the Owner shall be supplied by the contractor at his own cost and the rates quoted by the Contractor should be inclusive of all royalties, rents, taxes, duties, octroi, statutory levies, if any, etc. etc.

3.14 The Contractor shall not carry on any work other than the work under this Contract within

the Owners premises without prior permission in writing from the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-charge.

3.15 The Contractor shall be bound to follow and ensure compliance to all the safety and

security regulations and other statutory rules applicable to the area. In the event of any damage or loss or sufference caused due to non-observance of such rules and regulations, the contractor shall be solely responsible for the same and shall keep the Owner indemnified against all such losses and claims arising from the same.

3.16 At any time after acceptance of tender, the Owner reserves the right to add, amend or

delete any work item, the bill of quantities at a later date or reduce the scope of work in the overall interest of the work by prior discussion and intimation to the Contractor. The decision of Owner, with reasons recorded therefor, shall be final and binding on both the Owner and the Contractor. The Contractor shall not have right to claim compensation or damage etc. in that regard. The Owner reserves the right to split the work under this contract between two or more contractors without assigning any reasons.

3.17 Contractor shall not be entitled to sublet, sub contract or assign, the work under

this Contract without the prior consent of the Owner obtained in writing. 3.18 All signatures in tender document shall be dated as well as all the pages of all sections

of the tender documents shall be initialled at the lower position and signed, wherever required in the tender papers by the Tenderer or by a person holding Power of Attorney authorising him to sign on behalf of the tenderer before submission of tender.


3.19 The tender should be quoted in English, both in figures as well as in words. The rates and

amounts tendered by the Tenderer in the Schedule of rates for each item and in such a way that insertion is not possible. The total tendered amount should also be indicated both in figures and words with the signature of tenderer.

3.20 All corrections and alterations in the entries of tender paper will be signed in full by

the tenderer with date. No erasures or over writings are permissible. 3.21 Transfer of tender document by one intending tenderer to the another one is not

permissible. The tenderer on whose name the tender has been sent only can quote. 3.22 The Tender submitted by a tenderer if found to be incomplete in any or all manner is

liable to be rejected. The decision of the Owner in this regard is final and binding. In case of any error/discrepancy in the amount written in words and figures, the lower amount between the two shall prevail.

4. DEPOSITS a) EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (EMD) The tenderer will be required to pay a sum as specified in the covering letter, as earnest

money deposit alongwith the tender either thru a crossed demand draft or a non-revokable Bank Guarantee in favour of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited, from any Scheduled Bank (other than a Co-Operative Bank) payable at Mumbai in favour of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited, Mumbai in the proforma enclosed. The earnest money deposit will be refunded after finalisation of the contract.

Note: Public sector enterprises and small scale units registered with National Small Scale

Industries are exempted from payment of Earnest Money Deposit. Small scale units registered with National Small Scale Industries should enclose a photocopy of their registration certificate with their quotation to make their quotation eligible for consideration. The Registration Certificate should remain valid during the period of the contract that may be entered into with such successful bidder. Such tenderers should ensure validity of the Registration Certificate for the purpose.

b) SECURITY DEPOSIT The tenderer, with whom the contract is decided to be entered into and intimation is so

given will have to make a security deposit of one percent (1%) of the total


contract value in the form of account payee crossed demand draft drawn in favour of the Owner payable at Bombay, within 15 days from the date of intimation of acceptance of their tender, failing which the Owner reserves the right to cancel the Contract and forfeit the EMD.

5. EXECUTION OF WORK All the works shall be executed in strict conformity with the provisions of the contract

documents and with such explanatory details, drawings, specifications and instructions as may be furnished from time to time to the Contractor by the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge, whether mentioned in the Contract or not. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that works throughout are executed in the most proper and workman- like manner with the quality of material and workmanship in strict accordance with the specifications and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in- Charge/Site-in-Charge.

The completion of work may entail working in monsoon also. The contractor must

maintain the necessary work force as may be required during monsoon and plan to execute the job in such a way the entire project is completed within the contracted time schedule. No extra charges shall be payable for such work during monsoon. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to keep the construction work site free from water during and off the monsoon period at his own cost and expenses.

For working on Sundays/Holidays, the contractor shall obtain the necessary permission

from Engineer Incharge/Site Incharge in advance. The contractor shall be permitted to work beyond the normal hours with prior approval of Engineer-In-Charge/Site-In-Charge and the contractors quoted rate is inclusive of all such extended hours of working and no extra amount shall be payable by the owner on this account.

5.a. SETTING OUT OF WORKS AND SITE INSTRUCTIONS 5.a.1. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall furnish the Contractor with only the four

corners of the work site and a level bench mark and the Contractor shall set out the works and shall provide an efficient staff for the purpose and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy of such setting out.

5.a.2. The Contractor shall provide, fix and be responsible for the maintenance of all necessary

stakes, templates, level marks, profiles and other similar things and shall take all necessary precautions to prevent their removal or disturbance and shall be responsible for consequences of such removal or disturbance should the same


take place and for their efficient and timely reinstatement. The Contractor shall

also be responsible for the maintenance of all existing survey marks, either existing or supplied and fixed by the Contractor. The work shall be set out to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge. The approval thereof or joining in setting out the work shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility.

5.a.3. Before beginning the works, the Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide all necessary

reference and level posts, pegs, bamboos, flags ranging rods, strings and other materials for proper layout of the work in accordance with the scheme, for bearing marks acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge. The Centre longitudinal or face lines and cross lines shall be marked by means of small masonary pillars. Each pillar shall have distinct marks at the centre to enable theodolite to be set over it. No work shall be started until all these points are checked and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge in writing. But such approval shall not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities. The Contractor shall also provide all labour, materials and other facilities, as necessary, for the proper checking of layout and inspection of the points during construction.

5.a.4. Pillars bearing geodetic marks located at the sites of units of works under construction

should be protected and fenced by the Contractor. 5.a.5. On completion of works, the contractor shall submit the geodetic documents according

to which the work was carried out. 5.a.6. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall communicate or confirm his instructions to

the contractor in respect of the executions of work in a "work site order book" maintained in the office having duplicate sheet and the authorised representative of the contractor shall confirm receipt of such instructions by signing the relevant entries in the book.

5.a.7. All instructions issued by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall be in writing. The

Contractor shall be liable to carry out the instructions without fail. 5.a.8. If the Contractor after receipt of written instruction from the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-

in-Charge requiring compliance within seven days fails to comply with such drawings or 'instructions' or both as the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may issue, owner may employ and pay other persons to execute any such work whatsoever that may be necessary to give effect to such drawings or instructions' and all cost and expenses incurred in connection therewith as certified by the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge shall be borne by the contractor or may be deducted from amounts due


or that may become due to the contractor under the contract or may be recovered as a

debt. 5.a.9. The Contractor shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for the horizontal and

vertical alignment, the levels and correctness of every part of the work and shall rectify effectually any errors or imperfections therein. Such rectifications shall be carried out by the Contractor, at his own cost.

5.a.10. In case any doubts arise in the mind of the Contractor in regard to any expressions,

interpretations, statements, calculations of quantities, supply of material rates, etc. etc., the contractor shall refer the same to the Site-in-Charge/ Engineer-in-Charge for his clarification, instructions, guidance or clearing of doubts. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall be final and the contractor shall be bound by such a decision.

5.a.11. "The Contractor shall take adequate precautions, to ensure that his operations do not

create nuisance or misuse of the work space that shall cause unnecessary disturbance or inconvenience to others at the work site".

5.a.12. "All fossils, coins articles of value of antiquity and structure or other remains of

geological or archaeological discovered on the site of works shall be declared to be the property of the Owner and Contractor shall take reasonable precautions to prevent his workmen or any other persons from removing or damaging any such articles or thing and shall immediately inform the Owner/ Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge."

5.a.13. "Contractor will be entirely and exclusively responsible to provide and maintain at

his expenses all lights, guards, fencing, etc. when and where even necessary or/as required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for the protection of works or safety and convenience to all the members employed at the site or general public."

5.b. COMMENCEMENT OF WORK The contractor shall after paying the requisite security deposit, commence work

within 15 days from the date of receipt of the intimation of intent from the Owner informing that the contract is being awarded. The date of intimation shall be the date/day for counting the starting day/date and the ending day/date will be accordingly calculated. Penalty, if any, for the delay in execution shall be calculated accordingly.


Contractor should prepare detailed fortnightly construction programme for approval by the Engineer-in-Charge within one month of receipt of Letter Of Intent. The work shall be executed strictly as per such time schedule. The period of Contract includes the time required for testing, rectifications, if any, re-testing and completion of work in all respects to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

# A Letter of Intent is an acceptance of offer by the Owner and it need not be accepted by

the contractor. But the contractor should acknowledge a receipt of the purchase order within 15 days of mailing of Purchase Order and any delay in acknowledging the receipt will be a breach of contract and compensation for the loss caused by such breach will be recovered by the Owner by forfeiting earnest money deposit/bid bond.

5.c. SUBLETTING OF WORK 5.c.1. No part of the contract nor any share or interest thereof shall in any manner or

degree be transferred, assigned or sublet, by the Contractor, directly or indirectly to any firm or corporation whatsoever, without the prior consent in writing of the Owner.

5.c.2. At the commencement of every month the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-

charge/Site-in-Charge list of all sub-contractors or other persons or firms engaged by the Contractor.

# 5.c.3 The contract agreement will specify major items of supply or services for which the

Contractor proposes to engage sub-Contractor/sub-Vendor. The contractor may from time to time propose any addition or deletion from any such list and will submit the proposals in this regard to the Engineer-in-charge/Designated officer-in-charge for approval well in advance so as not to impede the progress of work. Such approval of the Engineer-in-charge/Designated officer-in-charge will not relieve the contractor from any of his obligations, duties and responsibilities under the contract.

5.c.4. Notwithstanding any sub-letting with such approval as resaid and notwithstanding that

the Engineer-in-Charge shall have received copies of any sub-contract, the Contractor shall be and shall remain solely to be responsible for the quality and proper and expeditious execution of the works and the performance of all the conditions of the contract in all respects as if such subletting or sub-contracting had not taken place and as if such work had been done directly by the Contractor.


#5.c.5 Prior approval in writing of the Owner shall be obtained before any change is made in

the constitution of the contractor/Contracting agency otherwise contract shall be deemed to have been allotted in contravention of clause entitled “sub-letting of works” and the same action may be taken and the same consequence shall ensue as provided in the clause of “subletting of works”.

5.d EXTENSION OF TIME If the contractor does not complete the work within the contractual period he may apply

in writing to the owner before two months of the period of expiry of the contract stating therein in detail, the reasons on which he desires to have extension and the period of extension, the contractor so desires. The owner on his part shall consider the request of the contractor for such extension of time and shall take a decision after discussion with the contractor and communicate the same to the contractor before 30 days of expiry of the contract. The decision of the owner in this regard shall be final and binding.

If the owner extends the time for completion of work as mentioned above, it shall be the

understanding between the owner and the contractor that the contractor shall be liable to pay damages, costs and expenses to the owner at the rate of 1% per month of the value of the remaining portion of work to be determined on the last date of the original period of contract, such value being determined by the owner and accepted by the contractor. In case of any dispute arising in the determination of the amount; the owner shall be at liberty to terminate the contract, upon which event, consequences would follow according to the term and condition provided under the Clause for termination of the contract.

5.e. SUSPENSION OF WORKS 5.e.1. Subject to the provisions of this contract, the contractor shall if ordered in writing

by the Engineer- in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for reasons recorded suspend the works or any part thereof for such period and such time so ordered and shall not, after receiving such, proceed with the work therein ordered to uspended until he shall have received a written order to re-start. The Contractor shall be entitled to claim extension of time for that period of time the work was ordered to be suspended. Neither the Owner nor the Contractor shall be entitled to claim compensation or damages on account of such an extension of time.

5.e.2. In case of suspension of entire work, ordered in writing by Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-

Charge, for a period of 30 days, the Owner shall have


the option to terminate the Contract as provided under the clause for termination. The

Contractor shall not be at liberty to remove from the site of the works any plant or materials belonging to him and the Employer shall have lien upon all such plant and materials.

5.e.3. The contract shall, in case of suspension have the right to raise a dispute and have the

same arbitrated but however, shall not have the right to have the work stopped from further progress and completion either by the owner or through other contractor appointed by the owner.

5.f. OWNER MAY DO PART OF WORK Not withstanding anything contained elsewhere in this contract, the owner upon failure

of the Contractor to comply with any instructions given in accordance with the provisions of this contract, may instead of Contract and undertaking charge of entire work, place additional labour force, tools, equipment and materials on such parts of the work, as the Owner may decide or engage another Contractor to carryout the balance of work. In such cases, the Owner shall have the right to deduct from the amounts payable to the Contractor the difference in cost of such work and materials with ten percent overhead added to cover all departmental charges. Should the total amount thereof exceed the amount due to the contractor, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner within 15 days of making demand for payment failing which the Contractor shall be liable to pay interest at 24% p.a. on such amounts till the date of payment.

5.g. INSPECTION OF WORKS 5.g.1. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and Officers from Central or State Government

will have full power and authority to inspect the works at any time wherever in progress, either on the site or at the Contractor's premises/workshops of any person, firm or corporation where work in connection with the contract may be in hand or where the materials are being or are to be supplied, and the Contractor shall afford or procure for the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge every facility and assistance to carryout such inspection. The Contractor shall, at all times during the usual working hours and at all other times at which reasonable notice of the intention of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge or his representative to visit the works shall have been given to the Contractor, either himself be present to receive orders and instructions, or have a responsible agent, duly accredited in writing, present for the purpose. Orders given to the Contractor's agent shall be considered to have the same force as if they had been


given to the Contractor himself. The Contractor shall give not less than seven days

notice in writing to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge before covering up or otherwise placing beyond reach of inspection and measurement any work in order that the same may be inspected and measured. In the event of breach of above, the same shall be uncovered at Contractor's expense for carrying out such measurement and/or inspection.

5.g.2. No material shall be removed and despatched by the Contractor from the site without

the prior approval in writing of the Engineer-in-charge. The contractor is to provide at all times during the progress of the work and the maintenance period proper means of access with ladders, gangways, etc. and the necessary attendance to move and adapt as directed for inspection or measurements of the works by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.

5.h. SAMPLES 5.h.1. The contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-charge/Site-in-Charge for approval

when requested or required adequate samples of all materials and finishes to be used in the work.

5.h.2. Samples shall be furnished by the Contractor sufficiently in advance and before

commencenent of the work so as the Owner can carry out tests and examinations thereof and approve or reject the samples for use in the works. All material samples furnished and finally used/applied in actual work shall fully be of the same quality of the approved samples.

5.i. TESTS FOR QUALITY OF WORK 5.i.1. All workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in the contract documents

and in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in- Charge and shall be subjected from time to time to such tests at Contractor's cost as the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may direct at the place of manufacture or fabrication or on the site or at all or any such places. The Contractor shall provide assistance, instruments, labour and materials as are normally required for examining, measuring and testing any workmanship as may be selected and required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.

5.i.2. All the tests that will be necessary in connection with the execution of the work as

decided by the Engineer-in- charge/Site-in-Charge shall be carried out at the contractors cost and expenses.


5.i.3. If any tests are required to be carried out in connection with the work or materials

or workmanship to be supplied by the owner, such tests shall be carried out by the Contractor as per instructions of Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and expenses for such tests, if any, incurred by the contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner. The contractor should file his claim with the owner within 15 (fifteen) days of inspection/test and any claim made beyond that period shall lapse and be not payable.

5.j. ALTERATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO SPECIFICATIONS, DESIGNS

AND WORKS 5.j.1. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall have powers to make any alterations,

additions and/or substitutions to the schedule of quantities, the original specifications, drawings, designs and instructions that may become necessary or advisable or during the progress of the work and the Contractor shall be bound to carryout such altered/extra/new items of work in accordance with instructions which may be given to him in writing signed by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site- in-Charge. Such alterations, omissions, additions or substitutions shall not invalidate the contract. The altered, additional or substituted work which the Contractor may be directed to carryon in the manner as part of the work shall be carried out by the Contractor on the same conditions in all respects on which he has agreed to do the work. The time for completion of such altered added and/or substituted work may be extended for that part of the particular job. The rates for such additional altered or substituted work under this Clause shall, be worked out in accordance with the following provisions:

5.j.2. If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are specified in the contract for

similar class of work, the Contractor is bound to carryout the additional, altered or substituted work at the same rates as are specified in the contract.

5.j.3. If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are not specifically provided in

the contract for the work, the rates will be derived from the rates for similar class of work as are specified in the contract for the work. In the opinion of the Engineer-in- Charge/Site-in-Charge as to whether or not the rates can be reasonably so derived from the items in this contract, will be final and binding on the Contractor.


5.j.4. If the rates for the altered, additional or substituted work cannot be determined in the manner specified above, then the Contractor shall, within seven days of the date of receipt of order to carry out the work, inform the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge of the rate at which he intends to charge for such class of work, supported by analysis of the rate or rates claimed and the Engineer-In-Charge/ Site-in-Charge shall determine the rates on the basis of the prevailing market rates for both material and labour plus 10% to cover overhead and profit of labour rates and pay the Contractor accordingly. The opinion of the Engineer-in- Charge/Site-in-Charge as to current market rates of materials and the quantum of labour involved per unit of measurement will be final and binding on the contractor.

5.j.5. The quantities indicated in the Tender are approximate. The approved schedule of rates

of the contract will be applicable for variations of upto +25% of the estimated contract value. No revision of schedule of rates will be permitted for such variations in the contract value, even for variations of individual quantities, addition of new items, alterations, additions/deletions or substitutions of items, as mentioned above.

5.j.6. In case of any item of work for which there is no specification supplied by the Owner

and is mentioned in the tender documents, such work shall be carried out in accordance with Indian Standard Specifications and if the Indian Standard Specifications do not cover the same, the work should be carried out as per standard Engineering Practice subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge.

5.k. PROVISIONAL ACCEPTANCE Acceptance of sections of the works for purposes of equipment erection, piping,

electrical work and similar usages by the Owner and payment for such work or parts of work shall not constitute a waiver of any portion of this contract and shall not be construed so as to prevent the Engineer from requiring replacement of defective work that may become apparent after the said acceptance and also shall not absolve the Contractor of the obligations under this contract. It is made clear that such an acceptance does not indicate or denote or establish to the fact of execution of that work or the Contract until the work is completed in full in accordance with the provisions of this Contract.

5.l. COMPLETION OF WORK AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE As soon as the work is completed in all respects, the contractor shall give notice of

such completion to the site in charge or the Owner and within thirty days of receipt


of such notice the site in charge shall inspect the work and shall furnish the contractor

with a certificate of completion indicating: a) defects, if any, to be rectified by the contractor b) items, if any, for which payment shall be made in reduced rates c) the date of completion. 5.m. USE OF MATERIALS AND RETURN OF SURPLUS MATERIALS 5.m.1. Notwithstanding anything contained to the contrary in any or all of the clauses of this

contract, where any materials for the execution of the contract are procured with the assistance of Government either by issue from Government stocks or purchase made under orders or permits or licences issued by Government, the contractor shall use the said materials economically and solely for the purpose of the contract and shall not dispose them of without the permission of the Owner.

5.m.2. All surplus(serviceable) or unserviceable materials that may be left over after the

completion of the contract or at its termination for any reason whatsoever, the Contractor shall deliver the said product to the Owner without any demur. The price to be paid to the Contractor, if not already paid either in full or in part, however, shall not exceed the amount mentioned in the Schedule of Rates for such material and in cases where such rates are not so mentioned, shall not exceed the CPWD scheduled rates. In the event of breach of the aforesaid condition the contractor shall become liable for contravention of the terms of the Contract.

5.m.3. The surplus (serviceable) and unserviceable products shall be determined by joint

measurement. In case where joint measurement has failed to take place, the Owner may measure the same and determine the quantity.

5.m.4. It is made clear that the Owner shall not be liable to take stock and keep possession and

pay for the surplus and unserviceable stocks and the Owner may direct the Contractor to take back such material brought by the Contractor and becoming surplus and which the Owner may decide to keep and not to pay for the same.

5.n. DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD The contractor shall guarantee the work executed for a period of 12 months from the date

of completion of the job. Any damage or defect that may arise or lie undiscovered at the time of completion of the job shall be rectified or replaced by the


contractor at his own cost. The decision of the Engineer In-charge/Site-Incharge/Owner shall be the final in deciding whether the defect has to be rectified or replaced.

# Equipment or spare parts replaced under warranty/guarantees shall have further warranty

for a mutually agreed period from the date of acceptance. The owner shall intimate the defects noticed in writing by a Registered A.D. letter or

otherwise and the contractor within 15 days of receipt of the intimation shall start the rectification work and complete within the time specified by the owner failing which the owner will get the defects rectified by themselves or by any other contractor and the expenses incurred in getting the same done shall be paid by the Contractor under the provision of the Contract.

Thus, defect liability is applicable only in case of job/works contract (civil, mechanical,

electrical, maintenance etc. ) where any damage of defect may arise in future (i.e. within 12 months from the date of completion of job) or lie undiscovered at the time of completion of job.

In other words, in case of service contracts (like car hire etc.) where there is no question

of damage or defect arising in future, the defect liability clause is not applicable. 5.o. DAMAGE TO PROPERTY 5.o.1. Contractor shall be responsible for making good to the satisfaction of the Owner any loss

of and any damage to all structures and properties belonging to the Owner or being executed or procured by the Owner or of other agencies within the premises of the work of the Owner, if such loss or damage is due to fault and/or the negligence or willful acts or omission of the Contractor, his employees, agents, representatives or sub-contractors.

5.o.2. The Contractors shall indemnify and keep the Owner harmless of all claims for damage

to Owner's property arising under or by reason of this contract. 6. DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR 6.a. EMPLOYMENT LIABILITY TOWARDS WORKERS EMPLOYED BY THE

CONTRACTOR


6.a.1 The Contractor shall be solely and exclusively responsible for engaging or

employing persons for the execution of work. All persons engaged by the contractor shall be on Contractor's payroll and paid by Contractor. All disputes or differences between the Contractor and his/their employees shall be settled by Contractor.

6.a.2. Owner has absolutely no liability whatsoever concerning the employees of the

Contractor. The Contractor shall indemnify Owner against any loss or damage or liability arising out of or in the course of his/their employing persons or relation with his/their employees. The Contractor shall make regular and full payment of wages and on any complaint by any employee of the Contractor or his sub contractor regarding non-payment of wages, salaries or other dues, Owner reserves the right to make payments directly to such employees or sub- contractor of the Contractor and recover the amount in full from the bills of the Contractor and the contractor shall not claim any compensation or reimbursement thereof. The Contractor shall comply with the Minimum Wages Act applicable to the area of work site with regard to payment of wages to his employees and also to employees of his sub contractor.

6.a.3. The Contractor shall advise in writing or in such appropriate way to all of his

employees and employees of sub-contractors and any other person engaged by him that their appointment/employment is not by the Owner but by the Contractor and that their present appointment is only in connection with the construction contract with Owner and that therefore, such an employment/appointment would not enable or make them eligible for any employment/appointment with the Owner either temporarily or/and permanent basis.

6.b. NOTICE TO LOCAL BODIES The contractor shall comply with and give all notices required under any Government

authority, instruction, rule or order made under any act of parliament, state laws or any regulations or by-laws of any local authority relating to the works.

6.c. FIRST AID AND INDUSTRIAL INJURIES 6.c.1 Contractor shall maintain first aid facility for his employees and those of his sub-

contractors.


6.c.2. Contractor shall make arrangements for ambulance service and for the treatment of all

types of injuries. Names and telephone numbers of those providing such services shall be furnished to Owner prior to start of construction and their name board shall be prominently displayed in Contractor's field office.

6.c.3. All industrial injuries shall be reported promptly to owner and a copy of contractor's

report covering each personal injury requiring the attention of a physician shall be furnished to the Owner.

6.d. SAFETY CODE 6.d.1. The Contractor shall at his own expenses arrange for the Safety provisions as may be

necessary for the execution of the work or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge in respect of all labours directly or indirectly employed for performance of the works and shall provide all facilities in connections therewith. In case the contractor fails to make arrangements and provide necessary facilities as aforesaid, the Owner shall be entitled to do so and recover the cost thereof from the Contractor.

6.d.2. From the commencement to the completion of the works, the contractor shall take full

responsibility for the care thereof and of all the temporary works (defined as meaning all temporary works of every kind required in or for the execution, completion or maintenance of the works). In case damage, loss or injury shall happen to the works or to any part thereof or to temporary works or to any cause whatsoever repair at his (Contractor's) own cost and make good the same so that at the time of completion, the works shall be in good order and condition and in conformity in every respect with the requirement of the contract and Engineer-in-Charge's instructions.

6.d.3. In respect of all labour, directly or indirectly employed in the work for the

performance of the Contractor's part of this agreement, the contractor shall at his own expense arrange for all the safety provisions as per relevant Safety Codes of C.P.W.D Bureau of Indian Standards, the Electricity Act/I.E. Rules. The Mines Act and such other Acts as applicable.

6.d.4. The Contractor shall observe and abide by all fire and safety regulations of the Owner.

Before starting construction work, the Contractor shall consult with Owner's Safety Engineer or Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and must make good to the satisfaction of the Owner any loss or damage due to fire to any portion of the work done or to be done under this agreement or to any of the Owner's existing property.


6.d.5. The Contractor will be fully responsible for complying with all relevant provisions of the Contract Labour Act and shall pay rates of Wages and observe hours of work/conditions of employment according to the rules in force from time to time.

6.d.6. The Contractor will be fully responsible for complying with the provision including

documentation and submission of reports on the above to the concerned authorities and shall indemnify the Corporation from any such lapse for which the Government will be taking action against them.

6.d.7. Owner shall on a report having been made by an inspecting Office as defined in the

Contract Labour Regulations have the power to deduct from the money due to the Contractor any sum required or estimated to be required for making good the loss suffered by a worker(s) by reasons of non-fulfillment of conditions of contract for the benefit of workers no-payment of wages or of deductions made from his or their wages which are not justified by the terms of contract or non observance of the said contractor's labour Regulation.

6.e. INSURANCE AND LABOUR Contractor shall at his own expense obtain and maintain an insurance policy with a

Nationalised Insurance Company to the satisfaction of the Owner as provided hereunder.

6.e.1. EMPLOYEES STATE INSURANCE ACT i. The Contractor agrees to and does hereby accept full and exclusive liability for the

compliance with all obligations imposed by Employees State Insurance Act, 1948, and the Contractor further agrees to defend indemnify and hold Owner harmless from any liability or penalty which may be imposed by the Central, State or local authority by reason of any asserted violation by Contractor, or sub-contractor of the Employees' State Insurance Act, 1948 and also from all claims, suits or proceedings that may be brought against the Owner arising under, growing out of or by reason of the work provided for by this contract whether brought by employees of the Contractor, by third parties or by Central or State Government authority or any political sub-division thereof.

ii. The Contractor agrees to file with the Employees State Insurance Corporation, the

Declaration forms and all forms which may be required in respect of the Contractor's or sub-contractor's employee whose aggregate emuneration is within the specified limit and who are employed in the work provided or those covered by ESI Act under any amendment to the Act from time to time.


The Contractor shall deduct and secure the agreement of the sub-contractor to

deduct the employee's contribution as per the first schedule of the Employee's State Insurance Act from wages and affix the employee's contribution cards at wages payment intervals. The Contractor shall remit and secure the agreement of the sub contractor to remit to the State Bank of India, Employee's State Insurance Corporation Account, the Employee's contribution as required by the Act.

iii. The Contractor agrees to maintain all records as required under the Act in

respect of employees and payments and the Contractor shall secure the agreement of the sub contractor to maintain such records. Any expenses incurred for the contributions, making contribution or maintaining records shall be to the Contractor's or sub-contractor's account.

iv. The Owner shall retain such sum as may be necessary from the total contract

value until the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory proof that all contributions as required by the Employees State Insurance Act, 1948, have been paid.

v. WORKMAN'S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYEE'S LIABILITY

INSURANCE Provide Insurance for all the Contractor's employees engaged in the performance of

this contract. If any of the work is sublet, the Contractor shall ensure that the sub contractor provides workmen's compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance for the latter's employees who are not covered under the Contractor's insurance.

vi. AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE Contractor shall take out an Insurance to cover all risks to Owner for each of his

vehicles plying on works of this contract and these insurances shall be valid for the total contract period. No extra payment will be made for this insurance. Owner shall not be liable for any damage or loss not made good by the Insurance Company, should such damage or loss result from unauthorised use of the vehicle. The provisions of the Motor Vehicle Act would apply.


vii. FIRE INSURANCE Contractor shall within two weeks after award of contract insure the Works, Plant

and Equipment and keep them insured until the final completion of the Contract against loss or damage by accident, fire or any other cause with an insurance company to be approved by the Employer/Consultant in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor (name of the former being placed first in the Policy). Such Policy shall cover the property of the Employer only.

6.e.2. ANY OTHER INSURANCE REQUIRED UNDER LAW OR REGULATION OR

BY OWNER i. Contractor shall also provide and maintain any and all other insurance which may be

required under any law or regulations from time to time. He shall also carry and maintain any other insurance which may be required by the Owner.

ii. The aforesaid insurance policy/policies shall provide that they shall not be

cancelled till the Engineer-in-Charge has agreed to their cancellation. iii. The Contractor shall satisfy to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge from

time to time that he has taken out all insurance policies referred to above and has paid the necessary premium for keeping the policies alive till the expiry of the defects liability period.

iv. The contractor shall ensure that similar insurance policies are taken out by his

sub-contractor (if any) and shall be responsible for any claims or losses to the Owner resulting from their failure to obtain adequate insurance protections in connection thereof. The contractor shall produce or cause to be proceed by his sub-contractor (if any) as the case may be, the relevant policy or policies and premium receipts as and when required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.

6.e.3. LABOUR AND LABOUR LAWS i. The contractor shall at his own cost employ persons during the period of contract

and the persons so appointed shall not be construed under any circumstances to be in the employment of the Owner.


ii. All payments shall be made by the contractor to the labour employed by him in

accordance with the various rules and regulations stated above. The contractor shall keep the Owner indemnified from any claims whatsoever inclusive of damages/costs or otherwise arising from injuries or alleged injuries to or death of a person employed by the contractor or damages or alleged damages to the property.

iii. No labour below the age of eighteen years shall be employed on the work. The

Contractor shall not pay less than what is provided under the provisions of the contract labour (Regulations and Abolition) Act, 1970 and the rules made thereunder and as may be amended from time to time. He shall pay the required deposit under the Act appropriate to the number of workman to be employed by him or through sub contractor and get himself registered under the Act. He shall produce the required Certificates to the Owner before commencement of the work. The Owner recognises only the Contractor and not his sub contractor under the provisions of the Act. The Contractor will have to submit daily a list of his workforce. He will also keep the wage register at the work site or/and produce the same to the Owner, whenever desired. A deposit may be taken by the Owner from the Contractor to be refunded only after the Owner is satisfied that all workmen employed by the Contractor have been fully paid for the period of work in Owner's premises at rates equal to or better than wages provided for under the Minimum Wages Act. The contractor shall be responsible and liable for any complaints that may arise in this regard and the consequences thereto.

iv. The Contractor will comply with the provisions of the Employee's Provident Fund

Act and the Family Pension Act as may be applicable and as amended from time to time.

v. The Contractor will comply with the provisions of the payment of Gratuity Act, 1972,

as may be applicable and as amended from time to time. vi. IMPLEMENTATION OF APPRENTICES ACT, 1961 The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Apprentices Act, 1961 and

the Rules and Orders issued thereunder from time to time. If he fails to do so, his failure will be a breach of the contract and the Engineer-in-Charge may, at his discretion, cancel the contract. The Contractor shall also be liable for any pecuniary liability arising on account of any violation by him of the provision of the Act.


vii. MODEL RULES FOR LABOUR WELFARE The Contractor shall at his own expenses comply with or cause be complied with

Model rules for Labour Welfare as appended to those conditions or rules framed by the Government from time to time for the protection of health and for making sanitary arrangements for worker employed directly or indirectly on the works. In case the contractor fails to make arrangements as aforesaid the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall be entitled to do so and recover the cost thereof from the contractor.

6.f. DOCUMENTS CONCERNING WORKS 6.f.1. All documents including drawings, blue prints, tracings, reproducible models,

plans, specifications and copies, thereof furnished by the Owner as well as all drawings, tracings, reproducibles, plans, specifications design calculations etc. prepared by the contractor for the purpose of execution of works covered in or connected with this contract shall be the property of the Owner and shall not be used by the contractor for any other work but are to be delivered to the Owner at the completion or otherwise of the contract.

6.f.2. The Contractor shall keep and maintain secrecy of the documents, drawings etc. issued

to him for the execution of this contract and restrict access to such documents, drawings etc. and further the Contractor shall execute a SECRECY agreement from each or any person employed by the Contractor having access to such documents, drawings etc. The Contractor shall not issue drawings and documents to any other agency or individual without the written approval by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- Charge.

6.f.3. Contractor will not give any information or document etc. concerning details of the

work to the press or a news disseminating agency without prior written approval from Engineer-in-charge/Site-in-Charge. Contractor shall not take any pictures on site without written approval of Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.

7. PAYMENT OF CONTRACTOR'S BILLS 7.1. Payments will be made against Running Accounts bills certified by the Owner's

Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge within 15 days from the date of receipt of the certified bill by the Disbursement Section of the Owner.

7.2. Running Account Bills and the final bill shall be submitted by the Contractor

together with the duly signed measurements sheet(s) to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge of the Owner in quadruplicate for certification.


The Bills shall also be accompanied by quantity calculations in support of the quantities contained in the bill along with cement consumption statement, actual/theoretical, wherever applicable duly certified by the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge of the Owner.

7.3. All running account payments shall be regarded as on account payment(s) to be finally

adjusted against the final bill payment. Payment of Running Account Bill(s) shall not determine or affect in any way the rights of the Owner under this Contract to make the final adjustments of the quantities of material, measurements of work and adjustments of amounts etc.etc. in the final bill.

7.4. The final bill shall be submitted by the Contractor within one month of the date of

completion of the work fully and completely in all respects. If the Contractor fails to submit the final bill accordingly Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may make the measurement and determine the total amount payable for the work carried out by the Contractor and such a certification shall be final and binding on the Contractor. The Owner/Engineer- in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may take the assistance of an outside party for taking the measurement, the expenses of which shall be payable by the Contractor.

7.5. Payment of final bill shall be made within 45 days from the date of receipt of the

certified bill by the Disbursement Section of the owner. 7.a. MEASUREMENT OF WORKS 7.a.1. All measurements shall be in metric system. All the works will be jointly measured by

the representative of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and the Contractor or their authorised agent progressively. Such measurement will be recorded in the Measurement Book/Measurement Sheet by the Contractor or his authorised representative and signed in token of acceptance by the Owner or their authorised representative.

7.a.2. For the purpose of taking joint measurement, the Contractor/representative shall be

bound to be present whenever required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge. If, however, they are absent for any reasons whatsoever, the measurement will be taken by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge or his representative and the same would be deemed to be correct and binding on the Contractor.

7.a.3. In case of any dispute as to the mode of measurement for any item of work, the latest

Indian Standard Specifications shall be followed. In case of any further dispute on the same the same shall be as per the certification of an outside


qualified Engineer/ Consultant. Such a measurement shall be final and binding on the

Owner and the Contractor. 7.b. BILLING OF WORKS EXECUTED The Contractor will submit a bill in approved proforma in quadruplicate to the Engineer-

in-Charge/Site-in-Charge of the work giving abstract and detailed measurement for the various items executed during a month, before the expiry of the first week of the succeeding month. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall take or cause to be taken the requisite measurements for the purpose of having the bill verified and/or checked before forwarding the same to the disbursement office of the Owner for further action in terms of the Contract and payment thereafter. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall verify the bills within 7 days of submission of the Bill by the Contractor.

7.c. RETENTION MONEY 10% of the total value of the Running Account and Final Bill will be deducted and

retained by the Owner as retention money on account of any damage/defect liability that may arise for the period covered under the defect liability period clause of the Contract free of interest. Any damage or defect that may arise or lie undiscovered at the time of issue of completion certificate connected in any way with the equipment or materials supplied by contractor or in workmanship shall be rectified or replaced by the contractor at his own expense failing which the Owner shall be entitled to rectify the said damage/defect from the retention money. Any excess of expenditure incurred by the Owner on account of damage or defect shall be payable by the Contractor. The decision of the Owner in this behalf shall not be liable to be questioned but shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

Thus, deduction towards retention money is applicable only in case of job/works

contracts (civil, mechanical, electrical, maintenance etc. ) where any damage or defect may arise in future (i.e. within 12 months from the date of completion of job) or lie undiscovered at the time of issue of completion certificate.

7.d. TAXES, DUTIES, OCTROI ETC. 7.d.1 The Contractor accepts full and exclusive liability for the payment of any and all taxes,

duties, octroi, rates, cess, levies, and statutory payments payable under all or any of the statutes etc. now or hereafter imposed, increased from time to time in respect of works and materials and all contributions and taxes for unemployment compensation, insurance and old age pensions or annuities now or hereafter


imposed by Central or State Governmental authorities which are imposed with respect to or covered by the wages, salaries or other compensations paid to the persons employed by the Contractor and the Contractor shall be responsible for the compliance with all obligations and restrictions imposed by the Labour Law or any other law affecting employer-employee relationship and the Contractor further agrees to comply and to secure the compliance of all sub-contractors with all applicable Central, State, Municipal and local laws, and regulations and requirements of any Central, State or Local Government agency or authority.

Contractor further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless from any liability or

penalty which may be imposed by the Central, State or Local authorities by reason of any violation by Contractor or sub-contractor of such laws, regulations or requirements and also from all claims, suits or proceedings that may be brought against the Owner arising under, growing out of, or by reasons of the work provided for by this contract by third parties, or by Central or State Government authority or any administrative sub-division thereof. The Contractor further agrees that in case any such demand is raised against the Owner, and Owner has no way but to pay and pays/makes payment of the same, the Owner shall have the right to deduct the same from the amounts due and payable to the Contractor. The Contractor shall not raise any demand or dispute in respect of the same but may have recourse to recover/receive from the concerned authorities on the basis of the Certificate of the Owner issued in that behalf.

7.d.2. The rates quoted should be inclusive of all rates, cess, taxes and sales tax on works

contracts wherever applicable. However, wherever the sales tax on works contract is applicable and is to be deducted at source, the same will be deducted from the bills of the Contractor and paid to the concerned authorities. The proof of such payments of sales tax on works contract will be furnished to the contractor.

7.d.3. Income tax will be deducted at source as per rules at prevailing rates, unless certificate,

if any, for deduction at lesser rate or nil deduction is submitted by the Contractor from appropriate authority.

7.e. MATERIALS TO BE SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR 7.e.1. The Contractor shall procure and provide the whole of the materials required for

construction including tools, tackles, construction plant and equipment for the completion and maintenance of the works except the materials viz. steel and cement which may be agreed to be supplied as provided elsewhere in the contract. The contractor shall make arrangement for procuring such materials and for the transport thereof at their own cost and expenses.


7.e.2. The Owner may give necessary recommendation to the respective authority if so desired by the Contractor but assumes no responsibility of any nature. The Contractor shall procure materials of ISI stamp/certification and supplied by reputed suppliers borne on DGS&D list.

7.e.3. All materials procured should meet the specifications given in the tender document.

The Engineer-in-charge may, at his discretion, ask for samples and test certificates for any batch of any materials procured. Before procuring, the Contractor should get the approval of Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for any materials to be used for the works.

7.e.4. Manufacturer's certificate shall be submitted for all materials supplied by the Contractor.

If, however, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge any tests are required to be conducted on the material supplied by the Contractor, these will be arranged by the Contractor promptly at his own cost.

7.f. MATERIALS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER 7.f.1. Steel and Cement maybe supplied by the Owner to the contractor against payment by

Contractor from either godown or from the site or within work premises itself and the contractor shall arrange for all transport to actual work site at no extra cost.

7.f.2. The contractor shall bear all the costs including loading and unloading, carting from

issue points to work spot storage, unloading, custody and handling and stacking the same and return the surplus steel and cement to the Owner's storage point after completion of job.

7.f.3. The contractor will be fully accountable for the steel and cement received from the Owner

and contractor will give acknowledgement/receipt for quantity of steel and cement received by him each time he uplifts cement from Owner's custody.

7.f.4. For all computation purposes, the theoretical cement consumption shall be considered

as per CPWD standards. 7.f.5. Steel and Cement as received from the manufacturer/stockists will be

issued to the contractor. Theoretical weight of cement in a bag will be considered as 50 Kg. Bags weighing upto 4% less shall be accepted by the contractor and considered as 50 Kg. per bag. Any shortage in the weight of any cement bag by more than 4% will be to the Owner's account only when pointed out by the Contractor and verified by Engineer-in-Charge/Site in Charge at the time of Contract or taking delivery.


7.f.6. The contractor will be required to maintain a stock register for receipt, issuance and

consumption of steel and cement at site. Cement will be stored in a warehouse at site. Requirement of cement on any day will be taken out of the warehouse. Cement issued shall be regulated on the basis of FIRST RECEIPT to go as FIRST ISSUE.

7.f.7. Empty cement bag shall be the property of the Contractor. Contractor shall be

penalised for any excess/under consumption of cement. The penal rate will be twice the rate of issue of cement for this work.

7.f.8. All the running bills as well as the final bills will be accompanied by cement consumption

statements giving the detailed working of the cement used, cement received and stock-on-hand.

7.f.9. The Contractor will be fully responsible for safe custody of cement once it is received

by him and during transport. Owner will not entertain any claims of the contractor for theft, loss or damage to cement while in their custody.

7.f.10. The contractor shall not remove from the site any cement bags at any time. 7.f.11. The Contractor shall advise Engineer-in-charge/Site-in-charge in writing atleast 21 days

before exhausting the Cement stocks already held by Contractor to ensure that such delays do not lead to interruptions in the progress of work.

7.f.12. Cement shall not be supplied by the Owner for manufacturing of mosaic tiles,

precast cement jali and any other bought out items which consume cement and for temporary works.

7.f.13. Cement in bags and in good usable condition left over after the completion of work shall

be returned by the contractor to the Owner. The Owner shall make payment to the Contractor at the supply rate for such stocks of cement they accept and receive. Any refused stock of cement shall be removed by the Contractor from the site at his cost and expenses within 15 days of completion of the work.

8. PAYMENT OF CLAIMS AND DAMAGES 8.1. Should the Owner have to pay money in respect of claims or demands as aforesaid the

amount so paid and the costs incurred by the Owner shall be charged to and paid by the Contractor and the Contractor shall not be entitled to dispute or question the right of the Owner to make such payments notwithstanding the same may have been without his consent or authority or in law or otherwise to the contrary.


8.2. In every case in which by virtue of the provisions of Workmen's Compensation Act,

1923, or other Acts, the Owner is obliged to pay Compensation to a Workman employed by the Contractor in execution of the works, the Owner will recover from the Contractor the amount of compensation so paid and without prejudice to the rights of Owner under the said Act. Owner shall be at liberty to recover such amount or any part thereof by deducting it from the security deposit or from any sum due to the Contractor whether under this contract or otherwise. The Owner shall not be bound to contest any claim made under Section 12 sub section (1) of the said Act, except on the written request of the Contractor and upon his giving to the Owner full security for all costs for which the owner might become liable in consequence of contesting such claim.

8.a. ACTION AND COMPENSATION IN CASE OF BAD WORK If it shall appear to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge that any work has been

executed with bad, imperfect or unskilled workmanship, or with materials, or that any materials or articles provided by the Contractor for execution of the work are not of standards specified/inferior quality to that contracted for, or otherwise not in accordance with the contract, the CONTRACTOR shall on demand in writing from the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge or his authorised representative specifying the work, materials or articles complained of, notwithstanding that the same may have been inadvertently passed, certified and paid for, forthwith rectify or remove and reconstruct the work so specified and at his own charge and cost and expenses and in the event of failure to do so within a period of 15 days of such intimation/ information/knowledge, the Contractor shall be liable to pay compensation equivalent to the cost of reconstruction by the Owner. On expiry of 15 days period mentioned above, the Owner may by themselves or otherwise rectify or remove and re-execute the work or remove and replace with others, the materials or articles complained of as the case may be at the risk and expenses in all respects of the Contractor. The decision of the Engineer-in- Charge/ Site-in-Charge as to any question arising under this clause shall be final and conclusive and shall not be raised as a dispute or shall be arbitrable.

8.b. INSPECTION AND AUDIT OF CONTRACT AND WORKS This project is subject to inspection by various Government agencies of

Government of India. The contractor shall extend full cooperation to all the Government and other agencies in the inspection of the works, audit of the Contract and the documents of Contract Bills, measurements sheets etc. etc. and examination of the records of works and make enquiries interrogation as they may


deem fit, proper and necessary. Upon inspection etc. by such agencies if it is pointed out that the contract work has not been carried out according to the prescribed terms and conditions as laid down in the tender documents and if any recoveries are recommended, the same shall be recovered from the contractors running bills/final bill/from ordered/suggested Security Deposit/retention money. The Contractor shall not rise any dispute on any such account and the same shall not be arbitrable.

9. CONTRACTOR TO INDEMNIFY THE OWNER

The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner and every member, officer and employee of the Owner, also the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and his staff against all the actions, proceedings, claims, demands, costs, expenses, whatsoever arising out of or in connection with the works and all actions, proceedings, claims, demands, costs, expenses which may be made against the Owner for or in respect of or arising out of any failure by the Contractor in the performance of his obligations under the contract. The Contractor shall be liable for or in respect of or in consequence of any accident or injury to any workmen or other person in the employment of the Contractor or his sub contractor and Contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Owner against all such damages, proceedings, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation thereto.

10. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES In case of delay in completing the work beyond the period of contract the contractor

shall be liable to pay liquidated damages at the rate of 0.5% of the total contract value for every week or part thereof of the delay subject to a maximum of 5% of the total contract value. The liquidated damages shall be recovered by the Owner out of the amounts, payable to the Contractor or from the Guarantees or Deposits furnished by the Contractor or the Retention Money retained from the Bills of the Contractor. Should the amount of liquidated damages is not recoverable or recovered in any manner in part or in full, the same shall be payable by the Contractor on demand by the Owner with 24% p.a. interest till the date of payment.

11. DEFECTS AFTER TAKING OVER OR TERMINATION OF WORK

CONTRACT BY OWNER The Contractor shall remain responsible and liable to make good all losses or damages

that may occur/appear to the work carried out under this Contract within a period of 12 months from date of issue of the Completion Certificate and/or the date of Owner taking over the work, which ever is earlier. The Contractor shall issue a Bank


Guarantee to the Owner in the sum of 10% of the work entrusted in the Contract, from any

nationalised Bank acceptable to the Owner and if however, the Contractor fails to furnish such a Bank Guarantee the Owner shall have right to retain the Security Deposit and Retention Money to cover the 10% of the Guarantee amount under this clause and to return/refund the same after the expiry of the period of 12 months without any interest thereon.

12. TERMINATION OF CONTRACT 12.1 The owner may terminate the contract at any stage of the construction for reasons to be

recorded in the letter of termination. 12.2 The Owner inter alia may terminate the Contract for any or all of the following reasons

that the contractor a) has abandoned the work/Contract. b) has failed to commence the works, or has without any lawful excuse under these

conditions suspended the work for 15 consecutive days. c) has failed to remove materials from the site or to pull down and replace the work

within 15 days after receiving from the Engineer written notice that the said materials or work were condemned and/or rejected by the Engineer under specified conditions.

d) has neglected or failed to observe and perform all or any of the terms acts, matters

or things under this Contract to be observed and performed by the Contractor.

e) has to the detriment of good workmanship or in defiance of the Engineer's instructions

to the contrary sub-let any part of the Contract. f) has acted in any manner to the detrimental interest, reputation, dignity, name or

prestige of the Owner. g) has stopped attending to work without any prior notice and prior permission for a

period of 15 days. h) has become untraceable.


i) has without authority acted in violation of the terms and conditions of this contract and has committed breach of terms of the contract in best judgement of the owner.

j) has been declared insolvent/bankrupt. k) in the event of sudden death of the Contractor. 12.3 The owner on termination of such contract shall have the right to appropriate the

Security Deposit, Retention Money and invoke the Bank Guarantee furnished by the contractor and to appropriate the same towards the amounts due and payable by the contractor as per the conditions of Contract and return to the contractor excess money, if any, left over.

12.4 The owner shall have the right to carry out the unexecuted portion of work either

by themselves or by contractor through other agencies at the cost of the Contractor. 12.5 The contractor within or at the time fixed by the Owner shall depute his authorised

representative for taking joint final measurements of the works executed thus far and submit the final bill for the work as per joint final measurement within 15 days of the date of joint final measurement. If the contractor fails to depute their representative for joint measurement, the owner shall take the measurement with their Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge or any other outside representatives. Such a measurement shall not be questioned by the Contractor and no dispute can be raised by the Contractor for purpose of Arbitration.

12.6 The Owner may enter upon and take possession of the works and all plant, tools,

scaffoldings, sheds, machinery, power operated tools and steel, cement and other materials of the Contract at the site or around the site and use or employ the same for completion of the work or employ any other contractor or other person or persons to complete the works. The Contractor shall not in any way object or interrupt or do any act, matter or thing to prevent or hinder such actions, other Contractor or other persons employed for completing and finishing or using the materials and plant for the works. When the works shall be completed or as soon thereafter the Engineer shall give a notice in writing to the Contractor to remove surplus materials and plant, if any, and belonging to the Contractor except as provided elsewhere in the Contract and should the Contractor fail to do so within a period of 15 days after receipt thereof the Owner may sell the same by public auction and shall give credit to the contractor for the amount realised. The Owner shall thereafter


ascertain and certify in writing under his hand what (if anything) shall be due or payable to or by the Owner for the value of the plant and materials so taken possession and the expense or loss which the Owner shall have been put to in procuring the works, to be so completed, and the amount if any, owing to the Contractor and the amount which shall be so certified shall thereupon be paid by the Owner to the Contractor or by the Contractor to the Owner, as the case may, and the Certificate of the Owner shall be final and conclusive between the parties.

12.7 When the contract is terminated by the Owner for all or any of the reasons mentioned

above the Contractor shall not have any right to claim compensation on account of such termination.

13. FORCE MAJEURE 13.1. Any delay in or failure of the performance of either part hereto shall not constitute

default hereunder or give rise to any claims for damage, if any, to the extent such delays or failure of performance is caused by occurrences such as Acts of God or an enemy, expropriation or confiscation of facilities by Government authorities, acts of war, rebellion, sabotage or fires, floods, explosions, riots, or strikes. The Contractor shall keep records of the circumstances referred to above and bring these to the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge in writing immediately on such occurrences. The amount of time, if any, lost on any of these counts shall not be counted for the Contract period. One decision of the Owner arrived at after consultation with the Contractor, shall be final and binding. Such a determined period of time be extended by the Owner to enable the Contractor to complete the job within such extended period of time.

13.2. If Contractor is prevented or delayed from the performing any of its obligations

under this Agreement by Force Majeure, then Contractor shall notify Owner he circumstances constituting the Force Majeure and the obligations performance of which is thereby delayed or prevented, within seven days of the occurrence of the events.

# 14. ARBITRATION 14.1 All disputes and differences of whatsoever nature, whether existing or which shall at any

time arise between the parties hereto touching or concerning the agreement, meaning, operation or effect thereof or to the rights and liabilities of the parties or arising out of or in relation thereto whether during or after completion of the contract or whether before after determination, foreclosure, termination or breach of the agreement (other than those in respect of which the decision of any person is, by the contract, expressed to be final and binding) shall, after written notice by either party to the agreement to the


other of them and to the Appointing Authority hereinafter mentioned, be referred for adjudication to the Sole Arbitrator to be appointed as hereinafter provided.

14.2 The appointing authority shall either himself act as Sole Arbitrator or nominate some officer of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (referred to as owner or HPCL) to act as Sole Arbitrator to adjudicate the disputes and differences between the parties. The contractor/vendor shall not be entitled to raise any objection to the appointment of such officer of the owner as the Sole Arbitrator on the ground that the said officer is an officer and/or shareholder of the owner or that he/she has to deal or dealt with the matter to which the contract relates or that in the course of his/her duties as an officer of the owner, he/she has/had expressed views on all or any of the matters in dispute or difference.

14.3 In the event of the Arbitrator to whom the matter is referred to, does not accept the

appointment, or is unable or unwilling to act or resigns or vacates his office for any reasons whatsoever, the Appointing Authority aforesaid, shall nominate another Officer of the Owner to act as Arbitrator.

14.4 Such Officer nominated as Sole Arbitrator shall be entitled to proceed with the arbitration from

the stage at which it was left by his predecessor. It is expressly agreed between the parties that no person other than the Appointing Authority or an Officer of the Owner nominated by the Appointing Authority, shall act as an Arbitrator.

14.5 The Award of the Sole Arbitrator shall be final and binding on the parties to the Agreement. 14.6 The work under the Contract shall, however, continue during the Arbitration proceedings and

no payment due or payable to the concerned party shall be withheld (except to the extent disputed) on account of initiation, commencement or pendency of such proceedings.

14.7 The Arbitrator may give a composite or separate Award(s) in respect of each dispute or

difference referred to him and may also make interim award(s) if necessary. 14.8 The fees of the Arbitrator and expenses of arbitration, if any, shall be borne equally by the

parties unless the Sole Arbitrator otherwise directs in his award with reasons. The Award of the Sole Arbitrator shall be final and binding on both the parties.

14.9 Subject to the aforesaid, the provisions of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 or any

statutory modification or re-enactment thereof and the rules made thereunder, shall apply to the Arbitration proceedings under this Clause.

14.10 The Contract shall be governed by and constructed according to the laws in force in India. The

parties hereby submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts situated at Mumbai for all purposes. The Arbitration shall be held at Mumbai and conducted in English language.

14.11 The Appointing Authority is the Functional Director of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation

Limited. 15. GENERAL 15.1. Materials required for the works whether brought by the or supplied by the Owner shall be

stored by the contractor only at places approved by Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge. Storage and safe custody of the material shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.


15.2. Owner and/or Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge connected with the contract, shall be entitled at any time to inspect and examine any materials intended to be used in or on the works, either on the site or at factory or workshop or at other place(s) manufactured or at any places where these are laying or from which these are being obtained and the contractor shall give facilities as may be required for such inspection and examination.

15.3. In case of any class of work for which there is no such specification supplied by the owner as

is mentioned in the tender documents, such work shall be carried out in accordance with Indian Standard Specifications and if the Indian Standard Specifications do not cover the same the work should be carried out as per standard Engineering practice subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.

15.4. Should the work be suspended by reason of rain, strike, lock outs or other cause the contractor

shall take all precautions necessary for the protection of the work and at his own expense shall make good any damages arising from any of these causes. 15.5 The contractor shall cover up and protect from injury from any cause all new work also for

supplying all temporary doors, protection to windows and any other requisite protection for the whole of the works executed whether by himself or special tradesmen or sub- contractors and any damage caused must be made good by the contractors at his own expense.

# 15.6 If the contractor has quoted the items under the deemed exports, then it will be the

responsibility of the contractor to get all the benefits under deemed exports from the Government. The Owner’s responsibility shall only be limited to the issuance of required certificates. The quotation will be unconditional and phrases like “subject to availability of deemed exports benefit” etc. will not find place in it.


N. PROPOSAL FORMS


CHECK LIST

Bidders are requested to duly fill in this check list. This check list gives only certain important items to facilitate the bidder to make sure that the necessary data/information’s as called for in the bid document has been submitted by them along with their offer. This, however, does not relieve the bidder of his responsibilities to make sure that his proposal is otherwise complete in all respects:

Please ensure compliance and tick (�) against following points:

1.0 Signing and stamping each sheet of i) Offer ( ) ii) Original Bid document including Drawings ( ) iii) Addendum (if any) ( ) iv) Any other documents enclosures ( ) 2.0 Confirm that all the details in the unpriced part have been submitted

in Original under separate file covers except Bid document and drawings. ( )

3.0 Confirm that the following details have been submitted in the unpriced part: a) Covering Letter ( ) b) Bid Security/EMD as per FORMAT ( ) c) Original copy of Bidding document along with

drawing and Addendum (if any) ( ) d) List of construction tools, tackles, equipments, etc.

proposed to be deployed at site separately for each PART indicating the year of manufacture, present

location and the numbers as per FORM PF-7 ( )

e) Site Organization Chart indicating the Line of authority/responsibility/communication indicating nos. personnel at each level and bio-data of key personnel which shall be interfaced with the site organization as per FORM PF-3/3A Separately for each PART ( ) f) Financial details including Audited balance sheets and

profit and loss account statement for last 3 years. ( )

g) Exceptions & deviations as per PF – 4 ( )


h) List of sub-contractors as per PF-8 ( ) i) Construction Schedule ( ) j) Power of Attorney in the name of person signing the bid. ( ) k) Latest Sales tax Clearance certificate ( ) l) Unpriced bid ( ) m) All technical details as mentioned in the technical specification ( )

4.0 Confirm that the price bid has been submitted in duly filled in for each item, signed and stamped on each page, in a separate sealed envelope super scribing “PRICE PART – DO NOT OPEN” (Rates should be filled up in figures as well as in words). ( ) 5.0 Proper page Nos. have been given in sequential way in all the documents submitted along with your offer with Index. ( ) 6.0 Confirm that any cutting/overwriting in the unpriced Part has been initialled and stamped. ( ) 7.0 Confirm that any cutting/overwriting in the “PRICE-PART” Has been signed by you in full and stamped. ( )


F - 1

NAME OF WORK : NAME OF BIDDER :

INFORMATION ABOUT BIDDER

1. IN CASE OF INDIVIDUAL 1.1 Name 1.2 Whether Name is registered? If yes, any document of registration available? 1.3 Date of commencement of business 1.4 Whether he pays Income Tax over Rs. 10,000/- per year. If so furnish PAN No. 2.0 IN CASE OF PARTNERSHIP 2.1 Name of partners 2.2 Whether the partnership is registered. 2.3 Date of enlistment of firm. 2.4 If any of the partners of the firm pays income-tax over Rs. 10,000/- a year and if so which

of them pays the same? If so furnish PAN no. 3. IN CASE OF LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY OR COMPANY LIMITED BY

GUARANTEES 3.1 Amount of paid up capital 3.2 Name of Directors 3.3 Date of Registration of Company 3.4 Copies of the Balance Sheet of the company for the last 3 years (2004-05, 05-06, 06-07)

____________________

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER NAME AND ADDRESS OF THE BIDDER


PF – 2 NAME OF WORK : NAME OF BIDDER : LIST OF ENCLOSURES BIDDER is required to enclose the following documents as part of this tender: 1. Power of attorney of the signatory of the tender. 2. Sales Tax clearance certificate in the proforma prescribed by the Govt. of India. 3. Documents showing annual turnover of similar works for the past three years such as

annual report, profit and loss account or any other document mentioned annually. 4. Solvency Certificate from Scheduled Bank (other than Cooperative Bank). 5. Copies of Audited Balance Sheet and profit and Loss account for the last three years i.e., for

2004-05, 05-06, 06-07.

______________________ SIGNATURE OF BIDDER


PF - 3 PROJECT AND SITE ORGANISATION DESCRIPTION

The bidder must attach a description of the Head office and site of the organization proposed to be committed for execution of the work. Organization chart must include Details of key personnel, categories and numbers of personnel reporting at Head office and Site Office, separately.

The description shall show lines of authority/responsibility/communication together with a written description of the overall working of the organization with particular emphasis on the Head office/site interface and monitoring and control of progress.

Bidder agrees to augment the above chart with additional number/ categories, if required and as directed by Engineer in charge to complete the work within the completion time schedule and quoted price.

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER: _________________________ NAME OF BIDDER: _________________________ COMPANY SEAL: _________________________

This form shall be part of contract documents.


PF-3A

SUMMARY OF KEY PERSONNEL

Bidder to provide a resume for each key person (indicated in the organization chart) to be assigned by the Contractor, containing at least the following information on each person (Additional pages are to be attached and properly designated, if necessary). Such key personnel shall cover contractor’s own as well as sub-contractor’s employees. _________________________________________________________ Position Details

a) Name:

b) Education Qualifications:

c) Present Position in Bidder’s Company:

d) Relevant Experience with Employment History:

Note: Resume is generally required for the Project Manager, Lead Site Engineers and Lead Site Supervisors, all of whom would be assigned full time to the contract.


PF - 4 NAME OF WORK : BIDDING DOCUMENT NO. : EXCEPTION AND DEVIATIONS STATEMENT Bidder shall list all the deviations in the following given format only. Bidder may stipulate exceptions and deviations to Bidding Document, if considered unavoidable as per the following format: S.NO. PAGE NO. OF

TENDER DOCUMENT

CLAUSE NO. SUBJECT DEVIATIONS

Any exceptions/deviations brought out elsewhere in the Bid shall not be construed as valid. SIGNATURE OF BIDDER : ___________________ NAME OF BIDDER : ___________________


PF – 5 NAME OF WORK : BIDDING DOCUMENT NO. : COMPLIANCE TO BID REQUIREMENT

We confirm that our Bid complies with the total Techno-Commercial requirements of Bidding Document.

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER : ___________________

NAME OF BIDDER : ___________________


PF-6 NAME OF WORK : BIDDING DOCUMENT NO. :

DETAILS OF WORK DONE (As per clause 2.0 of NIT) SR.NO.

FULL POSTAL ADDRRESS OF OWNER & NAME OF OFFICER-IN-CHARGE

DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK

VALUE OF CONTRACT

DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF WORK

SCHEDULED COPLETION

TIME(MONTHS)

DATE OF ACTUAL COMPLETION

REASONS FOR TIME OVER-RUN, IF ANY

NOTE: Copy of Letter of award and completion certificate/Any other document indicating completion of the Contract for at least two similar works shall be submitted along with the Bid.

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER : _____________________ NAME OF BIDDER : _____________________


PF-7

NAME OF WORK : BIDDING DOCUMENT NO. : DETAILS OF PROPOSED EQUIPMENT, TOOLS & TACKLES The Bidder shall herein details of constructions equipment, tools, tackles proposed to be deployed for this work and shall indicate in each case whether the same (A) already owned by Bidder and available for use of this Contract. (B) Anticipated to be hired (C) anticipated to be purchased. In case of (A) present location shall be stated. In case of (B) and (C) name and location of lending agency or supplier shall be stated. ITEM TO BE DEPLOYED

DESCRIPTION MAKE, MODEL AND CAPACITY

NUMBERS

YEAR OF MANUFACTURE

CATEGORY (A)OR (B) OR (C) ABOVE

LOCATION REMARKS

Bidder agrees to augment the above list with additional number/categories of equipment, tools and tackles, if required and directed by the Engineer-in-Charge, to complete the work within the completion time schedule and quoted price. SIGNATURE OF BIDDER : __________________ NAME OF BIDDER : __________________


SUB-CONTRACTOR’S LIST NAME & ADDRESS OF SUB-ONTRACTOR

DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE SUB-CONTRACTED

EXPERIENCE DETAILS OF THE SUB-CONTRACTOR IN BRIEF IN TERMS OF DETAILS OF WORK DONE AND MAXIMUM SINGLE CONTRACT VALUE EXECUTED

NOTE : i) IF NO SUB-CONTRACTOR ARE ANTICIPATED, ENTER THE WORD ‘NONE’ ii) INCASE OF BACK-UP CONSULTANT MOU/CONSENT LETTER SHOULD BE

FURNISHED.

(SIGNATURE OF BIDDER)


COMMERCIAL QUESTIONNAIRRE

The Bidders reply /confirmation as furnished in the commercial questionnaire shall supercede the stipulations mentioned elsewhere in their bid.

SL.NO HPCL’S QUERY BIDDERS REPLY/ CONFIRMATION

1. Confirm that Bid Security/Earnest Money as per bid stipulations have been furnished along with unpriced bid.

2. Confirm that all details, in unpriced part i.e. Part-I has been submitted in original.

3. Confirm that prices have been submitted in a separate sealed envelope super scribing “PRICE PART-DO NOT OPEN” and in the Price Bid format.

4. Confirm your compliance to the qualification criteria of bid document.

5. Confirm your compliance to scope of work/technical specifications as specified in bid document.

6. Confirm that all materials shall be supplied as per standards & specifications given in bid document.

7. Confirm that all materials except HPCL’s Scope of supply shall be supplied by the contractor at their cost without any liability on the part of HPCL.

8. Confirm that the quoted Price includes the cost for carrying out complete work as per drawings/specific requirement/schedule of quantities/scope of work, Preamble to SOQ, Unpriced bid, SOQ, SHE Policy, SCC & GTC of the tender document whether expressly mentioned in the item description of Priced Bid or not.

9. Confirm that the quoted price includes all taxes (service taxes etc.), duties(customs, excise, etc.) and insurance cost as specified in Special Conditions of contract.

10. Confirm that AMC rates have been quoted in the “PRICE BID” format.

11. Confirm your compliance to HPCL payment terms in toto as per Appendix –I of Special Conditions of contract.

12. Confirm that there are No counter terms and conditions in the Price-Part and in case any terms and conditions are mentioned, the same shall be treated as null & void.

13. Confirm that all the proposal forms along with the Check List are filled and submitted along with Part-1 of offer strictly as per proforma given in bid document.


SL.NO HPCL’S QUERY BIDDERS REPLY/

CONFIRMATION

14. Confirm that you have proposed adequate Project/Site organization with supervisory personnel having good experience and the chart is enclosed.

15. Confirm that the price shall be firm till completion of work in all respects.

16. Confirm that the quoted Price is not subjected to any escalation.

17. Confirm that all Technical Data for IBMS equipments forming part of this tender document has been filled in.

18. The planning schedule, S-curves, manpower estimate, construction equipment deployment schedule etc., submitted by the bidder with his Bid, is well considered and adequate and shall not be basis for extra compensation in case actual needs are higher.

• Detailed planning schedule developed by Contractor after award may be subject to fluctuations depending upon actual progress of the project and available work front.

• CO-ORDINATION and making available Contractor of all staff, manpower, construction equipment, tools, cranes, etc. and materials as required for a timely completion of all WORK as per HPCL’s. Construction and priority schedule and in accordance with the available work front are included in the quoted rates.

• Bio data of key personnel; such as Project Manager, Construction Manager; Lead Engineer for all relevant categories has been submitted in your Bid.

19 Please confirm that all the construction equipment, tools & tackles as indicated in Proposal Form PF-7 shall be deployed at site. You shall also deploy additional equipments if deemed necessary to complete the works in Schedule Time.

20 Confirm that the rates have been printed/ typed in figures and words. Also the amount column has been printed/ typed.

21 Please confirm whether the vendor had gone through the scope matrix between AC vendor and I/O Summary and has considered the same while quoting.

22 Please confirm whether the vendor has considered scope of design wherever it is mentioned in the Schedule Of Quantities.


CHECK LIST

Bidders are requested to duly fill in this check list. This check list gives only certain important items to facilitate the bidder to make sure that the necessary data/information’s as called for in the bid document has been submitted by them along with their offer. This, however, does not relieve the bidder of his responsibilities to make sure that his proposal is otherwise complete in all respects:

Please ensure compliance and tick (�) against following points:

1.0 Signing and stamping each sheet of i) Offer ( ) ii) Original Bid document including Drawings ( ) iii) Addendum (if any) ( ) iv) Any other documents enclosures ( ) 2.0 Confirm that all the details in the unpriced part have been submitted

in Original including Bid document and drawings. ( )

3.0 Confirm that the following details have been submitted in the unpriced part: a) Covering Letter ( ) b) Bid Security/EMD as per FORMAT ( ) c) Original copy of Bidding document along with

drawing and Addendum (if any) ( )

d) List of construction tools, tackles, equipments, etc. proposed to be deployed at site separately for each

PART indicating the year of manufacture, present location and the numbers as per FORM PF-7 ( )

e) Site Organization Chart indicating the Line of authority/responsibility/communication indicating nos. personnel at each level and bio-data of key personnel which shall be interfaced with the site organization as per FORM PF-3/3A ( )


f) Financial details including Audited balance sheets and

profit and loss account statement for last 3 years. ( )

g) Exceptions & deviations as per PF – 4 ( ) h) List of sub-contractors as per PF-8 ( ) i) Construction Schedule ( ) j) Power of Attorney in the name of person signing the bid. ( ) k) Latest Sales tax Clearance certificate ( ) l) Priced bid in proper format as per relevant clause of ITB ( ) m) All technical details as mentioned in the technical specification ( )

4.0 Confirm that the price bid has been submitted in duly filled in for each item, signed and stamped on each page, in a separate sealed envelope super scribing “PRICE PART – DO NOT OPEN” (Rates should be filled up in figures as well as in words). ( ) 5.0 Proper page Nos. have been given in sequential way in all the documents submitted along with your offer with Index. ( ) 6.0 Confirm that any cutting/overwriting in the unpriced Part has been initialled and stamped. ( ) 7.0 Confirm that any cutting/overwriting in the “PRICE-PART” Has been signed by you in full and stamped. ( ) 8.0 Confirm that the AMC rates have been quoted in the Price Bid ( ) 9.0 Confirm that all the technical data of IBMS equipments in the unpriced part of this tender document has been duly filled in ( )


O. DRAWINGS


LIST OF DRAWINGS FOR IBMS TENDER

SL. NO DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO: REVISION

1 PROPOSED FIRST FLOOR DATA CENTER GAS SUPPRESSION SYSTEM-2 HPCL-IBMS-GM-2007-59306 R0

2 PROPOSED FIRST FLOOR DATA CENTER GAS SUPPRESSION SYSTEM-1 HPCL-IBMS-GM-2007-59309 R0

3 FIRE ALARM & PA SYSTEM - SECOND FLOOR HPCL-IBMS-GM-2007-55844 R1

4 FIRE ALARM & PA SYSTEM - FIRST FLOOR HPCL-IBMS-GM-2007-55845 R1

5 FIRE ALARM & PA SYSTEM- GROUND FLOOR HPCL-IBMS-GM-2007-55846 R1

6 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM FOR DDC PANEL-AHU HPCL-IBMS-GM-2007-59302 R0

7 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM FOR DDC PANEL - CHILLER HPCL-IBMS-GM-2007-59303 R0

8 ACCESS CONTROL & CCTV GROUND FLOOR HPCL-IBMS-GM-2006-46785 R2

9 ACCESS CONTROL & CCTV FIRST FLOOR HPCL-IBMS-GM-2006-46786 R2

10 ACCESS CONTROL & CCTV SECOND FLOOR HPCL-IBMS-GM-2006-46787 R2

11 DDC LOCATION FOR GROUND FLOOR HPCL-IBMS-GM-2007-59314 R0

12 DDC LOCATION FOR FIRST FLOOR HPCL-IBMS-GM-2007-59313 R0

13 DDC LOCATION FOR SECOND FLOOR HPCL-IBMS-GM-2007-59315 R0

14 CCTV LAYOUT FOR SITE PLAN HPCL-IBMS-GM-2007-59379 R0

NOTE: ALL ATTACHED DRGS ALONG WITH THE TENDER ARE FOR TENDERING PURPOSE ONLY AND FOR THE EXECUTION PURPOSE EXECUTION DRGS WILL BE RELEASED BY HPCL/CONSULTANT.